Kia, THE COMPANY
Thank you for becoming the owner of a new Kia vehicle.
As a global car manufacturer focused on building high-quality vehi-
cles with exceptional value, Kia Motors is dedicated to providing you
with a customer service experience that exceeds your expectations.
All information contained in this Owner’s Manual is accurate at the
time of publication. However, Kia reserves the right to make changes
at any time so that our policy of continual product improvement can
be carried out.
This manual applies to all models of this vehicle and includes descrip-
tions and explanations of optional as well as standard equipment. As a
result, you may encounter material in this manual that is not applica-
ble to your specific Kia vehicle.
Drive safely and enjoy your Kia!
i
Thank you for choosing a Kia vehicle.
When you require service, remember that your Kia dealer
knows your vehicle best. Your dealer has factory-trained tech-
nicians, recommended special tools and genuine Kia replace-
ment parts. It is dedicated to your complete customer satisfac-
tion.
Because subsequent owners require this important information
as well, this publication should remain with the vehicle if it is
sold.
This manual will familiarize you with operational, mainte-
nance and safety information about your new vehicle. It is sup-
plemented by a Warranty and Consumer Information manual
that provides important information on all warranties regarding
your vehicle.
We urge you to read these publications carefully and follow the
recommendations to help assure enjoyable and safe operation
of your new vehicle.
Kia offers a great variety of options, components and features
for its various models. Therefore, some of the equipment
described in this manual, along with the various illustrations,
may not be applicable to your particular vehicle.
The information and specifications provided in this manual
were accurate at the time of printing. Kia reserves the right to
discontinue or change specifications or design at any time
without notice and without incurring any obligation. If you
have questions, always check with your Kia dealer.
We assure you of our continuing interest in your motoring
pleasure and satisfaction in your Kia vehicle.
© 2014 Kia MOTORS AMERICA, Inc.
All rights reserved. May not be reproduced or translated in
whole or in part without the written consent of Kia MOTORS
AMERICA, Inc.
Printed in Korea
Foreword
ii
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
I
Introduction
How to use this manual / Fuel requirements / Vehicle break-in process /
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview / Interior overview / Instrument panel overview / Engine compartment
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Seats / Seat belts / Child restraint system / Air bag
Features of your vehicle
Smart key / Door locks / Trunk / Windows / Hood / Fuel filler lid / Panoramic sunroof / Steering wheel / Mirrors /
Instrument cluster / Lighting / Wipers & Washers / Climate control system / Audio system / Etc.
Driving your vehicle
Before driving / Engine start/stop button / Transmission / Brake system /
Cruise control system / Advanced Smart Cruise Control system / Winter driving / Vehicle load limit / Etc.
What to do in an emergency
Road warning / Emergency while driving / Emergency starting / Engine overheat / TPMS / Flat tire / Towing / Etc.
Maintenance
Engine compartment / Maintenance service / Engine oil / Engine coolant / Brake fluid / Washer fluid / Parking
brake / Air cleaner / Wiper blades / Battery / Tire and wheels / Fuses / Light bulbs / Etc.
Specifications, Consumer information and Reporting safety defects
Index
Table of contents
1
Introduction
How to use this manual ......................................1-2
Fuel requirements...............................................1-3
• Gasoline containing alcohol and methanol .............1-3
• Do not use methanol...............................................1-4
• Fuel Additives..........................................................1-4
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders ..1-6
We want to help you get the greatest
possible driving pleasure from your
vehicle. Your Owner’s Manual can
assist you in many ways. We strong-
ly recommend that you read the
entire manual. To help minimize the
chance of death or injury, you must
read the WARNING and CAUTION
sections in the manual.
Illustrations complement the words
in this manual to best explain how to
enjoy your vehicle. By reading your
manual, you will learn about fea-
tures, important safety information,
conditions.
The general layout of the manual is
provided in the Table of Contents.
Use the index when looking for a
specific area or subject; it has an
alphabetical listing of all located in
the back of this manual.
Sections: This manual has eight sec-
tions plus an index. Each section
begins with a brief list of contents so
you can tell at a glance if that section
has the information you want.
You will find various types of safety
instructions in this manual. These
instructions were prepared to help
enhance your personal safety.
Carefully read and follow ALL proce-
dures and recommendations provid-
ed in these instructions.
✽ NOTICE
A NOTICE indicates interesting or
helpful information is being provided.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
1-2
Introduction
A WARNING indicates a situa-
tion in which harm, serious bod-
ily injury or death could result if
the warning is ignored.
WARNING
A CAUTION indicates a situation
in which damage to your vehicle
could result if the caution is
ignored.
CAUTION
Your new vehicle is designed to
obtain maximum performance with
UNLEADED FUEL, as well as mini-
mize exhaust emissions and spark
plug fouling.
3.8 engine
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having an octane
number (R+M)/2) of 87 (Research
Octane Number 91) or higher.
5.0 engine
Your new vehicle is designed to use
only unleaded fuel having an octane
number ((R+M)/2) of 87 (Research
Octane Number 91) or higher.
For improved vehicle performance,
premium unleaded fuel with an
octane number ((R+M)/2) of 91
(Research Octane Number 96) or
higher is recommended.
Never add any fuel system cleaning
agents to the fuel tank other than
what has been specified. (Consult an
authorized Kia dealer for details.)
✽ NOTICE
Tighten the cap until it clicks once.
otherwise the Check Engine
light will illuminate.
Gasoline containing alcohol and
methanol
Gasohol, a mixture of gasoline and
ethanol (also known as grain alco-
hol), and gasoline or gasohol con-
taining methanol (also known as
wood alcohol) are being marketed
along with or instead of leaded or
unleaded gasoline.
Pursuant to EPA regulations, ethanol
may be used in your vehicle. Do not
use gasohol containing more than
10% ethanol, and do not use gaso-
line or gasohol containing any
methanol. Ethanol provides less
energy than gasoline and it attracts
water, and it is thus likely to reduce
your fuel efficiency and could lower
your MPG results. Methanol may
cause drivability problems and dam-
age to the fuel system. Discontinue
using gasohol of anykind if drivability
problems occur. Vehicle damage or
drivability problems may not be cov-
ered by the manufacturer's warranty
if they result from the use of:
1.Gasoline or gasohol containing
methanol.
2.Leaded fuel or leaded gasohol.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Introduction
1
1-3
Refueling
• Do not "top off" after the noz-
zle automatically shuts off.
Attempts to force more fuel
into the tank can cause fuel
overflow onto you and the
ground causing a risk of fire.
• Always check that the fuel cap
is installed securely to pre-
vent fuel spillage, especially
in the event of an accident.
WARNING
"E85" fuel is an alternative fuel com-
prised of 85 percent ethanol and 15
percent gasoline, and is manufac-
tured exclusively for use in Flexible
Fuel Vehicles. “E85” is not compat-
ible with your vehicle. Use of “E85”
may result in poor engine perform-
ance and damage to your vehicle's
engine and fuel system. Kia recom-
mends that customers do not use
fuel with an ethanol content exceed-
ing 10 percent.
✽ NOTICE
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty does not cover damage to
the fuel system or any performance
problems caused by the use of “E85”
fuel.
Gasoline containing MMT
Some gasoline contains harmful man-
ganese-based fuel additives such as
MMT (Methylcyclopentadienyl
Manganese Tricarbonyl).
Kia does not recommend the use of
gasoline containing MMT.
This type of fuel can reduce vehicle
performance and affect your emission
control system.
The malfunction indicator lamp on the
cluster may come on.
Do not use methanol
Fuels containing methanol (wood
alcohol) should not be used in your
vehicle. This type of fuel can reduce
vehicle performance and damage
components of the fuel system.
✽ NOTICE
Your New Vehicle Limited
Warranty may not cover damage to
the fuel system and any perform-
ance problems that are caused by
the use of fuels containing methanol.
Fuel Additives
Kia recommends that you use good
quality gasolines treated with deter-
gent additives such as TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline, which helps
prevent deposit formation in the
engine. These gasolines will help the
engine run cleaner and enhance per-
formance of the Emission Control
System. For more information on
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline,
please go to the website (www.top-
tiergas.com).
For Customers who do not use TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly,
and have problems starting or the
engine does not run smoothly, addi-
tives that you can buy separately
may be added to the gasoline. If
TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not
available, one bottle of additive
added to the fuel tank at 7,500 miles
or every engine oil change is recom-
mended. Additives are available from
your authorized Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do
not mix other additives.
1-4
Introduction
Operation in foreign countries
If you are going to drive your vehicle
in another country, be sure to:
• Observe all regulations regarding
registration and insurance.
• Determine that acceptable fuel is
available.
No special break-in period is needed.
By following a few simple precautions
for the first 600 miles (1,000 km) you
may add to the performance, econo-
my and life of your vehicle.
• Do not race the engine.
• While driving, keep your engine
speed (rpm, or revolutions per
minute) between 2,000 rpm and
4,000 rpm.
• Do not maintain a single speed for
long periods of time, either fast or
slow. Varying engine speed is
needed to properly break-in the
engine.
• Avoid hard stops, except in emer-
gencies, to allow the brakes to seat
properly.
Introduction
1
1-5
VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCESS
1-6
Introduction
VEHICLE DATA COLLECTION AND EVENT DATA RECORDERS
This vehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR). The
main purpose of an EDR is to
record, in certain crash or near
crash-like situations, such as an
air bag deployment or hitting a
road obstacle, data that will assist
in understanding how a vehicle's
systems performed. The EDR is
designed to record data related to
vehicle dynamics and safety sys-
tems for a short period of time,
typically 30 seconds or less. The
EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
* How various systems in your
vehicle were operating;
* Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/ fastened;
* How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and,
* How fast the vehicle was travel-
ing.
These data can help provide a bet-
ter understanding of the circum-
stances in which crashes and
injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data
are recorded by your vehicle only
if a non-trivial crash situation
occurs; no data are recorded by
the EDR under normal driving con-
ditions and no personal data (e.g.,
name, gender, age, and crash loca-
tion) are recorded. However, other
parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with
the type of personally identifying
data routinely acquired during a
crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR,
special equipment is required, and
access to the vehicle or the EDR is
needed. In addition to the vehicle
manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the
special equipment, can read the
information if they have access to
the vehicle or the EDR.
Your vehicle at a glance
Exterior overview ................................................2-2
Interior overview .................................................2-4
Instrument panel overview..................................2-5
Engine compartment ..........................................2-7
2
2-2
Your vehicle at a glance
EXTERIOR OVERVIEW
1. Hood......................................................4-32
2. Head lamp ...........................................4-115
3. Fog lamp .............................................4-119
4. Tire and wheel ..............................7-53, 8-5
5. Outside rearview mirror.........................4-53
6. Panoramic Sunroof................................4-36
7. Front windshield wiper blades....4-120, 7-45
8. Windows ................................................4-28
OKH013001N
■ Front view
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
Your vehicle at a glance
2
2-3
9. Door.......................................................4-17
10. Fuel filler lid .........................................4-34
11. Rear combination lamp .......................7-90
12. Trunk lid ...............................................4-21
13. High mounted stop lamp .....................7-91
14. Rear window defroster ......................4-127
15. Parking assist system .......................4-102
16. Antenna.............................................4-163
17. Rearview camera ..............................4-107
OKH013002N
■ Rear view
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
INTERIOR OVERVIEW
2-4
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Inside door handle...................................4-18
2. Front power seat adjust switch..................3-5
3. Outside rearview mirror folding ...............4-55
4. Outside rearview mirror control...............4-54
5. Power window lock switch .......................4-31
6. Central door lock switch ..........................4-19
7. Power window switch...............................4-29
8. BSD On/OFF button ................................5-79
9. HUD On/OFF button..............................4-100
10. Parking Assist button...........................4-102
11. ESC Off button ......................................5-42
12. Trunk lid open button.......................4-21, 22
13. Trunk lid close button.......................4-21, 22
14. Trunk lid open / close button..................4-22
15. Instrument panel illumination control
lever........................................................4-58
16. Electric parking brake switch.................5-30
17. Fuel filler lid open switch .......................4-34
18. Hood release lever.................................4-32
19. Steering wheel.......................................4-42
20. Tilt and telescopic steering control lever ...4-42
21. Brake pedal............................................5-27
22. Accelerator pedal ....................................5-9
OKH013003N
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
Your vehicle at a glance
2
2-5
1. Instrument cluster..............................4-57
2. Horn...................................................4-44
3. Driver's front air bag ..........................3-51
4. Engine start/stop button ......................5-6
5. Audio / Video / Navigation ...............4-162
6. Climate control system ....................4-128
7. Clock................................................4-156
8. Hazard warning flasher .......................6-2
9. Passenger's front air bag...................3-51
10. Glove box.......................................4-147
11. SBC(Shift by cable) control lever.....5-11
12. SBW(Shift by wire) control lever......5-16
13. Drive mode button ...........................5-52
14. Auto hold button ..............................5-36
15. Electric parking brake switch...........5-30
16. DIS central key ..............................4-162
17. Front blind spot monitoring system
On/Off button .................................4-110
18. Rear curtain folding button ............4-159
19. Surround View Monitoring System
On/Off button .................................4-111
20. Snow mode button ..........................5-52
21. Center console storage box ..........4-146
OKH013004N
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
2-6
Your vehicle at a glance
1. Audio remote control buttons ..............4-164
2. Bluetooth hands free buttons ..............4-163
3. LDWS On/Off button .............................5-75
4. Heated steering wheel On/Off button....4-43
5. Light control / Turn signals lever..........4-114
6. Wiper and washer control lever...........4-120
7. LCD display control ...............................4-58
8. Advanced Smart Cruise Control switch
(vehicle to vehicle distance setting) ......5-65
9. Cruise control switch / Advanced Smart
Cruise Control Switch ...................5-56/5-61
OKH013005N
❈ The actual shape may differ from the illustration.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Your vehicle at a glance
2
2-7
1. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-32
2. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-32
3. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-34
4. Radiator cap .....................................7-36
5. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-37
6. Power steering fluid reservoir ...........7-38
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-39
8. Air cleaner.........................................7-40
9. Fuse box ...........................................7-68
10. Jumper terminal ................................6-5
OKH013007N
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
❈ The battery is in the trunk.
■
3.8L Engine
2-8
Your vehicle at a glance
OKH013006N
1. Engine coolant reservoir...................7-34
2. Radiator cap .....................................7-36
3. Brake fluid reservoir..........................7-37
4. Air cleaner.........................................7-40
5. Engine oil dipstick .............................7-32
6. Engine oil filler cap ...........................7-32
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir .....7-39
8. Fuse box ...........................................7-68
9. Power steering fluid reservoir ...........7-38
10. Jumper terminal ................................6-5
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
❈ The battery is in the trunk.
■ 5.0L Engine
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Seat ...................................................................3-2
• Front seat adjustment..............................................3-4
• Driver position memory system...............................3-7
• Headrest (for front seat) ..........................................3-8
• Rear seat adjustment............................................3-13
• Headrest (for rear seat).........................................3-16
Seat belts..........................................................3-20
• Seat belt restraint system......................................3-20
• Pre-tensioner seat belt .........................................3-25
• Pre-Safe Seat belt (PSB) ......................................3-28
• Seat belt precautions ............................................3-29
• Care of seat belts..................................................3-31
Child restraint system .......................................3-32
• Using a child restraint system ...............................3-33
• Tether anchor system ...........................................3-36
• Lower anchor system ............................................3-37
Air bag - advanced supplemental restraint system
........................................................................3-39
• Air bag system operation ......................................3-40
• Do not install a child restraint on the front
passenger's seat .................................................3-41
• Air bag warning light .............................................3-42
• SRS components and functions............................3-43
• Occupant Detection System (ODS) ......................3-45
• Driver's and passenger's front air bag ..................3-51
• Side air bag...........................................................3-53
• Curtain air bag ......................................................3-55
• Inflation and non-inflation conditions of the air bag.3-56
• SRS Care ..............................................................3-61
• Air bag warning label ............................................3-62
3
3-2
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Driver’s seat
(1) Seat sliding forward or back-
ward**/ Seat height and cushion
tilting adjustment
(2) Seat cushion length adjustment
(3) Seatback angle adjustment
(4) Headrest height adjustment
(5) Driver position memory system
(6) Lumbar support adjustment
Front passenger’s seat
(7) Seat sliding forward or backward/
Seat height and cushion tilting
adjustment*
(8) Seatback angle adjustment
(9) Headrest height adjustment
SEAT
OKH033001N
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-3
Rear seat
(10) Seat sliding forward or back-
ward adjustment with seatback
angle adjustment
(11) Easy access button
(12) Front passenger’s seat forward
and rearward*
(13) Front passenger’s seat back
angle*
(14) Lumber support adjustment
(15) Rear lock button
(16) Headrest
(17) Armrest
(18) Ski through*
*: if equipped
**: The height of the driver's headrest
is automatically adjusted simulta-
neously with the driver's seat slid-
ing adjustment operation.
Loose objects
Do not place anything in the dri-
ver's foot well or under the front
seats. Loose objects in the dri-
ver's foot area could interfere
with the operation of the foot
pedals.
WARNING
Driver responsibility for
passengers
The driver must advise the pas-
senger to keep the seatback in
an upright position whenever
the vehicle is in motion. If a seat
is reclined during an accident,
the restraint system's ability to
restrain will be greatly reduced.
WARNING
OKH033107N
Front seat adjustment - power
The front seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the doors. Before driving, adjust the
seat to the proper position so as to
easily control the steering wheel,
pedals and switches on the instru-
ment panel.
3-4
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Seat cushion
Occupants should never sit on
seat cushions. The passenger's
hips may slide under the lap
portion of the seat belt during
an accident or a sudden stop.
WARNING
Driver’s seat
• Never attempt to adjust the
seat while the vehicle is mov-
ing. This could result in loss
of control of your vehicle.
• Do not allow anything to inter-
fere with the normal position
of the seatback. Storing items
against a seatback or in any
other way interfering with
proper locking of a seatback
could result in a serious or
fatal injury in a sudden stop
or collision.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Sit as far back as possible
from the steering wheel while
still maintaining comfortable
control of your vehicle. A dis-
tance of at least 10" from your
chest to the steering wheel is
recommended. Failure to do
so could result in air bag infla-
tion injuries to the driver.
Seat adjustment
• Do not adjust the seat while
wearing seat belts. Moving the
seat forward will cause strong
pressure on the abdomen.
• Do not place your hand near
the seat bottom or seat track
while adjusting the seat. Your
hand could get caught in the
seat mechanism.
WARNING
The power seat is operable with
the ignition OFF.
Therefore, children should never
be left unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING
Forward and backward
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position. Release the switch
once the seat reaches the desired
position.
Seatback angle
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seatback to
the desired angle. Release the
switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-5
OKH033002N OKH032005N
• The power seat is driven by an
electric motor. Stop operating
once the adjustment is com-
pleted, excessive operation
may damage the electrical
equipment.
• When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large amount
of electrical power. To prevent
unnecessary charging system
drain, don’t adjust the power
seat longer than necessary
while the engine is not running.
• Do not operate two or more
power seat control switches at
the same time. Doing so may
result in power seat motor or
electrical component malfunc-
tion.
CAUTION
Seat cushion height
Pull the front portion of the control
switch up to raise or down to lower
the front part of the seat cushion. Pull
the rear portion of the control switch
up to raise or down to lower the rear
part of the seat cushion. Release the
switch once the seat reaches the
desired position.
Lumbar support
(for driver’s seat)
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pressing the lumbar support switch
on the side of the drivers seat. Press
the front portion of the switch (1) to
increase support, or the rear portion
of the switch (2), to decrease support.
Move the support position up and
down by pressing the switch (3) or (4).
Release the switch once the seat
reaches the desired position.
Cushion length adjustment
(for driver’s seat)
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat cushion
to the desired length. Release the
switch once the seat cushion reach-
es the desired length.
3-6
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
OKH033006N
OKH033007N
OKH033004N
Driver position memory system
A driver position memory system is
provided to store and recall the driv-
er seat, outside rearview mirror,
HUD* (Head-Up Display), bright
ness of the instrument cluster illumi-
nation and steering wheel positions
with a simple button operation.
* : if equipped
By saving the desired positions into
the system memory, different drivers
can reposition the driver seat, out-
side rearview mirror and steering
wheel based upon their driving pref-
erence. If the battery is disconnect-
ed, the position memory will be lost
and the driving positions should be
restored in the system.
Storing positions into memory
using the buttons on the door
Storing driver’s seat positions
1.Check that the shift lever is in P
(Park) and the Engine Start/Stop
Button is in the ON position.
2.Adjust the driver seat, outside
rearview mirror, HUD* (Head-up
Display), bright ness of the instru-
ment cluster illumination and steer-
ing wheel to positions comfortable
for the driver.
3.Press the SET button on the control
panel. The system will beep once.
4.Press one of the memory buttons
(1 or 2) within 5 seconds after
pressing the SET button. The sys-
tem will beep twice when memory
has been successfully stored.
* : if equipped
OKH043039N
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-7
Never attempt to operate the
driver position memory system
while the vehicle is moving.
This could result in loss of con-
trol, and an accident causing
death, serious injury, or proper-
ty damage.
WARNING
3-8
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Recalling positions from memory
1 Check that the shift lever is in P
(Park) and the Engine Start/Stop
Button is in the ON position.
2.To recall the position in memory,
press the desired memory button
(1 or 2). The system will beep
once, then the driver seat, outside
rearview mirror and steering wheel
will automatically adjust to the
stored positions.
Adjusting the control switch for the
driver seat while the system is recall-
ing the stored position will cause the
movement to stop and move in the
direction that the control switch is
moved.
Easy access function
When exiting the vehicle, the steer-
ing wheel will move away from the
driver and the seat will move rear-
ward when the engine is turned off.
When entering the vehicle, the steer-
ing wheel will move toward the driver
and the seat will move forward when
the Engine Start/Stop Button is
pressed to the ACC position or START
position.
You can activate or deactivate this
feature. Refer to "User settings" in
chapter 4.
Headrest (for front seat)
The driver's and front passenger's
seats are equipped with a headrest
for the occupant's safety and com-
fort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for the driver and front passen-
ger, but also helps protect the head
and neck in the event of a collision.
OKH033109N
Use caution when recalling
adjustment memory while sitting
in the vehicle. Push the seat
position control switch to the
desired position immediately if
the seat moves too far in any
direction.
WARNING
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-9
For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest should
be adjusted so the middle of the
headrest is at the same height of the
center of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is similar with
the height of the top of their eyes.
Also, adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible.
For this reason, the use of a cushion
that holds the body away from the
seatback is not recommended.
Forward and backward adjustment
The headrest may be adjusted for-
ward or rearward by pulling the lower
part of the headrest forward or rear-
ward to the desired detent in the
direction of the arrow. Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports
the head and neck.
Adjusting the height up and down
For manual type
To raise the headrest
1.Pull it up to the desired position (1).
To lower the headrest
1.Push and hold the release button
(2) on the headrest support.
2.Lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
OKH033010N OKH033008N
Headrest removal/adjust-
ment
• Do not operate the vehicle
with the headrests removed.
Headrests help provide criti-
cal neck and head support in
a crash.
• Do not adjust the headrest
height while the vehicle is in
motion. Driver may lose con-
trol of the vehicle.
WARNING
For power type
To raise the headrest
1. Push the control switch up (1).
To lower the headrest
2. Push the control switch down (2).
Release the switch once the head-
rest reaches the desired position.
Removal
1.Recline the seatback (2) with the
recliner control switch (1).
For manual type
2.Raise it as far as it can go.
3.Press the release button (3) while
pulling upward (4).
3-10
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
OKH033011N
OKH033095N
OKH033096N
For power type
1.Raise it as far as it can go by
pulling the switch up (3).
2.Pull the headrest up (4).
Installation
1.Recline the seatback (2) with the
recliner control switch (1).
For manual type
2.Put the headrest poles (3) into the
holes while pressing the release
button (4).
3.Recline the seatback (6) with the
recliner control switch (5).
4.Adjust the headrest to the appro-
priate height.
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-11
OKH033098N
OKH033100N
OKH033101N
For power type
2.Raise it as far as it can go by
pulling the switch up (3).
3.Put the headrest poles (4) into the
holes and then pull the switch
down (5) until the headrest moves
to the lowest position.
4.To install the headrest securely,
move the headrest up and down 2
or 3 times by pulling the switch up
and down.
5.Recline the seatback (7) with the
recliner control switch (6).
6.Adjust the headrest to the appro-
priate height.
Electronic active headrest
The electronic active headrest is
designed to move the headrest for-
ward and upward when impact sen-
sor detects a rear impact.
This helps to prevent the driver's and
front passenger’s heads from moving
backward during a collision.
3-12
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
OKH033102N OKH033110N
Do not damage the Active
Headrest. Headrests can provide
critical neck and head support in
a crash.
CAUTION
Rear seat adjustment
- for power seat (if equipped)
The rear seat can be adjusted by
using the control switches located on
the door.
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-13
The power seat is operable with
the Engine Start/Stop Button in
OFF.
Therefore, children should never
be left unattended in the vehicle.
WARNING
• The power seat is driven by
electric motors. Stop operat-
ing once the adjustment is
completed. Excessive opera-
tion may damage the electri-
cal equipment.
• When in operation, the power
seat consumes a large amount
of electrical power. To prevent
unnecessary battery drain,
don’t adjust the power seat
longer than necessary while
the engine is not running.
• Do not operate two or more
power seat control switches
at the same time. Doing so
may result in power seat
motor or electrical component
malfunction.
CAUTION
Use extreme caution so that
hands or other objects are not
caught in the seat mechanisms
while the seat is moving.
Do not adjust the seat while
wearing seat belts. Moving the
seat cushion forward may
cause strong pressure on the
abdomen.
WARNING
Do not operate the rear power
seat while the child seat is
installed.
WARNING
Forward, backward and seatback
angle (for power seat)
Push the control switch forward or
backward to move the seat to the
desired position. Release the switch
once the seat reaches the desired
position.
Easy access switch
(for power seat)
Your vehicle features an easy access
system to provide convenient access
for rear passengers. When opening
the rear door, the rear seats will
move rearward automatically to pro-
vide easier access for passengers.
This easy access system will operate
only when the control switch is in
"ON" position.
Additional switches for adjusting
the front passenger seat
(if equipped)
The switch is located in the armrest
of the rear seat.
To adjust the position of front pas-
senger’s seat ;
Press the control switch forward (1)
or rearward (2) to move the seat to
the desired position.
Press the control switch forward (3)
or rearward (4) to move the seatback
to the desired angle.
Do not use these switches while the
front passenger seat is occupied.
3-14
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
OKH033035N OKH033036N
OKH033037N
Lumbar support
(for rear right and left passenger’s
seat) (if equipped)
• For right side :
Press the R switch.
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pushing the lumbar support lever.
Push the lever to left side (1) increase
support or push the lever to the right
side (2) to decrease support.
To move the support position up or
down, push the lever upside (3) or
down side (4).
• For left side :
Press the L switch.
The lumbar support can be adjusted
by pushing the lumbar support lever.
Push the lever to left side (1) increase
support or push the lever to the right
side (2) to decrease support.
To move the support position up or
down, push the lever upside (3) or
down side (4).
Rear switches operating limitation
You can activate or deactivate the
rear seat control, rear audio control
and climate control by using the
REAR LOCK button on the rear arm-
rest or “System Settings” in the AVN
(Audio, Video, and Navigation).
Detailed information for the “System
Settings” is described in a separately
supplied manual.
If the rear control button has deacti-
vated through AVN, you can reacti-
vate the rear control button only
through AVN.
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-15
OKH033032N
OKH033040N
Headrest (for rear seat)
The rear seat is equipped with head-
rests in all the seating positions for
the occupant's safety and comfort.
The headrest not only provides com-
fort for passengers, but also helps
protect the head and neck in the
event of a collision.
For maximum effectiveness in case
of an accident, the headrest should
be adjusted so the middle of the
headrest is at the same height of the
center of gravity of an occupant's
head. Generally, the center of gravity
of most people's head is similar with
the height as the top of their eyes.
Also adjust the headrest as close to
your head as possible. For this rea-
son, the use of a cushion that holds
the body away from the seatback is
not recommended.
Adjusting the height up and down
To raise the headrest, pull it up to the
desired position (1). To lower the
headrest, push and hold the release
button (2) on the headrest support
and lower the headrest to the desired
position (3).
3-16
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
OKH033111N
OKH033024N
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-17
Removal and installation
(for power seat)
To remove the headrest move the
seat forward as much as possible.
Raise it as far as it can go then press
the release button (1) while pulling
the headrest up (2).
To reinstall the headrest move the
seat forward as much as possible.
Put the headrest poles (3) into the
holes while pressing the release but-
ton (1). Then adjust it to the appro-
priate height (2).
Rear center seat headrest
You can fold the rear center seat’s
headrest by pressing the upper part
of the headrest while pushing the
button (1).
To use the headrest, pull up the
upper part of the headrest.
OKH033103NOKH033026N
Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrests removed.
Headrests may provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash.
WARNING
Make sure the headrest locks in
position after adjusting it to
properly protects the occu-
pants.
WARNING
Do not operate the vehicle with
the headrest folded.
Headrest may provide critical
neck and head support in a
crash when properly adjusted.
WARNING
3-18
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Forward and backward adjustment
The headrest may be adjusted for-
ward or backward by pulling the
lower part of the headrest forward or
backward to the desired detent in the
direction of the arrow. Adjust the
headrest so that it properly supports
the head and neck.
Wing-out (if equipped)
For rear outboard passenger's com-
fort, the ends of the headrest can be
adjusted inward.
Armrest
To use the armrest, pull it forward
from the seatback.
OKH033027N
OKH033039NOKH033106N
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-19
Carrying long / narrow cargo
(for fixed seat, if equipped)
Additional cargo space is provided to
accommodate long/narrow cargo
(skis, poles, etc.) not able to fit prop-
erly in the trunk when closed.
1. Pull the armrest down.
2. Pull the cover down while pushing
the release lever down.
OKH033076N
• Be careful when loading
cargo through the rear passen-
ger seats to prevent damage to
the vehicle interior.
• When cargo is loaded through
the rear passenger seats,
ensure the cargo is properly
secured to prevent it from mov-
ing while driving. Unsecured
cargo in the passenger com-
partment can cause damage to
the vehicle or injury to it’s
occupants.
CAUTION
Cargo
Cargo should always be
secured to prevent it from being
thrown about the vehicle in a
collision and causing injury to
the vehicle occupants. Do not
place objects on the rear seats,
since they cannot be properly
secured and may hit the front
seat occupants in a collision.
WARNING
3-20
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Seat belt restraint system
Seat belts are designed to bear upon
the bony structure of the body, and
should be worn low across the
pelvis, chest and shoulders as appli-
cable. wearing the lap section of the
belt across the abdominal area must
be avoided.
Seat belts should be adjusted as
firmly as possible, consistent with
comfort, to provide the protection for
which they have been designed.
A slack belt will greatly reduce the
protection afforded to the wearer.
Care should be taken to avoid con-
tamination of the webbing with pol-
ishes, oils and chemicals, and partic-
ularly battery acid. Cleaning may
safely be carried out using mild soap
and water. The belt should be
replaced if webbing becomes frayed,
contaminated or damaged.
• For maximum restraint system pro-
tection, the seat belts must always
be used whenever the vehicle is
moving. A properly positioned
shoulder belt should be positioned
midway over your shoulder across
your collarbone.
• Never allow children to ride in the
front passenger seat. See child
restraint system section for further
discussion.
SEAT BELTS
Shoulder belt
Never wear the shoulder belt
under your arm or behind your
back. An improperly positioned
shoulder belt cannot protect the
occupant in a crash.
WARNING
Damaged seat belt
Replace the entire seat belt
assembly if any part of the web-
bing or hardware is damaged as
you can no longer be sure that a
damaged seat belt will provide
protection in a crash.
WARNING
Twisted seat belt
Make sure your seat belt is not
twisted when worn. A twisted
seat belt may not properly pro-
tect you in an accident and
could even cut into your body.
WARNING
Seat belt buckle
Do not allow foreign material
(gum, crumbs, coins, etc.) to
obstruct the seat belt buckle.
This may prevent the seat belt
from fastening securely.
WARNING
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-21
Seat belt warning
(for driver’s seat)
The driver's seat belt warning light
and chime will activate to the follow-
ing table when the ignition switch is
in "ON" position.
*
1
Warning pattern repeats 11 times
with an interval of 24 seconds. If
the driver's seat belt is buckled, the
light will stop within 6 seconds and
chime will stop immediately.
*
2
The light will stop within 6 seconds
and chime will stop immediately.
Seat belt warning
(for front passenger’s seat)
The front passenger's seat belt
warning light will activate to the fol-
lowing table when the ignition switch
is in "ON" position.
WKH-001
Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt
Vehicle
Speed
Light-Blink
Chime-
Sound
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Buckled 6 seconds None
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Below 3 mph
(5 km/h)
6 seconds None
3 mph~
6 mph
6 seconds
Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)
6 sec. on / 24 sec. off
(11 times)
Unbuckled
Above 6 mph
(10 km/h)
↓
Below 3 mph
(5 km/h)
6 seconds *
1
↓
Stop *
2
OKH033104N
3-22
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
*
1
The seat belt warning light will go
off if the vehicle speed decreases
below 3 mph (5 km/h). If the vehi-
cle speed increases above 3 mph
(5 km/h), the warning light will blink
again.
• You can find the front passenger's
seat belt warning light on the cen-
ter fascia panel.
• Although the front passenger seat
is not occupied, the seat belt warn-
ing light will blink for 6 seconds.
• The seat belt warning light can
blink when a briefcase or purse is
placed on the front passenger
seat.
Seat belt - Driver's 3-point system
with emergency locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt:
To fasten your seat belt, pull it out of
the retractor and insert the metal tab
(1) into the buckle (2). There will be
an audible "click" when the tab locks
into the buckle.
The seat belt automatically adjusts to
the proper length only after the lap
belt portion is adjusted manually so
that it fits snugly around your hips. If
you lean forward in a slow, easy
motion, the belt will extend and let
you move around. If there is a sud-
den stop or impact, however, the belt
will lock into position.
Conditions Warning Pattern
Seat Belt
Vehicle
Speed
Light-Blink
Unbuckled 6 seconds
Unbuckled
Above 6mph
(10 km/h)
Continuously
Buckled 6 seconds
Buckled →
Unbuckled
Above 6mph
(10 km/h)
Continuously *
1
Below 6mph
(10 km/h)
None
OKH033112N
Riding in an improper position
adversely affects the front pas-
senger's seat belt warning sys-
tem. It is important for the driver
to instruct the passenger as to
the proper seating instructions
as contained in this manual.
WARNING
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-23
It will also lock if you try to lean for-
ward too quickly.
If you are unable to pull out the seat
belt from the retractor, firmly pull the
belt out and release it. Then you will
be able to pull the belt out smoothly.
Height adjustment
You can adjust the height of the
shoulder belt anchor to one of the 4
positions for maximum comfort and
safety.
The height of the adjusting seat belt
should not be too close to your neck.
The shoulder portion should be
adjusted so that it lies across your
chest and midway over your shoulder
nearest the door and not your neck.
To adjust the height of the seat belt
anchor, lower or raise the height
adjuster into an appropriate position.
To raise the height adjuster, pull it up
(1). To lower it, push it down (3) while
pressing the height adjuster button
(2).
Release the button to lock the
anchor into position. Try sliding the
height adjuster to make sure that it
has locked into position.
OKH033113N
Shoulder belt positioning
Never position the shoulder belt
across your neck or face.
WARNING
Seat belt replacement
Replace your seat belts after
being in an accident. Failure to
replace seat belts after an acci-
dent could leave you with dam-
aged seat belts that will not pro-
vide protection in the event of
another collision.
WARNING
3-24
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
You should place the lap belt portion
as low as possible and snugly across
your hips. If the lap belt is located too
high on your waist, it may increase
the chance of injury in the event of a
collision.
The arm closest to the seat belt
buckle should be over the belt while
the other arm should be under the
belt as shown in the illustration.
Seat belts - Front passenger and
rear seat 3-point system with
combination locking retractor
To fasten your seat belt
Combination retractor type seat belts
are installed in the rear seat posi-
tions to help accommodate the
installation of child restraint systems.
Although a combination retractor is
also installed in the front passenger
seat position, it is strongly recom-
mended that children always be
seated in the rear seat. NEVER
place an infant restraint system in
the front seat of the vehicle.
This type of seat belt combines the
features of both an emergency lock-
ing retractor seat belt and an auto-
matic locking retractor seat belt. To
fasten your seat belt, pull it out of the
retractor and insert the metal tab into
the buckle. There will be an audible
"click" when the tab locks into the
buckle. When not securing a child
restraint, the seat belt operates in the
same way as the driver's seat belt
(Emergency Locking Retractor
Type). It automatically adjusts to the
proper length only after the lap belt
portion of the seat belt is adjusted
manually so that it fits snugly around
your hips.
When the seat belt is fully extended
from the retractor to allow the instal-
lation of a child restraint system, the
seat belt operation changes to allow
the belt to retract, but not to extend
(Automatic Locking Retractor Type).
Refer to “Using a child restraint sys-
tem” in this chapter.
To convert from the automatic lock-
ing feature to the emergency locking
operation mode, allow the unbuckled
seat belt to fully retract.
OKH033114N
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-25
When using the rear center seat belt,
the buckle with the “CENTER” mark
must be used.
To release the seat belt
The seat belt is released by pressing
the release button (1) of the locking
buckle. When it is released, the belt
should automatically draw back into
the retractor.
If this does not happen, check the
belt to be sure it is not twisted, then
try again.
Pre-tensioner seat belt
Your vehicle is equipped with driver's
and front passenger's pre-tensioner
seat belts (retractor pretensioner and
EFD (Emergency Fastening Device).
The pre-tensioner seat belts may be
activated, when a frontal collision is
severe enough, together with the air
bags.
When the vehicle stops suddenly, or
if the occupant tries to lean forward
too quickly, the seat belt retractor
may lock into position. In certain
frontal collisions, the pre-tensioner
will activate and pull the seat belt into
tighter contact against the occu-
pant's body.
OKH033115NOKH033045N
OXMA033101
3-26
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
(1) Retractor Pretensioner
The retractor pre-tensioner is a
supplemental system of the seat
belts.
The purpose of the retractor pre-
tensioner is to make sure that the
shoulder belts fit in tightly against
the occupant's upper body in cer-
tain frontal collisions.
(2) EFD (Emergency Fastening Device)
The Emergency Fastening Device
(EFD) is a supplemental system of
the seat belts.
The purpose of the EFD is to make
sure that the pelvis belts fit in tight-
ly against the occupant's lower
body in certain frontal collisions.
If the system senses excessive ten-
sion on the driver or passenger's
seat belt when the pre-tensioner sys-
tem activates, the load limiter inside
the retractor pre-tensioner will release
some of the pressure on the affected
seat belt.
The seat belt pre-tensioner system
consists mainly of the following com-
ponents. Their locations are shown
in the illustration:
1. SRS air bag warning light
2. Retractor pre-tensioner assembly
3. SRS control module
4. Emergency fastening device (EFD)
ODMESA2024
• Do not put anything near the
buckle. Placing objects near
the buckle may increase the
risk of personal injury in the
event of a collision.
• For your safety, be sure that
the belt webbing is not loose
or twisted and always sit
properly on your seat.
WARNING
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-27
✽ NOTICE
• Both the driver's and front pas-
senger's seat belt pre-tensioner
system may be activated not only
in certain frontal collision but also
in certain side collision or rollover,
if the vehicle is equipped with a
side or curtain air bag.
• When the pre-tensioner seat belts
are activated, a loud noise may be
heard and fine dust, which may
appear to be smoke, may be visible
in the passenger compartment.
These are normal operating condi-
tions and are not hazardous.
• Although it is harmless, the fine
dust may cause skin irritation and
should not be breathed for pro-
longed periods. Wash all exposed
skin areas thoroughly after an
accident in which the pre-tension-
er seat belts were activated.
• Because the sensor that activates
the SRS air bag is connected with
the pre-tensioner seat belt, the
SRS air bag warning light on
the instrument panel will illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds
after the ignition switch has been
turned to the ON position, and
then it should turn off.
To obtain maximum benefit from
a pre-tensioner seat belt:
1. The seat belt must be worn
correctly and adjusted to the
proper position. Please read
and follow all of the important
information and precautions
about your vehicle’s occupant
safety features – including
seat belts and air bags – that
are provided in this manual.
2. Be sure you and your passen-
gers always wear seat belts
properly.
WARNING
If the pre-tensioner seat belt
system are not working proper-
ly, this warning light will illumi-
nate even if there is no malfunc-
tion of the SRS air bag. If the
SRS air bag warning light does
not illuminate when the ignition
switch is turned ON, or if it
remains illuminated after illumi-
nating for approximately 6 sec-
onds, or if it illuminates while
the vehicle is being driven, have
an authorized authorized K900
Kia dealer inspect the pre-ten-
sioner seat belt and SRS air bag
system as soon as possible.
CAUTION
3-28
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Pre-Safe Seat belt (PSB)
(if equipped)
The pre-safe seat belt will activate
and pull the seat belt into tighter con-
tact against the occupant's body if a
collision is detected or during certain
driving maneuvers.
OKH033116N
• Pre-tensioners are designed
to operate only one time. After
activation, pre-tensioner seat
belts must be replaced. All
seat belts, of any type, should
always be replaced after they
have been worn during a colli-
sion.
• The pre-tensioner seat belt
assembly mechanisms become
hot during activation. Do not
touch the pre-tensioner seat
belt assemblies for several min-
utes after they have been acti-
vated.
• Do not attempt to inspect or
replace the pre-tensioner seat
belts yourself. This must be
done by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
• Do not strike the pre-tension-
er seat belt assemblies.
• Do not attempt to service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat
belt system in any manner.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Improper handling of the pre-
tensioner seat belt assem-
blies, and failure to heed the
warnings not to strike, modify,
inspect, replace, service or
repair the pre-tensioner seat
belt assemblies may lead to
improper operation or inad-
vertent activation and serious
injury.
• Always wear the seat belts
when driving or riding in a
motor vehicle.
• If the vehicle or pre-tensioner
seat belt must be discarded,
contact an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
WARNING
The pre-safe seat belt activates
only when the passenger is
wearing his/her seat belt.
CAUTION
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-29
The pre-safe seat belt warning light
will illuminate if there is a problem
with your pre-safe seat belt.
Have the system checked if:
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the engine
start/stop button to the ON posi-
tion.
• The light stays on after illumination
for approximately 3 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
The pre-safe seat belt system oper-
ates as below
• The seat belt is tightened when:
- The vehicle senses a collision
- Emergency braking situation
occurs
- Loss of vehicle control
• The seat belt vibrates when:
- The vehicle detects and object
too close to the vehicle
Seat belt precautions
Infant or small child
All 50 states have child restraint
laws. You should be aware of the
specific requirements in your state.
Child and/or infant seats must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. For more information
about the use of these restraints,
refer to “Child restraint system” in this
chapter.
OKH053117N
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type B
3-30
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Larger children
Children who are too large for child
restraint systems should always occu-
py the rear seat and use the available
lap/shoulder belts. The lap portion
should be fastened snug on the hips
and as low as possible. Periodically
check belt fit. A child's squirming could
put the belt out of position. Children
are given the most safety in the event
of an accident when they are
restrained by a proper restraint system
in the rear seat. If a larger child (over
age 12) must be seated in the front
seat, the child should be securely
restrained by the available lap/shoul-
der belt and the seat should be placed
in the rearmost position. Children age
12 and under should be restrained
securely in the rear seat. NEVER
place a child age 12 and under in the
front seat. NEVER place a rear facing
child seat in the front seat of a vehicle.
If the shoulder belt portion slightly
touches the child’s neck or face, try
placing the child closer to the center of
the vehicle. If the shoulder belt still
touches their face or neck they need to
be returned to a child restraint system.
Restraint of pregnant women
Pregnant women should wear
lap/shoulder belt assemblies when-
ever possible according to specific
recommendations by their doctors.
The lap portion of the belt should be
worn AS SNUGLY AND LOW AS
POSSIBLE on the hips, not across
the abdomen.
Small children
Do not allow small children to
ride in the vehicle without an
appropriate child restraint sys-
tem.
WARNING
Pregnant women
Pregnant women must never
place the lap portion of the seat
belt above or on the abdomen
where the fetus is located. The
force of the seat belt during a
collision will crush the fetus.
WARNING
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-31
Injured person
A seat belt should be used when an
injured person is being transported.
When this is necessary, you should
consult a physician for recommenda-
tions.
One person per belt
Two people (including children)
should never attempt to use a single
seat belt. This could increase the
severity of injuries in case of an acci-
dent.
Do not lie down
To reduce the chance of injuries in the
event of an accident and to achieve
maximum effectiveness of the
restraint system, all passengers
should be sitting up and the front
seats should be in an upright position
when the vehicle is moving. A seat
belt cannot provide proper protection
if the person is lying down in the rear
seat or if the front seat is in a reclined
position.
Care of seat belts
Seat belt systems should never be
disassembled or modified. In addi-
tion, care should be taken to assure
that seat belts and belt hardware are
not damaged by seat hinges, doors
or other abuse.
Periodic inspection
All seat belts should be inspected
periodically for wear or damage of
any kind. Any damaged parts should
be replaced as soon as possible.
Keep belts clean and dry
Seat belts should be kept clean and
dry. If belts become dirty, they can be
cleaned by using a mild soap solu-
tion and warm water. Bleach, dye,
strong detergents or abrasives
should not be used because they
may damage and weaken the fabric.
When to replace seat belts
The entire in-use seat belt assembly
or assemblies should be replaced if
the vehicle has been involved in an
accident. This should be done even if
no damage is visible. Additional
questions concerning seat belt oper-
ation should be directed to an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
3-32
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM
Children riding in the car should sit in
the rear seat and must always be
properly restrained to minimize the
risk of injury in an accident, sudden
stop or sudden maneuver. According
to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the
rear seats than in the front seat.
Larger children who are not in a child
restraint should use one of the seat
belts provided.
You should be aware of the specific
requirements in your state. Child
and/or infant safety seats must be
properly placed and installed in the
rear seat. You must use a commer-
cially available child restraint system
that meets the requirements of the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS).
Child restraint systems are designed
to be secured in vehicle seats by seat
belt, or by a tether anchor and/or
LATCH anchors (if equipped).
Children could be injured or killed in
a crash if their restraints are not
properly secured. For small children
and babies, a child seat or infant seat
must be used. Before buying a par-
ticular child restraint system, make
sure it fits your car seat and seat
belts, and fits your child. Follow all
the instructions provided by the man-
ufacturer when installing the child
restraint system.
When the child restraint system is not
in use, store it in the luggage area or
fasten it with a seat belt so that it will
not be thrown forward in case of a
sudden stop or an accident.
Restraint location
Never install a child or infant seat
on the front passenger's seat.
A child riding in the front pas-
senger seat can be forcefully
struck by an inflating air bag.
WARNING
Hot child restraint
A child restraint system can
become very hot if it is left in a
closed vehicle on a sunny day.
Be sure to check the seat cover,
buckles and latches before
placing a child in the restraint
system.
WARNING
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-33
Using a child restraint system
For small children and babies, the
use of a child seat or infant seat is
required. This child seat or infant
seat should be of appropriate size for
the child and should be installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
For safety reasons, we recommend
that the child restraint system be
used in the rear seats.
Since all passenger seat belts move
freely under normal conditions and
only lock under extreme or emer-
gency conditions (emergency lock
mode), you must manually change
these seat belts to the auto lock
mode to secure a child restraint.
If the seat belt does not operate as
described in this chapter, have the
system checked immediately by your
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
OKH033047N
Rear- facing child restraint system
Forward-facing child restraint system
OKH033117N
Holding children
Never hold a child in your arms
or lap when riding in a vehicle.
The violent forces created dur-
ing a crash will tear the child
from your arms and throw the
child against the car’s interior.
Always use a child restraint
system which is appropriate for
your child's height and weight.
WARNING
Seat belt use
Do not use one seat belt for two
occupants at the same time.
This will eliminate any safety
benefit provided by the seat belt
to the occupants.
WARNING
3-34
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Placing a passenger seat belt
into the auto lock mode
The auto lock mode will help prevent
the normal movement of the child in
the vehicle from causing the seat belt
to loosen and compromise the child
restraint system. To secure a child
restraint system, use the following
procedure.
To install a child restraint system on
the outboard or center rear seats, do
the following:
1.Place the child restraint system in
the seat and route the lap/shoulder
belt around or through the
restraint, following the restraint
manufacturer’s instructions. Be
sure the seat belt webbing is not
twisted.
2.Fasten the lap/shoulder belt latch
into the buckle. Listen for the dis-
tinct “click” sound.
Position the release button so that it
is easy to access in case of an emer-
gency.
E2MS103005
OEN036101
Child seat installation
• Always follow the instructions
provided by the child restraint
system manufacturer. Child
restraint system manufactur-
ers know their products best.
• Failure to observe this manu-
al's instructions regarding
child restraint system and the
instructions provided with the
child restraint system could
result in the improper installa-
tion of the child restraint sys-
tem which may reduce the
protection to your child in a
crash or a sudden stop.
WARNING
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-35
3.Pull the shoulder portion of the
seat belt all the way out. When the
shoulder portion of the seat belt is
fully extended, it will shift the
retractor to the “Auto Lock” (child
restraint) mode.
4.Slowly allow the shoulder portion
of the seat belt to retract and listen
for an audible “clicking” or “ratchet-
ing” sound. This indicates that the
retractor is in the “Auto Lock”
mode. If no distinct sound is heard,
repeat steps 3 and 4.
5.Remove as much slack from the
belt as possible by pushing down
on the child restraint system while
feeding the shoulder belt back into
the retractor.
6.Push and pull on the child restraint
system to confirm that the seat belt
is holding it firmly in place. If it is
not, release the seat belt and
repeat steps 2 through 6.
7.Double check that the retractor is
in the “Auto Lock” mode by
attempting to pull more of the seat
belt out of the retractor. If you can-
not, the retractor is in the “Auto
Lock” mode.
OEN036102 OEN036103 OEN036104
3-36
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
The lap/shoulder belt automatically
returns to the “emergency lock
mode” whenever the belt is allowed
to retract fully.
Therefore, the preceding seven
steps must be followed each time a
child restraint is installed.
To remove the child restraint, press
the release button on the buckle and
then pull the lap/shoulder belt out of
the restraint and allow the seat belt
to retract fully.
Securing a child restraint seat
with tether anchorage system
Child restraint hook holders are
located on the package tray.
This symbol indicates the
position of the tether anchor.
1.Route the child restraint seat strap
over the seatback.
For vehicles with adjustable head-
rest, route the tether strap under
the headrest and between the
headrest posts, otherwise route
the tether strap over the top of the
seatback. In case of interference
between the child restraint seat
and the headrest remove the par-
ticular head restraint for better fit-
ment of the child restraint seat.
OKH033108N
OKH033050N
OKH033048N
Auto lock mode
Set the retractor to Automatic
Lock mode when installing any
child restraint system.
If the retractor is not in the Auto
Lock mode, the child restraint
can move when your vehicle
turns or stops suddenly.
WARNING
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-37
2.Connect the tether strap hook to
the appropriate child restraint hook
holder and tighten to secure the
child restraint seat.
Check that the child restraint system
is secure by pushing and pulling it in
different directions. Incorrectly fitted
child restraints may swing, twist, tip
or separate causing death or serious
injury.
Securing a child restraint seat with
child seat lower anchor system
Some child seat manufacturers
make child restraint seats that are
labeled as LATCH or LATCH-com-
patible child restraint seats. LATCH
stands for "Lower Anchors and
Tethers for Children". These seats
include two rigid or webbing mount-
ed attachments that connect to two
LATCH anchors at specific seating
positions in your vehicle. This type of
child restraint seat eliminates the
need to use seat belts to attach the
child seat in the rear seats.
Child restraint symbols are located
on the left and right rear seat backs
to indicate the position of the lower
anchors for child restraints.
OKH033118N
OKH033051N
Lower Anchor
Lower Anchor
Position Indicator
Tether strap
Never mount more than one
child restraint to a single tether
or to a single lower anchorage
point. The increased load
caused by multiple seats may
cause the tethers or anchorage
points to break.
WARNING
Unused rear seatbelts
Always fasten the seatbelts
behind the child restraint seat
when they are not used to
secure the child seat. Failure to
do so may result in child stran-
gulation.
WARNING
3-38
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
LATCH anchors have been provided
in your vehicle. The LATCH anchors
are located in the left and right out-
board rear seating positions. Their
locations are shown in the illustra-
tion. There is no LATCH anchor pro-
vided for the center rear seating
position.
The LATCH anchors are located
between the seatback and the seat
cushion of the rear seat left and right
outboard seating positions.
When you install your child's restraint
system using the LATCH anchors
buckle the shoulder lap belt, then
lock the retractor and pull the belt to
remove the slack in the belt so it lies
flat against the vehicle seat.
Follow the child seat manufacturer’s
instructions to properly install child
restraint seats with LATCH or
LATCH-compatible attachments.
Once you have installed the LATCH
child restraint, assure that the seat is
properly attached to the LATCH and
tether anchors.
Also, test the child restraint seat
before you place the child in it. Tilt
the seat from side to side. Also try to
tug the seat forward. Check to see if
the anchors hold the seat in place.
LATCH lower anchors
Never attempt to attach a
LATCH equipped seat in the
center seating position. LATCH
lower anchors are only to be
used with the left and right rear
outboard seating positions. You
may damage the anchors or the
anchors may fail and break in a
collision.
WARNING
Weight for LATCH system
The recommended weight for
the LATCH system is under 65lb.
How to calculate the child
restraint weight :
Child restraint weight =
65lb - Child weight
WARNING
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-39
(1) Driver’s front air bag
(2) Passenger’s front air bag
(3) Side air bag
(4) Curtain air bag
Even in vehicles with air bags, you
and your passengers must always
wear the safety belts provided in
order to minimize the risk and sever-
ity of injury in the event of a collision
or rollover.
AIR BAG - ADVANCED SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM
OKH033079N
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
3-40
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
How does the air bag system
operate
• Air bags are activated (able to
inflate if necessary) only when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON
or engine is running.
• Air bags inflate instantly in the
event of serious frontal or side col-
lision (if equipped with side air bag
or curtain air bag) in order to help
protect the occupants from serious
physical injury.
• There is no single speed at which
the air bags will inflate.
Generally, air bags are designed to
inflate based upon the severity of a
collision and its direction. These
two factors determine whether the
sensors produce an electronic
deployment/ inflation signal.
• Air bag deployment depends on a
number of complex factors includ-
ing vehicle speed, angles of impact
and the density and stiffness of the
vehicles or objects which your
vehicle hits in the collision. Though,
factors are not limited to those
mentioned above.
• The front air bags will completely
inflate and deflate in an instant.
It is virtually impossible for you to
see the air bags inflate during an
accident. It is much more likely that
you will simply see the deflated air
bags hanging out of their storage
compartments after the collision.
• In order to help provide protection
in a severe collision, the air bags
must inflate rapidly. The speed of
air bag inflation is a consequence
of extremely short time in which a
collision occurs and the need to
get the air bag between the occu-
pant and the vehicle structures
before the occupant impacts those
structures. This speed of inflation
reduces the risk of serious or life-
threatening injuries in a severe col-
lision and is thus a necessary part
of air bag design.
However, air bag inflation can also
cause injuries which can include
facial abrasions, bruises and bro-
ken bones because the inflation
speed also causes the air bags to
expand with a great deal of force.
• There are even circumstances
under which contact with the
steering wheel air bag can cause
fatal injuries, especially if the
occupant is positioned exces-
sively close to the steering
wheel.
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-41
Noise and smoke
When the air bags inflate, they make
a loud noise and they leave smoke
and powder in the air inside of the
vehicle. This is normal and is a result
of the ignition of the air bag inflator.
After the air bag inflates, you may
feel substantial discomfort in breath-
ing due to the contact of your chest
to both the seat belt and the air bag,
as well as from breathing the smoke
and powder. Open your doors
and/or windows as soon as possi-
ble after the impact in order to
reduce discomfort and prevent
prolonged exposure to smoke and
powder.
Though smoke and powder are non-
toxic,They may cause irritation to the
skin (eyes,nose and throat, etc). If
this is the case, wash and rinse with
cold water immediately and consult a
doctor if the symptom persists.
Installing a child restraint on a
front passenger’s seat is forbidden
Never place a rear-facing child
restraint in the front passenger’s
seat. If the air bag deploys, it would
impact the rear-facing child restraint,
causing serious or fatal injury.
In addition, do not place front-facing
child restraint in the front passen-
ger’s seat either. If the front passen-
ger air bag inflates, it would cause
serious or fatal injuries to the child.
1JBH3051
Hot components
Do not touch the air bag storage
area's internal components
immediately after air bag infla-
tion. The air bag related parts in
the steering wheel, instrument
panel and the roof rails above
the front and rear doors are
very hot. Hot components can
result in burn injuries.
WARNING
3-42
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Air bag warning light
The purpose of the air bag warning
light in your instrument panel is to
alert you of a potential problem with
your air bag - Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS).
When the ignition switch is turned
ON, the indicator light should illumi-
nate for approximately 6 seconds,
then go off.
Have the system checked by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer if:
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
WKH-006
Air bag deployment
When children are seated in the
rear outboard seats of a vehicle
equipped with side and/or cur-
tain air bags, install the child
restraint system as far away
from the door side as possible.
Inflation of the side and/or cur-
tain air bags could impact the
child.
WARNING
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-43
SRS components and functions
The SRS consists of the following
components:
1. Driver's front air bag module
2. Passenger's front air bag module
3. Side air bag modules
4. Curtain air bag modules
5. Retractor pre-tensioner assemblies
6. Air bag warning light
7. SRS control module (SRSCM)
8. Front impact sensors
9. Side impact sensors
10. PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator (Front passenger’s seat
only)
11. Occupant detection system
(Front passenger’s seat only)
12. Driver’s and front passenger’s
seat belt buckle sensors
13. Emergency fastening device
(EFD)
The SRSCM continually monitors all
SRS components while the ignition
switch is ON to determine if a crash
impact is severe enough to require
air bag deployment or pre-tensioner
seat belt deployment.
The SRS air bag warning light on the
instrument panel will illuminate for
about 6 seconds after the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position,
after which the air bag warning light
should go out.
If any of the following conditions
occurs, this indicates a malfunction
of the SRS. Have an authorized
K900 Kia dealer inspect the air bag
system as soon as possible.
• The light does not turn on briefly
when you turn the ignition ON.
• The light stays on after illuminating
for approximately 6 seconds.
• The light comes on while the vehi-
cle is in motion.
OKH033119N
3-44
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
The air bag modules are located
both in the center of the steering
wheel and in the front passenger's
panel above the glove box. When the
SRSCM detects a sufficiently severe
impact to the front of the vehicle, it
will automatically deploy the front air
bags.
Upon deployment, tear seams mold-
ed directly into the pad covers will
separate under pressure from the
expansion of the air bags. Further
opening of the covers then allows full
inflation of the air bags.
A fully inflated air bag, in combina-
tion with a properly worn seat belt,
slows the driver's or the passenger's
forward motion, reducing the risk of
head and chest injury.
After complete inflation, the air bag
immediately starts deflating,
enabling the driver to maintain for-
ward visibility and the ability to steer
or operate other controls.
OKH033130N
Driver’s front air bag (2)
OKH033128N
Driver’s front air bag (3)
OKH033129N
Driver’s front air bag (1)
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-45
✽ NOTICE
Before you replace a fuse or discon-
nect a battery terminal, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion and remove the ignition key.
Never remove or replace the air bag
related fuse(s) when the ignition
switch is in the ON position. Failure
to heed this warning will cause the
SRS air bag warning light to illumi-
nate.
Occupant detection system
Your vehicle is equipped with an
occupant detection system in the
front passenger's seat.
The occupant detection system is
designed to detect the presence of a
properly-seated front passenger and
determine if the passenger's front air
bag should be enabled (may inflate)
or not. The driver's front air bag is not
affected or controlled by the occu-
pant detection system.
OKH033132N
Passenger’s front air bag
OKH033105N
Air bag obstructions
Do not install or place any
accessories on the steering
wheel, instrument panel, or on
the front passenger's panel
above the glove box in a vehicle
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the air bag
deploys.
WARNING
3-46
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Main components of occupant
detection system
• A detection device located within
the front passenger seat track.
• Electronic system to determine
whether passenger air bag sys-
tems should be activated or deac-
tivated.
• An indicator light located on the
instrument panel which illuminates
the words PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicating the front passen-
ger air bag system is deactivated.
• The instrument panel air bag warn-
ing light is interconnected with the
occupant detection system.
If the front passenger seat is occu-
pied by a person that the system
determines to be of adult size, and
he/she sits properly (sitting upright
with the seatback in an upright posi-
tion, centered on the seat cushion
with their seat belt on, legs comfort-
ably extended and their feet on the
floor), the PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicator will turn off and the
front passenger's air bag will be able
to inflate, if necessary, in frontal
crashes.
You will find the PASSENGER AIR
BAG “OFF” indicator on the center
facia panel. This system detects the
conditions 1~4 in the following table
and activates or deactivates the front
passenger air bag based on these
conditions.
Always be sure that you and all vehi-
cle occupants are seated and
restrained properly (sitting upright
with the seat in an upright position,
centered on the seat cushion, with
the person’s legs comfortably
extended, feet on the floor, and wear-
ing the safety belt properly) for the
most effective protection by the air
bag and the safety belt.
• The ODS (Occupant Detection
System) may not function properly if
the passenger takes actions which
can defeat the detection system.
These include:
(1) Failing to sit in an upright position.
(2) Leaning against the door or cen-
ter console.
(3) Sitting towards the sides or the
front of the seat.
(4) Putting legs on the dashboard or
resting them on other locations
which reduce the passenger
weight on the front seat.
(5) Improperly wearing the safety
belt.
(6) Reclining the seat back.
(7) Wearing a thick cloth like ski wear
or hip protection wear.
(8) Put on the seat an additional thick
cushion.
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-47
Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant detection system
*
1
: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may
recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.
*
2
: Do not allow children to ride in the front passenger seat. When a smaller child than the same age sits in the front passenger
seat, the system may recognize him/her as an infant depending on his/her physique or posture.
*
3
: Never install a child restraint system on the front passenger seat.
*
4
: The PASSENGER AIR BAG "OFF" indicator may turn on or off when a child above 12 months to 12 years old (with or without
child restraint system) sits in the front passenger seat. This is a normal condition.
Condition detected by the occupant
detection system
Indicator/Warning light Devices
PASSENGER AIR BAG
“OFF” indicator light
SRS warning light
Front passenger air bag
1. Adult *
1
or child age 13 and up *
2
Off Off Activated
2. Infant or child restraint system with
12 months old *
3
*
4
On Off Deactivated
3. Unoccupied On Off Deactivated
4. Malfunction in the system Off On Activated
3-48
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
ODS system
Riding in an improper position adversely affects the occupant detection system (ODS) and may result in
the deactivation of front passenger air bag. It is important for the driver to instruct the passenger as to the
proper seating instructions as contained in this manual.
OKH033126N
OKH033125N
OKH033123N
OKH033107N
OKH033124N
OKH033127N
• Never put a heavy load in
the front passenger seat.
• Never place the feet on
the front passenger seat-
back.
• Never sit with the hips
shifted towards the front
of the seat.
• Never excessively recline
the front passenger seat-
back.
• Never place the feet on
the dashboard.
• Never lean on the door or
center console.
• Never sit on one side of
the front passenger seat.
WARNING
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-49
When an adult is seated in the front
passenger seat, if the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator is on, turn
the ignition switch to the LOCK posi-
tion and ask the passenger to sit
properly (sitting upright with the seat
back in an upright position, centered
on the seat cushion with their seat
belt on, legs comfortably extended
and their feet on the floor). Restart
the engine and have the person
remain in that position. This will allow
the system to detect the person and
to enable the passenger air bag.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is still on, ask the passen-
ger to move to the rear seat.
✽ NOTICE
The PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator illuminates for about 4 sec-
onds after the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position or after
the engine is started. If the front
passenger seat is occupied, the occu-
pant detection sensor will then clas-
sify the front passenger after several
more seconds.
OKH033131N
“AIR BAG OFF” light
Do not allow an adult passenger
to ride in the front seat when the
PASSENGER AIR BAG “OFF”
indicator is illuminated,
because the air bag will not
deploy in the event of a crash.
The driver must instruct the
passenger to reposition himself
in the seat. Failure to properly
position yourself may lead to air
bag deactivation resulting in air
bag non-deployment and in a
collision. If the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator
remains illuminated after the
passenger repositions them-
selves properly and the car is
restarted, it is recommended
that passenger move to the rear
seat because the passenger's
front air bag will not deploy.
WARNING
3-50
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Any child age 12 and under should
ride in the rear seat. Children too
large for child restraints should use
the available lap/shoulder belts. No
matter what type of crash, children of
all ages are safer when restrained in
the rear seat.
✽ NOTICE
Do not modify or replace the front
passenger seat. Don't place anything
on or attach anything such as a blan-
ket, front seat covers or after market
seat heater to the front passenger
seat. This can adversely affect the
occupant detection system.
If the occupant detection system is
not working properly, the SRS air bag
warning light on the instrument
panel will illuminate because the pas-
senger's front air bag is connected
with the occupant detection system. If
there is a malfunction of the occupant
detection system, the PASSENGER
AIR BAG “OFF” indicator will not illu-
minate and the passenger's front air
bag will inflate in frontal impact crash-
es even if there is no occupant in the
front passenger's seat.
• Do not put a heavy load or an
electronic device (ex. laptop
computer, after market DMB,
navigation, satellite audio,
video game machine, MP3, AC
inverter and etc.) and sitting
mat in the front passenger
seatback pocket or on the front
passenger seat. Do not hang
onto the front passenger seat.
Do not hang any items such as
seatback table on the front
passenger seatback. Do not
place feet on the front passen-
ger seatback. Do not place any
items under the front passen-
ger seat. Any of these could
interfere with proper sensor
operation or turn on the air bag
warning light.
• Do not place sharp objects on
the front passenger seat.
These may damage the occu-
pant detection system, if they
puncture the seat cushion.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Air bags can only be used
once – have an authorized
K900 Kia dealer replace the air
bag immediately after deploy-
ment.
• The occupant detection sys-
tem may not work properly if
water, coffee or any other liq-
uid including rain gets on the
seat. Keep the front seat dry at
all times.
WARNING
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-51
Driver's and passenger's front
air bag
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Advanced Supplemental Restraint
(Air Bag) System and lap/shoulder
belts at both the driver and passen-
ger seating position.
The indications of the system's pres-
ence are the letters "AIR BAG"
embossed on the air bag pad cover
in the steering wheel and the pas-
senger's side front panel pad above
the glove box.
The SRS consists of air bags
installed under the pad covers in the
center of the steering wheel and the
passenger's side front panel above
the glove box.
The purpose of the SRS is to provide
the vehicle's driver and/or the front
passenger with additional protection
than that offered by the seat belt sys-
tem alone in case of a frontal impact
of sufficient severity. The SRS uses
sensors to gather information about
the driver's seat position, the driver's
and front passenger's seat belt
usage and impact severity.
The advanced SRS offers the ability
to control the air bag inflation with
two levels. A first stage level is pro-
vided for moderate-severity impacts.
A second stage level is provided for
more severe impacts.
The passenger’s front air bag is
designed to help reduce the injury of
children sitting close to the instru-
ment panel in low speed collisions.
However, children are safer if they
are restraint in the rear seat.
According to the impact severity,
seating position and seat belt usage,
the SRSCM (SRS Control Module)
controls the air bag inflation. Failure
to properly wear seat belts can
increase the risk or severity of injury
in an accident.
OKH033053N
Driver’s front air bag
OKH033055N
Passenger’s front air bag
3-52
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Additionally, your vehicle is equipped
with an occupant detection system in
the front passenger's seat. The occu-
pant detection system detects the
presence of a passenger in the front
passenger's seat and will turn off the
front passenger's air bag under cer-
tain conditions. For more detail, see
"Occupant detection system" in this
chapter.
Do not place any objects that may
cause magnetic fields near the front
seat. These may cause a malfunction
of the seat track position sensor.
Manufacturers are required by gov-
ernment regulations to provide a
contact point concerning modifica-
tions to the vehicle for persons with
disabilities, which modifications may
affect the vehicle’s advanced air bag
system. That contact is Kia’s toll-free
Customer Assistance center at
1-855-4KIAVIP (855-454-2847) or
1-800-333-4KIA (800-333-4542).
However, Kia does not endorse nor
will it support any changes to any
part or structure of the vehicle that
could affect the advanced air bag
system, including the occupant
detection system.
Advanced air bags are combined
with pre-tensioner seat belts to help
provide enhanced occupant protec-
tion in frontal crashes. Front air bags
are not intended to deploy in colli-
sions in which sufficient protection
can be provided by the pre-tensioner
seat belt alone.
Front air bags are not intended to
deploy in side-impact, rear-impact or
rollover crashes. In addition, front air
bags will not deploy in frontal crash-
es below the deployment threshold.
Replacement/modifications
The front passenger seat, dash-
board or door should not be
replaced except by an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer using orig-
inal Kia parts designed for this
vehicle and model. Any other
such replacement or modifica-
tion could adversely affect the
operation of the occupant
detection system and your
advanced air bags.
WARNING
SRS Wiring
Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring or other com-
ponents of the SRS system.
Doing so could result in injury,
due to accidental deployment of
the air bags or by rendering the
SRS inoperative.
WARNING
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-53
Side air bag
■ Rollover■ Rear impact ■ Side impact
■ Front ■ Rear
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
OKH033121N/OKH033056N/OKH033067N/OKH033081N/OKH033120N/OKH033089N
3-54
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Your vehicle is equipped with a side
air bag in each front and rear out-
board seat.
The purpose of the air bag is to pro-
vide the vehicle's driver and/or front
and rear outboard passenger with
additional protection than that
offered by the seat belt alone.
The side air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side-
impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and
point of impact. The side air bags are
not designed to deploy in all side
impact situations.
The side air bag is supplemental to
the driver's and the passenger's seat
belt systems and is not a substitute
for them. Therefore your seat belts
must be worn at all times while the
vehicle is in operation.
For best protection from the side air
bag system and to avoid being
injured by the deploying side air bag,
both front seat occupants should sit
in an upright position with the seat
belt properly fastened. The driver's
hands should be placed on the steer-
ing wheel at the 9:00 and 3:00 posi-
tions. The passenger's arms and
hands should be placed on their laps.
If seat or seat cover is damaged, have
the vehicle checked and repaired by
an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Inform that your vehicle is equipped
with side air bags and an occupant
detection system.
Unexpected deployment
Avoid impact to the side air bag
sensor when the ignition switch
is ON to prevent unexpected
deployment of the side air bag.
WARNING
Deployment
Do not install any accessories
including seat covers, on the
side or near the side air bag as
this may affect the deployment
of the side air bags.
WARNING
Flying objects
Do not place any objects (an
umbrella, bag, etc.) between the
front door and the front seat.
Such objects may become dan-
gerous projectiles if the side air
bag inflates.
WARNING
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-55
Curtain air bag
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
Curtain air bags are located along
both sides of the roof rails above the
front and rear doors.
They are designed to help protect
the heads of the front seat occupants
and the rear outboard seat occu-
pants in certain side impact colli-
sions.
The curtain air bags are designed to
deploy only during certain side
impact collisions, depending on the
crash severity, angle, speed and
impact. The curtain air bags are not
designed to deploy in all side impact
situations, collisions from the front or
rear of the vehicle or in most rollover
situations.
Do not allow the passengers to lean
their heads or bodies onto doors, put
their arms on the doors, stretch their
arms out of the window, or place
objects between the doors and pas-
sengers when they are seated on
seats equipped with side and/or cur-
tain air bags.
OKH033082N
OKH033090N
Never try to open or repair any
components of the side curtain
air bag system. This should only
be done by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
WARNING
3-56
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
Why didn’t my air bag go off in
a collision? (Inflation and non-
inflation conditions of the air
bag)
There are many types of accidents
in which the air bag would not be
expected to provide additional
protection.
These include rear impacts, sec-
ond or third collisions in multiple
impact accidents, as well as low
speed impacts.
Air bag collision sensors
(1) SRS control module
(2) Front impact sensor
(3) Side impact sensor (front)
(4) Side impact sensor (rear)
OKH033063N/OKH033064N/OKH033065N/OKH033074N/OKH033066N
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-57
Problems may arise if the sensor
installation angles are changed due to
the deformation of the front bumper,
body, front door or C Pillar where the
collision sensors are installed. Have
the vehicle checked and repaired by
an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Installing aftermarket bumper guards
or replacing a bumper with non-gen-
uine parts may adversely affect your
vehicle’s collision and air bag deploy-
ment performance.
Air bag inflation conditions
Front air bags
Front air bags are designed to inflate
in a frontal collision depending on
the intensity, speed or angles of
impact of the front collision.
OKH033084N
Air bag sensors
• Do not hit or allow any objects
to impact the locations where
air bag or sensors are
installed.
This may cause unexpected
air bag deployment, which
could result in serious per-
sonal injury or death.
• If the installation location or
angle of the sensors is altered
in any way, the air bags may
deploy when they should not
or they may not deploy when
they should.
Therefore, do not try to per-
form maintenance on or
around the air bag sensors.
Have the vehicle checked and
repaired by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
WARNING
3-58
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
❈ The actual air bags in the vehicle may
differ from the illustration.
Side air bags
Side air bags (side and/or curtain air
bags) are designed to inflate when
an impact is detected by side colli-
sion sensors depending on the
strength, speed or angles of impact
resulting from a side impact collision.
Although the front air bags (driver’s
and front passenger’s air bags) are
designed to inflate in frontal colli-
sions, they also may inflate in other
types of collisions if the front impact
sensors detect a sufficient frontal
force in another type of impact. Side
impact and curtain air bags are
designed to inflate in certain side
impact collisions. They may inflate in
other type of collisions where a side
force is detected by the sensors.
If the vehicle chassis is impacted by
bumps or objects on unimproved
roads or sidewalks, air bags may
deploy. Drive carefully on unim-
proved roads or on surfaces not
designed for vehicle traffic to prevent
unintended air bag deployment.
Air bag non-inflation conditions
• In certain low-speed collisions the
air bags may not deploy. The air
bags are designed not to deploy in
such cases because they may not
provide benefits beyond the pro-
tection of the seat belts in such col-
lisions.
OKH033068N
OKH033091N
OKH033084N
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-59
• Air bags are not designed to inflate
in rear collisions, because occu-
pants are moved backward by the
force of the impact. In this case,
inflated air bags would not be able
to provide any additional benefit.
• Front air bags may not inflate in
side impact collisions, because
occupants move to the direction of
the collision, and thus in side
impacts, front air bag deployment
would not provide additional occu-
pant protection.
• In a slant or angled collision, the
force of impact may direct the
occupants in a direction where the
air bags would not be able to pro-
vide any additional benefit, and
thus the sensors may not deploy
any air bags.
OKH033085N
OKH033122NOKH033068N
3-60
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
• Just before impact, drivers often
brake heavily. Such heavy braking
lowers the front portion of the vehi-
cle causing it to “ride” under a vehi-
cle with a higher ground clearance.
Air bags may not inflate in this
"under-ride" situation because
deceleration forces that are detect-
ed by sensors may be significantly
replaced by such “under-ride” colli-
sions.
• Air bags do not inflate in all rollover
accidents, even though the vehicle
is equipped with side air bags and
curtain air bags.
• Air bags may not inflate if the vehi-
cle collides with objects such as
utility poles or trees, where the
point of impact is concentrated to
one area and the full force of the
impact is not delivered to the sen-
sors.
OKH033086N OKH033120N OKH033069N
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
3
3-61
SRS Care
The SRS is virtually maintenance-
free and there are no parts you can
safely service by yourself. If the SRS
air bag warning light does not illumi-
nate, or continuously remains on,
have your vehicle immediately
inspected by an authorized K900 Kia
dealer.
Any work on the SRS system, such
as removing, installing, repairing, or
any work on the steering wheel must
be performed by an authorized K900
Kia dealer. Improper handling of the
SRS system may result in serious
personal injury.
For cleaning the air bag pad covers,
use only a soft, dry cloth or one
which has been moistened with plain
water. Solvents or cleaners could
adversely affect the air bag covers
and proper deployment of the sys-
tem.
If components of the air bag system
must be discarded, or if the vehicle
must be scrapped, certain safety
precautions must be observed. An
authorized K900 Kia dealer knows
these precautions and can give you
the necessary information. Failure to
follow these precautions and proce-
dures could increase the risk of per-
sonal injury.
Adding equipment to or modi-
fying your air bag-equipped
vehicle
If you modify your vehicle by changing
your vehicle's frame, bumper system,
front end or side sheet metal or ride
height, this may affect the operation of
your vehicle's air bag system.
Tampering with SRS
Do not tamper with or discon-
nect SRS wiring, or other compo-
nents of the SRS system. Doing
so could result in the accidental
inflation of the air bags or by ren-
dering the SRS inoperative.
WARNING
Air bag warning label
Air bag warning labels, some required
by the U.S. National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA), are
attached to alert the driver and pas-
sengers of potential risks of the air bag
system.
3-62
Seat and safety features of your vehicle
OKH033071N
OKH033073N
OKH033072N
Features of your vehicle
4
Features of your vehicle
Smart key............................................................4-4
• Record your key number.........................................4-4
• Smart key functions.................................................4-4
• Smart key precautions ............................................4-6
• Remote keyless entry system operations ...............4-7
• Transmitter precautions ...........................................4-8
• Battery replacement................................................4-9
• Mechanical key operations....................................4-10
• Restrictions in handling keys.................................4-11
• Immobilizer system................................................4-12
Theft-alarm system...........................................4-14
• Armed stage..........................................................4-14
• Theft-alarm stage ..................................................4-15
• Disarmed stage .....................................................4-15
Door locks.........................................................4-17
• Operating door locks from outside the vehicle......4-17
• Power door latch ...................................................4-18
• Operating door locks from inside the vehicle........4-18
• Impact sensing door unlock system......................4-20
• Auto door lock/unlock feature................................4-20
• Child-protector rear door lock................................4-20
Trunk .................................................................4-21
• Non-powered trunk................................................4-21
• Power trunk ...........................................................4-22
• Trunk lid control button .........................................4-25
• Emergency trunk safety release............................4-26
Windows ...........................................................4-28
• Power windows......................................................4-29
• Power window lock button.....................................4-31
Hood .................................................................4-32
• Opening the hood..................................................4-32
• Closing the hood ...................................................4-33
Fuel filler lid.......................................................4-34
• Opening the fuel filler lid .......................................4-34
• Closing the fuel filler lid .........................................4-34
• Emergency fuel filler lid release ............................4-36
Panoramic sunroof............................................4-37
• Sunroof open warning...........................................4-37
• Sliding the sunroof ................................................4-38
• Closing the sunroof ...............................................4-38
• Tilting the sunroof..................................................4-39
• Sunshade ..............................................................4-40
• Resetting the sunroof ............................................4-41
Steering wheel ..................................................4-42
• Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS)........4-42
• Tilt steering/telescope steering .............................4-42
• Heated steering wheel ..........................................4-43
• Horn ......................................................................4-44
Mirrors...............................................................4-45
• Inside rearview mirror............................................4-45
• Outside rearview mirror.........................................4-53
4
Instrument cluster .............................................4-57
• Instrument cluster control......................................4-58
• LCD display control ...............................................4-58
• Gauges..................................................................4-59
• Transaxle shift indicator.........................................4-62
LCD display.......................................................4-63
• LCD modes ...........................................................4-63
• Trip computer mode...............................................4-64
• Turn by turn (TBT) mode.......................................4-64
• ASCC/LDWS mode ...............................................4-64
• A/V mode ..............................................................4-65
• Information mode ..................................................4-65
• User settings mode ...............................................4-67
• Warning messages................................................4-73
Trip computer ....................................................4-80
• Overview ...............................................................4-80
• Fuel economy........................................................4-80
• Trip A/B..................................................................4-82
Warning and indicator lights .............................4-84
• Warning lights........................................................4-84
• Indicator lights .......................................................4-93
Head up display (HUD).....................................4-99
• Description ............................................................4-99
• Head Up Display ON/OFF...................................4-100
• Head Up Display Information ..............................4-100
• Head Up Display Setting .....................................4-101
Parking Assist System ....................................4-102
• Operation of the Parking Assist System .............4-102
• Non-operational conditions of Parking Assist
System ..............................................................4-104
• Self-diagnosis......................................................4-106
Rear Camera Display .....................................4-107
Parking Guide System ....................................4-108
• Parking Guide System (PGS) display .................4-108
• Changing rear view angle ...................................4-109
Front Blind Spot Monitoring System ...............4-110
Surround View Monitoring System (SVM) ......4-111
Welcome system.............................................4-112
• Puddle lamp ........................................................4-112
• Headlight .............................................................4-112
• Interior light .........................................................4-112
Lighting ...........................................................4-113
• Battery saver function .........................................4-113
• Headlight escort function ....................................4-113
• Daytime running light ..........................................4-114
• Lighting control....................................................4-114
• High beam operation...........................................4-117
• Turn signals and lane change signals .................4-118
• Front fog light ......................................................4-119
• Headlight leveling device.....................................4-119
Wipers and washers .......................................4-120
• Windshield wiper/washer.....................................4-120
4
Features of your vehicle
4
Interior light .....................................................4-123
• Automatic turn off function ..................................4-123
• Front lamp switch ................................................4-123
• Rear lamp switch.................................................4-124
• Trunk room lamp..................................................4-125
• Door courtesy lamp.............................................4-125
• Glove box lamp ...................................................4-126
• Vanity mirror lamp ...............................................4-126
Defroster .........................................................4-127
• Rear window defroster ........................................4-127
Automatic climate control system ...................4-128
• Automatic heating and air conditioning ...............4-129
• Manual heating and air conditioning ...................4-130
• System operation ................................................4-138
• Climate control air filter .......................................4-140
• Checking the amount of
air conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant.........................................4-140
• Air conditioning refrigerant label .........................4-141
Windshield defrosting and defogging..............4-142
• To defog inside windshield ..................................4-142
• To defrost outside windshield ..............................4-143
• Defogging logic....................................................4-143
• Auto Defogging System.......................................4-144
Storage compartments ...................................4-146
• Center console storage .......................................4-146
• Rear seat storage................................................4-146
• Glove box ............................................................4-147
• Sunglass holder ..................................................4-147
• Seatback pocket..................................................4-148
• Map pocket..........................................................4-149
Interior features...............................................4-150
• Cup holder...........................................................4-150
• Sunvisor ..............................................................4-150
• Power outlet.........................................................4-151
• Seat warmer........................................................4-152
• Air ventilation seat...............................................4-154
• Clock ...................................................................4-156
• Clothes hanger....................................................4-157
• Floor mat anchor(s).............................................4-157
• Rear vanity mirror................................................4-158
• Bag hanger..........................................................4-158
• Luggage net (holder)...........................................4-159
• Rear curtain.........................................................4-159
• Side curtain .........................................................4-160
Multimedia system ..........................................4-161
• Aux, USB and iPod
®
port ....................................4-161
• USB charger........................................................4-161
• Audio / Video / Navigation system (AVN)............4-162
• Driver Information System (DIS) .........................4-162
• Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology hands-free .......4-163
• Antenna...............................................................4-163
• Steering wheel audio control ..............................4-164
4
Record your key number
The key code num-
ber is stamped on
the key code tag
attached to the key
set. Should you
lose your keys, this number will
enable an authorized K900 Kia deal-
er to duplicate the keys easily.
Remove the key code tag and store it
in a safe place. Also, record the key
code number and keep it in a safe
and handy place, but not in the vehi-
cle.
Smart key functions
1. Door lock
2. Door unlock
3. Trunk open
4. Panic alarm
SMART KEY
Features of your vehicle
4-4
OKH043004N
OKH043002N
■ Conventional smart key
■ Card type smart key (if equipped)
Smart key
Leaving children unattended in
a vehicle with the smart key is
dangerous. Children copy
adults and they could press the
ENGINE START/STOP button. It
would enable children to oper-
ate power windows or other
controls, or even make the vehi-
cle move, which could result in
serious bodily injury or even
death. Never leave the keys in
your vehicle with unsupervised
children when the engine is run-
ning.
WARNING
With smart key, you can lock or
unlock doors (and trunk) and start
the engine without inserting the key.
Refer to the following, for more
details.
Locking
Pressing the button of the front out-
side door handles with all doors
closed and any door unlocked, locks
all the doors. The hazard warning
lights will blink and the chime will
sound once to indicate that all doors
are locked. The button will only oper-
ate when the smart key is within
0.7~1 m (28~40 in.) from the outside
door handle. If you want to make
sure that a door has locked or not,
you should check the door lock but-
ton inside the vehicle or pull the out-
side door handle.
In some instances, when the outside
door button is selected, the doors will
not lock and an audible chime will
sound for 3 seconds if any of the fol-
lowing occurs:
• The smart key is in the vehicle.
• The ignition switch is in the ACC or
ON position.
• Any door except the trunk is
opened.
Features of your vehicle
4
4-5
OKH043003N
Features of your vehicle
4-6
Unlocking
Pressing the button of the driver's (or
front passenger’s) outside door han-
dle with all doors closed and locked,
unlocks the driver's door.
If you press the button of the driver's
outside door handle again within 4
seconds, The other doors will be
unlocked. But if you press the button
of the driver's outside door handle
again after 4 seconds, all doors will be
locked. The hazard warning lights will
blink and the chime will sound twice to
indicate that the driver's door is
unlocked. Also, the outside rearview
mirrors will automatically unfold if the
outside rearview mirror folding switch
is in the AUTO position.
The button will only operate when the
smart key is within 28~40 in. (0.7~1
m) from the outside door handle.
Start-up
You can start the engine without
inserting the key. For detailed infor-
mation refer to “Starting the engine
with a smart key” in chapter 5.
Smart key precautions
• If you lose your smart key, you will
not be able to start the engine. Tow
the vehicle, if necessary, and con-
tact an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
• A maximum of 2 smart keys can be
registered to a single vehicle. If you
lose a smart key, you should imme-
diately take the vehicle and key to
your authorized K900 Kia dealer to
protect it from potential theft.
• The smart key will not work if any
of following occurs:
- The smart key is close to a radio
transmitter such as a radio sta-
tion or an airport which can inter-
fere with normal operation of the
smart key.
- The smart key near a mobile
two-way radio system or a cellu-
lar phone.
- Another vehicle’s smart key is
being operated close to your
vehicle.
When the smart key does not work
correctly, open and close the door
with the mechanical key. If you
have a problem with the smart key,
contact an authorized K900 Kia
dealer.
• If the smart key is in close proximity
to your cell phone or smart phone,
the signal from the smart key could
be blocked by normal operation of
your cell phone or smart phone.
This is especially important when
the phone is active such as making
call, receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the smart key and
your cell phone or smart phone in
the same pants or jacket pocket and
maintain adequate distance
between the two devices.
Transmitter
Keep the smart key away from
water or any liquid as it can
become damaged and not func-
tion properly.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4
4-7
Remote keyless entry system
operations
Lock (1)
All doors are locked if the lock button
is pressed. If all doors (and trunk) are
closed, the hazard warning lights will
blink once to indicate that all doors
(and trunk) are locked.
Also, if the lock button is pressed
once more within 4 seconds, the
hazard warning lights will blink and
the chime will sound once to confirm
that the door is locked.
However, if any door remains open,
the hazard warning lights (and/or the
chime) will not operate. But if all
doors are closed after the lock button
is pressed, the hazard warning lights
will blink once.
Unlock (2)
The driver's door is unlocked if the
unlock button is pressed once. The
hazard warning lights will blink (for
smart key, the chime also sounds)
twice to indicate that the driver's door
is unlocked.
All doors are unlocked if the unlock
button is pressed once more within 4
seconds. The hazard warning lights
will blink (for smart key, the chime
also sounds) twice again to indicate
that all doors are unlocked. After
pressing this button, the doors will
lock automatically unless you open
any door within 30 seconds.
✽ NOTICE
If the keyless entry system is inoper-
ative due to exposure to water or liq-
uids, it will not be covered by your
manufacturer's vehicle warranty.
OKH043004N
Features of your vehicle
4-8
Trunk open (3)
The trunk is opened if the button is
pressed for more than 1 second.
Once the trunk is opened and then
closed, the trunk will lock automati-
cally.
Panic alarm (4)
The horn sounds and the hazard
warning lights blink for about 30 sec-
onds if this button is pressed for
more than 0.5 seconds. To stop the
horn and lights, press any button on
the transmitter.
Transmitter precautions
The transmitter (or smart key) will not
work if any of following occurs:
• You exceed the operating distance
limit (about 90 feet [30 m]).
• The battery in the transmitter (or
smart key) is weak.
• Other vehicles or objects may be
blocking the signal.
• The weather is extremely cold.
• The transmitter (or smart key) is
close to a radio transmitter such as
a radio station or an airport which
can interfere with normal operation
of the transmitter.
When the transmitter (or smart key)
does not work properly, open and
close the door with the ignition key. If
you have a problem with the trans-
mitter (or smart key), contact an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
• If the transmitter is in close proximi-
ty to your cell phone or smart phone,
the signal from the transmitter could
be blocked by normal operation of
your cell phone or smart phone. This
is especially important when the
phone is active such as making call,
receiving calls, text messaging,
and/or sending/receiving emails.
Avoid placing the transmitter and
your cell phone or smart phone in
the same pants or jacket pocket and
maintain adequate distance
between the two devices.
Features of your vehicle
4
4-9
Pursuant to Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 47, Part 15
("FCC Rules")
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
✽ NOTICE
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment. If the keyless entry
system is inoperative due to changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible
for compliance, it will not be cov-
ered by your manufacturer’s vehicle
warranty.
Battery replacement
Conventional smart key
A battery should last for several
years, but if the smart key is not work-
ing properly, try replacing the battery
with a new one. If you are unsure how
to use or replace the battery, contact
an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
1.Pry open the smart key center cover.
2.Replace the battery with a new
battery (CR2032). When replacing
the battery, make sure the battery
position.
3.Install the battery in the reverse
order of removal.
OKH043006N
Features of your vehicle
4-10
Card type smart key
(if equipped)
1.Pull out the battery and battery
cover.
2.Remove the old battery and insert
the new battery (CR2412). Make
sure the battery position is correct.
3.Reinstall the battery cover and bat-
tery.
The smart key is designed to give you
years of trouble-free use, however it
can malfunction if exposed to mois-
ture or static electricity. If you are
unsure how to use or replace the bat-
tery, contact an authorized K900 Kia
dealer.
Using the wrong battery can cause
the transmitter or smart key to mal-
function. Be sure to use the correct
battery.
An inappropriately disposed battery
can be harmful to the environment
and human health.
Dispose the battery according to
your local law(s) or regulation.
Mechanical key operations
• Used to lock and unlock the glove
box.
• Lock and unlock the doors when
the vehicle or smart key battery is
discharged.
OKH043007N
Transmitter damage
Do not drop, wet or expose the
keyless entry system transmit-
ter to heat or sunlight.
CAUTION
Conventional smart key
To remove the mechanical key, press
and hold the release button(1) and
remove the mechanical key(2).
To reinstall the mechanical key, put
the key into the hole and push it until
a click sound is heard.
Card type smart key (if equipped)
Push and hold the release lever (1)
and remove the mechanical key (2).
Insert the mechanical key in to the
key hole on the door.
To reinstall the mechanical key, push
and hold the release lever (1) and
put the key into the hole and push it
until a click sound is heard.
Restrictions in Handling Keys
When leaving keys with parking lot
and valet attendants, the following
procedures will ensure your vehicle’s
trunk and glove box compartment
can only be opened with the
mechanical key.
Features of your vehicle
4
4-11
OKH043008N
OKH043009N
OKH043010N
Features of your vehicle
4-12
To lock:
1.Remove the mechanical key from
the Smart Key.
2.Unlock the glove box by using the
mechanical key, then open it.
3.Set the Trunk Lid Control button to
the OFF position (not depressed).
4.Close and lock the glove box using
the mechanical key.
5.Leave the Smart Key with the
attendant and keep the mechanical
key with you.
The Smart Key can only be used to
start the engine and operate door
locks.
To release:
1.Open the glove box with the
mechanical key.
2.Set the Trunk Lid Control button to
the ON position (depressed).
In this position the trunk lid will open
with the Trunk Lid button or the
Smart Key.
Immobilizer system
Your vehicle is equipped with an
electronic engine immobilizer system
to reduce the risk of unauthorized
vehicle use.
Whenever the ENGINE START/STOP
button is changed to the ON position,
the immobilizer system checks and
verifies if the key is valid or not.
If the key is valid, the engine will start.
If the key is invalid, the engine will
not start.
To deactivate the immobilizer
system
Change the ENGINE START/STOP
button to the ON position.
To activate the immobilizer system
Change the ENGINE START/STOP
button to the OFF position. The immo-
bilizer system activates automatically.
Without a valid smart key for your
vehicle, the engine will not start.
Your immobilizer password is a cus-
tomer unique password and should
be kept confidential. Do not leave this
number anywhere in your vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
Keep each key separate in order to
avoid a starting malfunction.
Features of your vehicle
4
4-13
Do not put metal accessories near
the ignition switch.
Metal accessories may interrupt the
transponder signal and may prevent
the engine from being started.
If you need additional keys or lose
your keys, consult an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
Pursuant to Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 47, Part 15
("FCC Rules")
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
Immobilizer damage
Do not expose your immobilizer
system to moisture, static elec-
tricity and rough handling. This
may damage your immobilizer.
CAUTION
Immobilizer alterations
Do not change, alter or adjust
the immobilizer system because
it could cause the immobilizer
system to malfunction.
CAUTION
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user's authority
to operate the equipment.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4-14
THEFT-ALARM SYSTEM
This system is designed to provide
protection from unauthorized entry
into the vehicle. This system is operat-
ed in three stages: the first is the
"Armed" stage, the second is the
"Theft-alarm" stage, and the third is
the "Disarmed" stage. If triggered, the
system provides an audible alarm with
blinking of the hazard warning lights.
Armed stage
Park the vehicle and stop the engine.
Arm the system as described below.
1.Turn off the engine.
2.Make sure that all doors (and
trunk) and engine hood are closed
and latched.
3.• Lock the doors by depressing the
door lock button on the transmit-
ter (or smart key).
After completion of the steps
above, the hazard warning lights
will blink once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door, trunk or engine hood
remains open, the hazard warn-
ing lights won’t operate and theft-
alarm will not arm. After this, if all
doors, trunk and engine hood are
closed, the hazard warning lights
blink once.
• Lock the doors by pressing the
button of the front outside door
handles with the smart key in
your possession.
After completion of the steps
above, the hazard warning lights
will blink once to indicate that the
system is armed.
If any door remains open, the
hazard warning lights won’t oper-
ate and theft-alarm will not arm.
Close the door and try again to
lock the doors.
If trunk or engine hood remains
open, the hazard warning lights
won’t operate and theft-alarm will
not arm. Close the trunk or
engine hood. The hazard warn-
ing lights blink once and theft-
alarm arms.
Armed
stage
Theft-alarm
stage
Disarmed
stage
Features of your vehicle
4
4-15
The theft-alarm system by the key
can be activated by an authorized
Kia dealer.
If you want this feature, consult an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Do not arm the system until all
passengers have left the vehicle. If
the system is armed while a pas-
senger(s) remains in the vehicle,
the alarm may be activated when
the remaining passenger(s)
leaves the vehicle. If any door (or
trunk) or engine hood is opened
within 30 seconds after the sys-
tem enters the armed stage, the
system will be disarmed to pre-
vent unnecessary alarm.
Theft-alarm stage
The alarm will be activated if any of
the following occurs while the system
is armed.
• A front or rear door is opened with-
out using the smart key (or
mechanical key).
• The trunk is opened without using
the smart key (or mechanical key).
• The engine hood is opened.
The horn will sound and the hazard
warning lights will blink continuously
for approximately 27 seconds. To
turn off the system, unlock the doors
with the smart key.
Disarmed stage
The system will be disarmed when:
- The door unlock button is pressed.
- The button of the front outside door
is pressed while carrying the smart
key.
- The engine is started. (within 3
seconds)
After the doors are unlocked, the haz-
ard warning lights will blink twice to
indicate that the system is disarmed.
After pressing the unlock button, if
any door (or trunk) is not opened
within 30 seconds, the system will be
rearmed.
Features of your vehicle
4-16
• Avoid trying to start the engine
while the alarm is activated. The
vehicle starting motor is disabled
during the theft-alarm stage.
If the system is not disarmed with
the smart key, open the doors by
using the mechanical key and start
the engine by directly pressing the
engine Start/Stop button with the
smart key.
• If you lose your keys, consult your
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Features of your vehicle
4
4-17
DOOR LOCKS
Operating door locks from
outside the vehicle
Mechanical key
• After removing the cover (1) ~ (2),
turn the key toward the rear of the
vehicle to unlock and toward the
front of the vehicle to lock (3), (4).
• If you lock/unlock the driver’s door
with a key, only the driver’s door
will lock/unlock.
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that
doors are closed securely.
Smart key
• Doors can be locked and unlocked
with the transmitter (or smart key).
• Doors can be locked and unlocked
by pressing the button of the out-
side door handle with the smart
key in your possession.
• Once the doors are unlocked, they
may be opened by pulling the door
handle.
• When closing the door, push the
door by hand. Make sure that
doors are closed securely.
✽ NOTICE
• In cold and wet climates, door lock
and door mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing con-
ditions.
• If the door is locked/unlocked
multiple times in rapid succession
with either the vehicle key or door
lock switch, the system may stop
operating temporarily in order to
protect the circuit and prevent
damage to system components.
OKH043005N
Lock
Unlock
Features of your vehicle
4-18
Power Door Latch (if equipped)
If a door isn’t closed completely but
is closed to the first detent position,
the door will close automatically.
Operating door locks from
inside the vehicle
With the door lock button
• To unlock a door, push the door
lock button (1) to the “Unlock” posi-
tion. The red mark (2) on the button
will be visible.
• To lock a door, push the door lock
button (1) to the “Lock” position. If
the door is locked properly, the red
mark (2) on the door lock button
will not show.
• To open a door, pull the door han-
dle (3) outward.
• If the inner door handle of the front
door is pulled when the door lock
button is in the lock position, the
button will unlock and the door will
open.
• Front doors cannot be locked if the
smart key is in the vehicle and any
front door is opened.
If a power door lock ever fails to func-
tion while you are in the vehicle, try
one or more of the following tech-
niques to exit:
• Operate the door unlock feature
repeatedly (both electronic and
manual) while simultaneously
pulling on the door handle.
• Operate the other door locks and
handles, front and rear.
• Lower a front window and use the
key to unlock the door from outside.
OKH043012N
Lock
Unlock
OKH043011N
To reduce the risk of injury:
• Before closing the door, check
there are no obstructions in
the path of the door.
• Keep your fingers away from
the edge of the door or they
may become trapped when
the power door latch oper-
ates.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4
4-19
Rear door lock button
• To lock a rear door, press the door
lock button (1). The indicator on the
button will illuminate.
• To unlock a rear door, press the
door unlock button (2). The indica-
tor on the button will illuminate.
• The rear door lock operates only
on the rear doors with a rear door
lock button.
With central door lock switch
Locking
• When pressing the door lock but-
ton (1), all vehicle doors will lock
and the indicator on the button will
illuminate. If any door is unlocked,
the indicator will turn off.
• If the smart key is in the vehicle
and any door is opened, doors will
not lock.
Unlocking
When pressing the door unlock but-
ton (2), all vehicle doors will unlock
and the indicator on the button will
illuminate.
If any door is locked, the indicator will
turn off.
OKH043013N
OKH043014N
Driver’s door
Passenger’s door
OKH043014N
Features of your vehicle
4-20
Impact sensing door unlock
system
All doors will automatically unlock
when an impact causes the air bags
to deploy.
Auto door lock/unlock feature
You can activate or deactivate the
auto door lock/unlock features in the
vehicle. Refer to "LCD display" in this
chapter.
Child-protector rear door lock
The child safety lock is provided to
help prevent children seated in the
rear from accidentally opening the
rear doors. The rear door safety locks
should be used whenever children
are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock (1) is located on
the edge of each rear door. When the
child safety lock is in the lock position
( ), that rear door will not open if
the inner door handle is pulled (2).
To allow a rear door to be opened
from inside the vehicle, unlock ( )
the child safety lock.
OKH043015N
Doors
The doors should always be
fully closed and locked while the
vehicle is in motion to prevent
accidental opening of the door.
WARNING
Unattended children/ani-
mals
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
An enclosed vehicle can
become extremely hot, causing
death or severe injury to unat-
tended children or animals who
cannot escape the vehicle.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4
4-21
Non-Powered Trunk
To open:
1.Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
2.Then do one of the following :
- Press the smart key trunk unlock
button for more than one second.
- Press the button on the trunk
itself with the smart key in your
possession.
- Use the mechanical key.
- Use the trunk release button (or
lever).
3.Lift the trunk lid up.
To close:
Lower the trunk lid and press down
until it locks.
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, trunk lock
and trunk mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing condi-
tions.
TRUNK
OKH043016N
OKH043017N
OKH043518N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Always keep the trunk lid com-
pletely closed while the vehicle is
in motion. If it is left open or ajar,
poisonous exhaust gases con-
taining carbon monoxide (CO)
may enter the vehicle and seri-
ous illness or death may result.
WARNING
The trunk swings upward. Make
sure no objects or people are
near the rear of the vehicle
when opening the trunk.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4-22
Power Trunk
To open:
1. Make sure the shift lever is in P
(Park).
2. Then do one of the following:
- Press the smart key trunk unlock
button for more than one second.
- Press the open button on the
trunk. You need the smart Key in
your possession, when all doors
are locked.
- Press the power trunk main con-
trol button (for type A).
- Pull the power trunk, main con-
trol lever (for type B).
OKH043019N/OKH043020N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OKH043257N/OKH043259N/OKH043018N
(1) Power Trunk Main Control button
(or lever)
(2) Power Trunk Open button
(3) Power Trunk Close button
(4) Power Trunk Lock button
Features of your vehicle
4
4-23
To close:
Do one of the following:
- Press the power trunk main control
button until the power trunk is
closed securely (for type A).
- Push the power trunk main control
lever until the power trunk is closed
securely (for type B).
- Press the close button on the trunk.
- Press the lock button on the trunk
while carrying the smart key and all
the vehicle’s doors and trunk are
closed. All doors and trunk will lock
and arm the theft alarm system.
If you push a button or lever while the
trunk is opening or closing, it could
stop moving. Press any button to
operate the power trunk again.
✽ NOTICE
The power trunk lock button will
not work if you press the button
when:
- Any door is open.
- The engine start/stop button is not
in the OFF position.
- The smart key is in the vehicle.
✽ NOTICE
In cold and wet climates, trunk lock
and trunk mechanisms may not
work properly due to freezing condi-
tions.
Never leave children or animals
unattended in your vehicle.
Children or animals might oper-
ate the power trunk that could
result in injury to themselves or
others, or damage to the vehicle.
WARNING
Always keep the trunk lid com-
pletely closed while the vehicle is
in motion. If it is left open or ajar,
poisonous exhaust gases con-
taining carbon monoxide (CO)
may enter the vehicle and seri-
ous illness or death may result.
WARNING
Make sure there are no people
or objects around the trunk
before opening or closing the
power trunk. Wait until the trunk
is open fully and stopped
before loading or unloading
cargo from the vehicle.
WARNING
• Do not close or open the
power trunk manually. This
may cause damage to the
power trunk. If it is necessary
to close or open the power
trunk manually when the bat-
tery is drained or disconnect-
ed, do not apply excessive
force.
• Do not leave the power trunk
open for a long period of time.
This may drain the battery.
• To prevent damage to the
trunk lift cylinders and the
attached hardware, always
close the trunk before driving.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4-24
Power Trunk Non-Opening or
Closing Conditions:
• The power trunk will not open or
close automatically, when the vehi-
cle is moving more than 1.8 mph (3
km/h).
• The power trunk can be operated
when the engine is not running.
However, the power trunk operation
consumes large amounts of vehicle
electric power. To prevent the bat-
tery from draining, do not operate it
excessively (e.g., more than
approximately 10 times repeatedly).
• Do not modify or repair any part of
the power trunk by yourself. This
must be done by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
• Before jacking up the vehicle to
change a tire or repair the vehicle,
open the power trunk. Do not oper-
ate the power trunk when the vehi-
cle is raised or this could cause the
power trunk to operate improperly.
• If there are obstacles such as snow
on the power trunk, it may not open
automatically. After removing the
obstacle, try to open it again.
Automatic stop and Reverse
If, during power opening or closing,
the trunk is blocked by an object or
part of someone’s body, the power
trunk will detect the resistance and it
will stop movement or move to the
full open position to allow the object
to be cleared.
However, if an object is thin or soft,
or the trunk is near the latched posi-
tion, the automatic stop and reversal
may not detect the resistance and
the closing operation will continue. If
the power trunk is forced by a strong
impact, the automatic stop and rever-
sal may operate.
If the automatic stop and reverse fea-
ture operates more than twice during
one opening or closing operation, the
power trunk may stop at that posi-
tion. If this occurs, close the trunk
manually and operate the trunk auto-
matically again.
OKH043021N
To prevent serious injury and
damage take the following pre-
cautions when operating the
power trunk:
- Keep all faces, hands, arms,
body parts and other objects
away from the path of the
power trunk.
- Do not intentionally place any
body parts or objects in the
path of the power trunk to
make sure the automatic stop
and reversal operates.
- Do not allow children to play
with the power trunk.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4
4-25
To Reset the Power Trunk
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, or if the related fuse
has been replaced or disconnected,
reset the power trunk as follows:
1. Move the shift lever to the P(Park)
position.
2. Close the trunk manually.
If the power trunk doesn't work prop-
erly after performing the above pro-
cedure, have the system checked by
an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Trunk Lid Control Button
When the trunk lid control button is
ON (depressed), the power trunk can
be controlled with the power trunk
main control button, power trunk
open, close button, and the smart key.
When this trunk lid control button is
OFF (not depressed), the power
trunk can be controlled using the
mechanical key of the smart key only.
Even though the trunk lid control but-
ton is OFF (not depressed), the trunk
will still be propelled upward by
mechanical force if the trunk is man-
ually opened more than 10 degrees
beyond the fully closed position.
In addition, if the trunk is manually
closed to the secondary latch posi-
tion, the trunk will be electrically
moved to the fully latched position.
OKH043022N
• Always keep the Trunk Lid
Control Button in the OFF (not
depressed) position when not
in use. Serious injury or death
can result from unintentional
operation by a child.
• Make sure heads, other body
parts or other obstacles are
safely out of the way before
operating the power trunk.
WARNING
Close the trunk, and keep the
trunk lid control button in the
OFF (not depressed) position
before washing the vehicle in an
automatic car wash.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4-26
✽ NOTICE
If the trunk does not unlock using
the smart key or the trunk lid
release button, ensure the trunk lock
system is not activated.
To release the trunk lock feature,
open the glove box with feature, open
the glove box with the mechanical
key and set the trunk lid control but-
ton to the ON position (pressed). In
this position the trunk will open with
the trunk lid button or smart key.
Emergency Trunk Safety
Release
Your vehicle is equipped with an
Emergency Trunk Safety Release
lever located inside the trunk. When
someone is inadvertently locked in
the trunk, the trunk can be opened by
moving the lever in the direction of the
arrow and pushing the trunk open.
OKH043024N
• You and your passengers
must be aware of the location
of the Emergency Trunk
Safety Release lever in this
vehicle and how to open the
trunk in case you are acciden-
tally locked in the trunk.
• NEVER allow anyone to occupy
the trunk of the vehicle at any
time. If the trunk is partially or
totally latched and the person
is unable to get out, serious
injury or death could occur due
to lack of ventilation, exhaust
fumes and rapid heat build-up,
or because of exposure to cold
weather conditions. The trunk
is also a highly dangerous loca-
tion in the event of a crash
because it is not a protected
occupant space but is a part of
the vehicle’s crush zone.
(Continued)
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4
4-27
(Continued)
• Your vehicle should be kept
locked and the Smart Key
should be kept out of the reach
of children. Parents should
teach their children about the
dangers of playing in trunks.
• Use the release lever for
emergencies only.
Features of your vehicle
4-28
(1) Driver’s door power window
switch
(2) Front passenger’s door power
window switch
(3) Rear door (left) power window
switch
(4) Rear door (right) power window
switch
(5) Window opening and closing
(6) Automatic power window up/down
(7) Power window lock button
WINDOWS
OKH043025N
Features of your vehicle
4
4-29
In cold and wet climates, power win-
dows may not work properly due to
freezing conditions.
Power windows
The ignition switch must be in the ON
position for power windows to oper-
ate. Each door has a power window
switch that controls the door’s win-
dow. The driver has a power window
lock switch which can block the oper-
ation of rear passenger windows.
The power windows can be operated
for approximately 30 seconds after
the ignition key is removed or turned
to the ACC or LOCK position.
However, if the front doors are
opened, the power windows cannot
be operated even within the 30 sec-
ond period.
✽ NOTICE
While driving with the rear windows
down or with the sunroof (if
equipped) in an open (or partially
open) position, your vehicle may
demonstrate a wind buffeting or
pulsation noise. This noise is a nor-
mal occurrence and can be reduced
or eliminated by taking the follow-
ing actions. If the noise occurs with
one or both of the rear windows
down, partially lower both front
windows approximately one inch. If
you experience the noise with the
sunroof open, slightly reduce the
size of the sunroof opening.
Window opening and closing
Pressing or pulling up the power win-
dow switch momentarily to the sec-
ond detent position (6) completely
lowers or lifts the window even when
the switch is released. To stop the
window at the desired position while
the window is in operation, pull up or
press and release the switch to the
opposite direction of the movement.
If the power window is not operated
correctly, the automatic power win-
dow system must be reset as follows:
OKH043026N
Features of your vehicle
4-30
1.Press the Engine Start/Stop Button
twice to the ON position.
2.Close the window and continue
pulling up on the driver’s power
window switch for at least 1 second
after the window is completely
closed.
Automatic reversal
If the upward movement of the win-
dow is blocked by an object or part of
the body, the window will detect the
resistance and will stop upward
movement. The window will then
lower approximately 11.8 in. (30 cm)
to allow the object to be cleared.
If the window detects the resistance
while the power window switch is
pulled up continuously, the window
will stop upward movement then
lower approximately 1 in. (2.5 cm).
And if the power window switch is
pulled up continuously again within 5
seconds after the window is lowered
by the automatic window reversal
feature, the automatic window rever-
sal will not operate.
The automatic reverse feature for the
driver’s window is only active when
the “auto up” feature is used by fully
pulling up the switch. The automatic
reverse feature will not operate if the
window is raised using the halfway
position on the power window switch.
OKH043277N
Always check for obstructions
before raising any window to
avoid injuries or vehicle damage.
If an object less than 0.16 in. (4
mm) in diameter is caught
between the window glass and
the upper window channel, the
automatic reverse window may
not detect the resistance and will
not stop and reverse direction.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4
4-31
Power window lock button
The driver can disable the power
window switches on the rear passen-
gers’ doors by pressing the power
window lock switch. The indicator will
be illuminated.
When the power window lock switch
indicator is illuminated :
• The driver’s master control can
operate all the power windows.
• The front passenger’s control can
operate the front passenger’s
power window.
• The rear passenger’s control can-
not operate the rear passenger’s
power window.
Always double check to make sure
all arms, hands, head and other
obstructions are safely out of the way
before closing a window.
OKH043027N
Power windows
Do not allow children to play
with the power windows. Keep
the driver’s door power window
lock button in the LOCK posi-
tion (illuminated).
WARNING
Opening / closing Window
To prevent possible damage to
the power window system, do
not open or close two windows
or more at the same time. This
will also ensure the longevity of
the fuse.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4-32
HOOD
Opening the hood
1.Pull the release lever to unlatch the
hood. The hood should pop open
slightly.
Open the hood after turning off the
engine on a flat surface, shifting the
shift lever to the P (Park) position for
automatic transaxle and to the 1st
(First) gear or R (Reverse) for manu-
al transaxle, and setting the parking
brake.
2.Go to the front of the vehicle, raise
the hood slightly, push the second-
ary latch (1) left of the hood center
and lift the hood (2).
3.Raise the hood. It will raise com-
pletely by itself after it has been
raised about halfway.
OKH043028N
OKH043029N
• Always double check to be
sure that the hood is firmly
latched before driving away. If
it is not latched, the hood
could fly open while the vehi-
cle is being driven, causing a
total loss of visibility, which
might result in an accident.
• Do not move the vehicle with
the hood raised. The view will
be blocked and the hood
could fall or be damaged.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4
4-33
Closing the hood
1.Before closing the hood, check the
following:
• All filler caps in engine compart-
ment must be correctly installed.
• Gloves, rags or any other com-
bustible material must be
removed from the engine com-
partment.
2.Lower the hood halfway and push
down to securely lock in place.
• Before closing the hood,
ensure that all obstructions
are removed from the hood
opening. Closing the hood
with an obstruction present in
the hood opening may result
in property damage or severe
personal injury.
• Do not leave gloves, rags or
any other combustible materi-
al in the engine compartment.
Doing so may cause a heat-
induced fire.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4-34
FUEL FILLER LID
Opening the fuel filler lid
The fuel filler lid must be opened
from inside the vehicle by pushing
the fuel filler lid opener.
If the fuel filler lid does not open
because ice has formed around it,
tap lightly or push on the lid to break
the ice and release the lid. Do not pry
on the lid. If necessary, spray around
the lid with an approved de-icer fluid
(do not use radiator anti-freeze) or
move the vehicle to a warm place
and allow the ice to melt.
1.Stop the engine.
2.To open the fuel filler lid, push the
fuel filler lid opener up.
3.Pull open the fuel filler lid (1) out to
fully open.
4.To remove the cap turn the fuel
filler cap (2) counterclockwise.
5.Refuel as needed.
Closing the fuel filler lid
1.To install the cap, turn it clockwise
until it "clicks" once. This indicates
that the cap is securely tightened.
2.Close the fuel filler lid and push it
lightly and make sure that it is
securely closed.
Refueling
Always remove the fuel cap
carefully and slowly. If the cap
is venting fuel or if you hear a
hissing sound, wait until the
condition stops before com-
pletely removing the cap.
If pressurized fuel sprays out, it
can cover your clothes or skin
and subject you to the risk of
fire and burns.
WARNING
OKH043030N
OKH043032N
Features of your vehicle
4
4-35
Always check that the fuel cap is
installed securely to prevent fuel
spillage in the event of an accident.
✽ NOTICE
When using an approved portable
fuel container, be sure to place the
container on the ground prior to
refueling. Static electricity discharge
from the container can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire. Once refueling
has begun, contact with the vehicle
should be maintained until the fill-
ing is complete. Use only approved
portable plastic fuel containers
designed to carry and store gasoline.
Fire/explosion risk
Read and follow all warnings
posted at the gas station facili-
ty. Failure to follow all warnings
will result in severe personal
injury, severe burns or death
due to fire or explosion.
WARNING
Static electricity
• Before touching the fuel noz-
zle, you should eliminate
potentially dangerous static
electricity discharge by touch-
ing another metal part of the
vehicle, a safe distance away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle, or other gas source.
• Do not get back into a vehicle
once you have begun refuel-
ing since you can generate
static electricity by touching,
rubbing or sliding against any
item or fabric (polyester, satin,
nylon, etc.) capable of produc-
ing static electricity. Static
electricity discharge can
ignite fuel vapors resulting in
rapid burning. If you must re-
enter the vehicle, you should
once again eliminate poten-
tially dangerous static elec-
tricity discharge by touching a
metal part of the vehicle, away
from the fuel filler neck, noz-
zle or other gasoline source.
WARNING
Cell phone fires
Do not use cellular phones while
refueling. Electric current and/or
electronic interference from cel-
lular phones can potentially
ignite fuel vapors causing a fire.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4-36
Make sure to refuel your vehicle
according to the "Fuel requirements"
suggested in chapter 1.
If the fuel filler cap requires replace-
ment, use only a genuine Kia cap or
the equivalent specified for your vehi-
cle. An incorrect fuel filler cap can
result in a serious malfunction of the
fuel system or emission control sys-
tem.
Emergency fuel filler lid release
If the fuel filler lid does not open
using the remote fuel filler lid
release, you can open it manually by
pulling the handle outward slightly.
OKH043031N
Refueling& Vehicle fires
When refueling, always shut the
engine off. Sparks produced by
electrical components related
to the engine can ignite fuel
vapors causing a fire. Once
refueling is complete, check to
make sure the filler cap and
filler door are securely closed,
before starting the engine.
WARNING
Smoking
DO NOT use matches or a
lighter and DO NOT SMOKE or
leave a lit cigarette in your vehi-
cle while at a gas station espe-
cially during refueling.
Automotive fuel is highly flam-
mable and can, when ignited,
result in fire.
WARNING
Exterior paint
Do not spill fuel on the exterior
surfaces of the vehicle. Any
type of fuel spilled on painted
surfaces may damage the paint.
CAUTION
Do not pull the handle exces-
sively, otherwise the luggage
area trim or release handle may
be damaged.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4
4-37
PANORAMIC SUNROOF (IF EQUIPPED)
If your vehicle is equipped with a
sunroof, you can slide or tilt your
sunroof with the sunroof control lever
located on the overhead console.
The sunroof can only be opened,
closed, or tilted when the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
In cold and wet climates, the sunroof
may not work properly due to freez-
ing conditions.
After the vehicle is washed or in a
rainstorm, be sure to wipe off any
water that is on the sunroof before
operating it.
The sunroof cannot slide when it is in
the tilt position nor can it be tilted
while in an open or slide position.
Sunroof open warning
(if equipped)
If the driver turns off the engine when
the sunroof is not fully closed, the
warning chime will sound for a few
seconds and a warning message will
appear on the LCD display.
Close the sunroof securely when
leaving your vehicle.
OKH043033N
OKH043402N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Sunroof control lever
Do not continue to press the
sunroof control lever after the
sunroof is fully opened, closed,
or tilted. Damage to the motor or
system components could
occur.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4-38
Sliding the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward to the second detent posi-
tion, the sunshade will slide all the
way open, then the sunroof glass will
slide all the way open. To stop the
sunroof movement at any point, pull
or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
When the sunshade is opened
If you pull the sunroof control lever
backward, the sunroof glass will slide
all the way open. To stop the sunroof
movement at any point, pull or push
the sunroof control lever momentarily.
Closing the sunroof
To close the sunroof glass only
Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward to the first detent position or
pull the lever downward.
To close the sunroof glass with
the sunshade
Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward to the second detent position.
The sunroof glass will close, then the
sunshade close automatically.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
OKH043501N
Features of your vehicle
4
4-39
Automatic reversal
If an object or part of the body is
detected while the sunroof glass or
sunshade is closing automatically, it
will reverse the direction, and then
stop.
The auto reverse function does not
work if a tiny obstacle is between the
sliding glass or sunshade and the
sunroof sash. You should always
check that all passengers and
objects are away from the sunroof
before closing it.
Tilting the sunroof
When the sunshade is closed
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunshade will slide all
the way open, then the sunroof glass
will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
OKH043503N
Sunroof
Do not extend the face, neck,
arms or body outside through
the sunroof opening while driv-
ing or operating the sunroof.
WARNING
• Periodically remove any dirt
that may accumulate on the
guide rail.
• If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is
below freezing or when the
sunroof is covered with snow
or ice, the glass or the motor
could be damaged.
CAUTION
OKH043502N
Features of your vehicle
4-40
When the sunshade is opened
If you push the sunroof control lever
upward, the sunroof glass will tilt.
To stop the sunroof movement at any
point, pull or push the sunroof control
lever momentarily.
Sunshade
• To open the sunshade, pull the
sunroof control lever backward to
the first detent position.
• To close the sunshade when the
sunroof glass is closed, push the
sunroof control lever forward.
To stop the sliding at any point, pull
or push the sunroof control lever
momentarily.
✽ NOTICE
It is normal for wrinkles to form on
the blind because of its material
characteristic.
Sunroof motor damage
If you try to open the sunroof
when the temperature is below
freezing or when the sunroof is
covered with snow or ice, the
glass or the motor could be
damaged.
CAUTION
OKH043504N
Features of your vehicle
4
4-41
Resetting the sunroof
Whenever the vehicle battery is dis-
connected or discharged, or related
fuse is blown, you must reset your
sunroof system as follows:
1. The Engine Start/Stop Button must
be in the ON position.
2. Release the control lever.
3. Push and hold the control lever for-
ward (for more than 10 seconds)
until the sunroof tilts and slightly
moves. Then, release the lever.
4. Push the sunroof control lever for-
ward in the direction of close until
the sunroof operates as follows:
Sunroof glass and sunshade open →
Sunroof glass and sunshade close
Then, release the control lever.
When this is complete, the sunroof
system is reset.
❈For more detailed information, con-
tact an authorized K900 Kia deal-
er.
✽ NOTICE
If the sunroof is not reset when the
vehicle battery is disconnected or
discharged, or related fuse is blown,
the sunroof may operate improperly.
Features of your vehicle
4-42
STEERING WHEEL
Electronic Hydraulic Power
Steering (EHPS)
This system uses an electromotor to
assist you with steering the vehicle.
If the engine is turned off or if the
EHPS becomes inoperative, you
may still steer the vehicle, but it will
require increased steering effort.
Should you notice any change in the
effort required to steer during normal
vehicle operation, have the EHPS
checked by an authorized K900 Kia
dealer.
✽ NOTICE
If the EHPS motor pump malfunc-
tions, the steering effort will greatly
increase.
✽ NOTICE
If the vehicle is parked for extended
periods outside in cold weather
(below 14°F/-10°C), the power steer-
ing may require increased effort
when the engine is first started. This
is caused by increased fluid viscosity
due to the cold weather and does not
indicate a malfunction.
When this happens, increase the
engine RPM by depressing accelera-
tor until the RPM reaches 1,500 rpm
then release or let the engine idle for
two or three minutes to warm up the
fluid.
Tilt Steering/Telescope Steering
Adjust the steering wheel angle (2)
and position (3) with the knob (1) on
the steering column. Move the steer-
ing wheel, so it points toward your
chest, not toward your face. Make
sure you can see the instrument
panel warning lights and gauges.
After adjusting, push the steering
wheel both up and down to be cer-
tain it is locked in position. Always
adjust the position of the steering
wheel before driving.
Do not hold the steering wheel
to the extreme right or left for
more than five (5) seconds with
the engine running. This may
cause damage to the EHPS
motor pump.
CAUTION
OKH043042N
Features of your vehicle
4
4-43
Heated steering wheel
(if equipped)
When the Engine Start/Stop Button
is in the ON position, press the heat-
ed steering wheel button to warm the
steering wheel. The indicator on the
button will illuminate.
To turn the heated steering wheel off,
press the button once again. The
indicator on the button will turn off
and notify you on the LCD display.
OKH043043N
Steering wheel adjustment
Never adjust the angle and
height of the steering wheel
while driving. You may lose
steering control.
WARNING
Do not install any grip to oper-
ate the steering wheel. This
causes damage to the heated
steering wheel system.
CAUTION
If the steering wheel becomes
too warm, turn the system off.
The heated steering wheel may
cause burns even at low tem-
peratures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4-44
Horn
To sound the horn, press the horn
symbol on your steering wheel.
Check the horn regularly to be sure it
operates properly.
To sound the horn, press the area
indicated by the horn symbol on your
steering wheel (see illustration). The
horn will operate only when this area
is pressed.
OKH043044N
Features of your vehicle
4
4-45
MIRRORS
Inside rearview mirror
Adjust the rearview mirror so that the
center view through the rear window
is seen. Make this adjustment before
you start driving.
Do not place objects in the rear seat
which would interfere with your vision
through the rear window.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
with HomeLink
®
system and
compass (if equipped)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a
Gentex Automatic-Dimming Mirror
with a Z-Nav
®
Electronic Compass
Display and an Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System.
During nighttime driving, this feature
will automatically detect and reduce
rearview mirror glare while the com-
pass indicates the direction the vehi-
cle is pointed. The HomeLink
®
Universal Transceiver allows you to
activate your garage door(s), electric
gate, home lighting, etc.
(1) Channel 1 button
(2) Channel 2 button
(3) Status indicator LED
(4) Channel 3 button
(5) Rear light sensor
(6) Dimming ON/OFF button
(7) Compass control button
(8) Compass display
OKH043505N
Mirror adjustment
Do not adjust the rearview mirror
while the vehicle is moving. This
could result in loss of control.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4-46
Automatic-Dimming Night Vision
Safety
™
(NVS
®
) Mirror
The NVS
®
Mirror in your vehicle is
the most advanced way to reduce
annoying glare in the rearview mirror
during any driving situation. For more
information regarding NVS
®
mirrors
and other applications, please refer
to the Gentex website:
www.gentex.com
❈Night Vision Safety™ is a registered
trademark of Gentex Corporation.
Automatic-dimming function
Your mirror will automatically dim
upon detecting glare from the vehi-
cles traveling behind you. The auto-
dimming function can be controlled
by the Dimming ON/OFF Button:
1.Pressing the button turns the
auto-dimming function OFF which
is indicated by the green Status
Indicator LED turning off.
2.Pressing the button again turns
the auto-dimming function ON
which is indicated by the green
Status Indicator LED turning on.
✽ NOTICE
The mirror defaults to the ON posi-
tion each time the vehicle is started.
Z-Nav™ Compass Display
The NVS
®
Mirror in your vehicle is
also equipped with a Z-NAV™
Compass that shows the vehicle
Compass heading in the Display
Window using the 8 basic cardinal
headings (N, NE, E, SE, etc.).
❈ Z-Nav™ is a registered trademark
of Gentex Corporation.
The NVS
®
Mirror automatically
reduces glare during driving
conditions based upon light lev-
els monitored in front of the vehi-
cle and from the rear of the vehi-
cle. These light sensors are visi-
ble through openings in the front
and rear of the mirror case. Any
object that obstructs either light
sensor will degrade the automat-
ic dimming control feature.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4
4-47
Compass function
The Compass can be turned ON and
OFF and will remember the last state
when the ignition is cycled. To turn
the display feature ON/OFF:
1.Press and release the button to
turn the display feature OFF.
2.Press and release the button
again to turn the display back ON.
Additional options can be set with
press and hold sequences of the
button and are detailed below.
There is a difference between mag-
netic north and true north. The com-
pass in the mirror can compensate
for this difference when it knows the
Magnetic Zone in which it is operat-
ing. This is set either by the dealer or
by the user. The operating Zone
Numbers for North America are
shown in the figure on the following
section.
B520C05NF
Features of your vehicle
4-48
To adjust the Zone setting:
1.Determine the desired Zone
Number based upon your current
location on the Zone Map.
2.Press and hold the button for
more than 3, but less than 6 sec-
onds, the current Zone Number will
appear on the display.
3.Pressing and holding the button
again will cause the numbers to
increment (Note: they will repeat
…13, 14, 15, 1, 2, …). Releasing
the button when the desired Zone
Number appears on the display will
set the new Zone.
4.Within about 5 seconds, the com-
pass will start displaying a com-
pass heading again.
There are some conditions that can
cause changes to the vehicle mag-
nets, such as installing a ski rack or a
CB antenna. Body repair work on the
vehicle can also cause changes to the
vehicle's magnetic field. In these situa-
tions, the compass will need to be re-
calibrated to quickly correct for these
changes. To re-calibrate the compass:
1.Press and hold the button for
more than 6 seconds. When the
compass memory is cleared, a "C"
will appear in the display.
2.To calibrate the compass, drive the
vehicle in 2 complete circles at less
than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless Control System
The HomeLink
®
Wireless Control
System provides a convenient way to
replace up to three hand-held radio-
frequency (RF) transmitters with a
single built-in device. This innovative
feature will learn the radio frequency
codes of most current transmitters to
operate devices such as gate opera-
tors, garage door openers, entry
door locks, security systems, even
home lighting. Both standard and
rolling code-equipped transmitters
can be programmed by following the
outlined procedures. Additional
HomeLink
®
information can be found
at: www.homelink.com or by calling
1-800-355-3515.
❈HomeLink
®
is a registered trade-
mark of Johnson Controls, Inc.
Features of your vehicle
4
4-49
\
Retain the original transmitter of the
RF device you are programming for
use in other vehicles as well as for
future HomeLink
®
programming. It is
also suggested that upon the sale of
the vehicle, the programmed
HomeLink
®
buttons be erased for
security purposes.
Programming HomeLink
®
✽ NOTICE
• When programming a garage
door opener, it is advised to park
the vehicle outside of the garage.
• It is recommended that a new bat-
tery be placed in the hand-held
transmitter of the device being pro-
grammed to HomeLink
®
for quick-
er training and accurate transaxle
of the radio-frequency signal.
• Some vehicles may require the
ignition switch to be turned to the
second (or "accessories") position
for programming and/or opera-
tion of HomeLink
®
.
• In the event that there are still pro-
gramming difficulties or questions
after following the programming
steps listed below, contact
HomeLink
®
at: www.homelink.com
or 1-800-355-3515.
Before programming HomeLink
®
to a garage door opener or gate
operator, make sure that people
and objects are out of the way of
the device to prevent potential
harm or damage. Do not use
HomeLink
®
with any garage door
opener that lacks the safety stop
and reverse features required by
U.S. federal safety standards
(this includes any garage door
opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage
door that cannot detect an object
- signaling the door to stop and
reverse - does not meet current
U.S. federal safety standards.
Using a garage door opener
without these features increases
the risk of serious injury or
death.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4-50
Standard programming
To train most devices, follow these
instructions:
1.For first-time programming, press
and hold the two outside buttons,
HomeLink
®
Channel 1 and
Channel 3 Buttons, until the indica-
tor light begins to flash (after 20
seconds). Release both buttons.
Do not hold the buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2.Position the end of your hand-held
transmitter 1-3 inches (2-8 cm) away
from the HomeLink
®
buttons while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3.Simultaneously press and hold
both the HomeLink
®
and hand-
held transmitter button. DO NOT
release the buttons until step 4 has
been completed.
4.While continuing to hold the but-
tons the red Indicator Status LED
will flash slowly and then rapidly
after HomeLink
®
successfully
trains to the frequency signal from
the hand-held transmitter. Release
both buttons.
5.Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe the
red Status Indicator LED. If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your
device should activate when the
HomeLink
®
button is pressed and
released.
6.To program the remaining two
HomeLink
®
buttons, follow steps 2
through 5.
Rolling code programming
Rolling code devices which are
"code-protected" and manufactured
after 1996 may be determined by the
following:
• Reference the device owner's
manual for verification.
• The handheld transmitter appears
to program the HomeLink
®
Universal Transceiver but does not
activate the device.
• Press and hold the trained
HomeLink
®
button. The device has
the rolling code feature if the indi-
cator light flashes rapidly and then
turns solid after 2 seconds.
Features of your vehicle
4
4-51
To train rolling code devices, follow
these instructions:
1.At the garage door opener receiver
(motor-head unit) in the garage,
locate the "learn" or "smart" button.
This can usually be found where the
hanging antenna wire is attached to
the motor-head unit. Exact location
and color of the button may vary by
garage door opener brand.
If there is difficulty locating the train-
ing button, reference the device
owner's manual or please visit our
Web site at www.homelink.com.
2.Firmly press and release the
"learn" or "smart" button (which
activates the "training light").
✽ NOTICE
There are 30 seconds in which to ini-
tiate step 3.
3.Return to the vehicle, firmly press
and hold for two seconds the desired
HomeLink
®
button then release.
Repeat the "press/hold/release"
sequence a second time to complete
the programming. (Some devices
may require you to repeat this
sequence a third time to complete
the programming.)
4.Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe the
red Status Indicator LED. If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your
device should activate.
5.To program the remaining two
HomeLink
®
buttons, follow either
steps 1 through 4 above for other
Rolling Code devices or steps 2
through 5 in Standard Programming
for standard devices.
Gate operator &
Canadian programming
During programming, your handheld
transmitter may automatically stop
transmitting. Continue to press the
Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System button (note steps 2
through 4 in the Standard
Programming portion of this docu-
ment) while you press and re-press
("cycle") your handheld transmitter
every two seconds until the frequen-
cy signal has been learned. The indi-
cator light will flash slowly and then
rapidly after several seconds upon
successful training.
Features of your vehicle
4-52
Operating HomeLink
®
To operate, simply press and release
the programmed HomeLink
®
button.
Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e. garage door
opener, gate operator, security sys-
tem, entry door lock, home/office
lighting, etc.). For convenience, the
hand-held transmitter of the device
may also be used at any time.
Reprogramming a single
HomeLink
®
button
To program a new device to a previ-
ously trained HomeLink
®
button, fol-
low these steps:
1.Press and hold the desired
HomeLink
®
button. Do NOT release
until step 4 has been completed.
2.When the indicator light begins to
flash slowly (after 20 seconds),
position the handheld transmitter 1
to 3 inches away from the
HomeLink
®
surface.
3.Press and hold the handheld trans-
mitter button. The HomeLink
®
indi-
cator light will flash, first slowly and
then rapidly.
4.When the indicator light begins to
flash rapidly, release both buttons.
5.Press and hold the just-trained
HomeLink
®
button and observe the
red Status Indicator LED. If the
indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your
new device should activate.
Erasing HomeLink
®
buttons
Individual buttons cannot be erased.
However, to erase all three pro-
grammed buttons:
1.Press and hold the two outer
HomeLink
®
buttons until the indi-
cator light begins to flash-after 20
seconds.
2.Release both buttons. Do not hold
for longer than 30 seconds.
The Integrated HomeLink
®
Wireless
Control System is now in the training
(learn) mode and can be pro-
grammed at any time following the
appropriate steps in the Programming
sections above.
Features of your vehicle
4
4-53
FCC ID: NZLZTVHL3
IC: 4112A-ZTVHL3
Pursuant to Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 47, Part 15
("FCC Rules")
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
NVS
®
and Z-NAV™ are registered
trademarks. Nav
®
are of Gentex
Corporation, Zeeland, Michigan.
HomeLink
®
is a registered trade-
mark owned by Johnson Controls
Technology Company, Holland,
Michigan.
Outside rearview mirror
Be sure to adjust mirror angles before
driving.
Your vehicle is equipped with both
left-hand and right-hand outside
rearview mirrors. The mirrors can be
adjusted remotely with the remote
switch. The mirror heads can be fold-
ed to prevent damage during an auto-
matic car wash or when passing
through a narrow street.
The right outside rearview mirror is
convex. Objects seen in the mirror
are closer than they appear.
Use your interior rearview mirror or
direct observation to determine the
actual distance of following vehicles
when changing lanes.
The transceiver has been tested
and complies with FCC and
Industry Canada rules. Changes
or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsi-
ble for compliance could void
the user's authority to operate
the device.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4-54
Adjusting outside rearview mirror
Adjusting the rearview mirrors:
Press either the L (driver’s side) or R
(passenger’s side) button (1) to
select the rearview mirror you would
like to adjust.
Use the mirror adjustment control (2)
to position the selected mirror up,
down, left or right.
After adjustment, press the L or R
button (1) again to prevent inadver-
tent adjustment.
OKH043048N
Rearview mirror
Do not scrape ice off the mirror
face; this may damage the sur-
face of the glass. If ice should
restrict movement of the mirror,
do not force the mirror for
adjustment. To remove ice, use
a deicer spray, or a sponge or
soft cloth with very warm water.
CAUTION
Outside mirror
• The mirrors stop moving
when they reach the maxi-
mum adjusting angles, but the
motor continues to operate
while the switch is pressed.
Do not press the switch
longer than necessary, the
motor may be damaged.
• Do not attempt to adjust the
outside rearview mirror by
hand. Doing so may damage
the parts.
CAUTION
Mirror adjustment
Do not adjust or fold the outside
rearview mirrors while the vehi-
cle is moving. This could result
in loss of control.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4
4-55
Reverse parking aid function
(if equipped)
While the vehicle is moving rear-
ward, the outside rearview mirror(s)
will move downward to aid reverse
parking. According to the position of
the outside rearview mirror switch
(1), the outside rearview mirror(s) will
operate as follows:
L/R :When the remote control out-
side rearview mirror switch is
selected to the L (left) or R
(right) position, both outside
rearview mirrors will move
downward.
Neutral : When the remote control
outside rearview mirror
switch is placed in the mid-
dle, the outside rearview
mirrors will not operate
while the vehicle is moving
rearward.
The outside rearview mirrors will auto-
matically revert to their original posi-
tions under the following conditions:
1.The ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
2.Shift lever is moved to any position
except R (Reverse).
3.Remote control outside rearview
mirror switch is placed in the mid-
dle.
Folding the outside rearview mirror
The outside rearview mirror can be
folded or unfolded by pressing the
switch as below.
Left (1) : The mirror will unfold.
Right (2) : The mirror will fold.
OKH043040N
OKH043049N
Features of your vehicle
4-56
Center (AUTO, 3) :
The mirror will fold or unfold auto-
matically as follows:
• The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by
the smart key.
• The mirror will fold or unfold when
the door is locked or unlocked by the
button on the outside door handle.
• The mirror will unfold when you
approach the vehicle (all doors
closed and locked) with a smart
key in possession.
Electric chromic mirror (ECM)
The electric chromic mirror automati-
cally controls the glare from the head-
lights of the car behind you in night-
time or low light driving conditions. The
sensor mounted in the mirror senses
the light level around the vehicle, and
automatically controls the headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
When the engine is running, the glare
is automatically controlled by the sen-
sor mounted in the rearview mirror.
Whenever the shift lever is shifted
into R (Reverse), the mirror will auto-
matically go to the brightest setting in
order to improve the drivers view
behind the vehicle. If the ECM of
inside rear view mirror operates, it
will be working.
Electric type outside
rearview mirror
The electric type outside rearview
mirror operates even though the
engine start/stopo button is in the
OFF position. However, to prevent
unnecessary battery discharge,
do not adjust the mirrors longer
than necessary while the engine
is not running.
In case it is an electric type out-
side rearview mirror, don’t fold it
by hand. It could cause motor
failure.
CAUTION
When cleaning the mirror, use a
paper towel or similar material
dampened with glass cleaner.
Do not spray glass cleaner
directly on the mirror as that
may cause the liquid cleaner to
enter the mirror housing.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4
4-57
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
1. Tachometer
2. Speedometer
3. Engine coolant temperature gauge
4. Fuel gauge
5. LCD display
6. Warning and indicator lights
OKH043050N/OKH043051N
■ Type A
❈ The actual cluster in the vehicle may differ
from the illustration.
For more details, refer to the "Gauges" in
this chapter.
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4-58
Instrument Cluster Control
Adjusting Instrument Cluster
Illumination
The brightness of the instrument
panel illumination can be adjusted by
pressing the illumination control but-
tons (“+” or “-”) when the Engine
Start/Stop Button is ON or the tale
lights are turned on.
• If you hold the illumination control
button ("+" or "-"), the brightness
will be changed continuously.
• If the brightness reaches to the
maximum or minimum level, an
alarm will sound.
LCD Display Control
The LCD display modes can be
changed by using the control buttons
on the steering wheel.
(1) < , > : MODE button for changing
modes.
(2)
,
: MOVE button for chang-
ing items
(3) OK : SELECT/RESET button for
setting or resetting the
selected item
❈For the LCD modes, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
OKH043052N
OKH043901N
OKH043087N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4
4-59
Gauges
Speedometer
The speedometer indicates the
speed of the vehicle and is calibrated
in miles per hour (mph) and/or kilo-
meters per hour (km/h).
The unit of the speedometer (Type B)
can be changed from km/h to MPH or
from MPH to km/h on the LCD display.
❈From more details, refer to "LCD
Display."
Tachometer
The tachometer indicates the
approximate number of engine revo-
lutions per minute (rpm).
Use the tachometer to select the cor-
rect shift points and to prevent lug-
ging and/or over-revving the engine.
OKH043055N
OKH043056N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OKH043053N
OKH043054N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4-60
Engine Coolant Temperature
Gauge
This gauge indicates the tempera-
ture of the engine coolant when the
engine is running.
OKH043057N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Do not operate the engine with-
in the tachometer's RED ZONE.
This may cause severe engine
damage.
CAUTION
If the gauge pointer moves
beyond the normal range area
toward the “H” position, it indi-
cates overheating that may
damage the engine.
Do not continue driving with an
overheated engine. If your vehi-
cle overheats, refer to “If the
Engine Overheats” in chapter 6.
CAUTION
Never remove the radiator cap
when the engine is hot. The
engine coolant is under pressure
and could severely burn. Wait
until the engine is cool before
adding coolant to the reservoir.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4
4-61
Fuel Gauge
This gauge indicates the approxi-
mate amount of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
✽ NOTICE
• The fuel tank capacity is given in
chapter 8.
• The fuel gauge is supplemented by
a low fuel warning light, which
will illuminate when the fuel tank
is nearly empty.
• On inclines or curves, the fuel
gauge pointer may fluctuate or the
low fuel warning light may come
on earlier than usual due to the
movement of fuel in the tank.
✽ NOTICE
Fuel display may not be accurate if
you are filling in sloping places.
OKH043058N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Fuel Gauge
Running out of fuel can expose
vehicle occupants to danger.
You must stop and obtain addi-
tional fuel as soon as possible
after the warning light comes
on or when the gauge indicator
comes close to the “E (Empty)”
level.
WARNING
Avoid driving with a extremely
low fuel level. Running out of
fuel could cause the engine to
misfire damaging the catalytic
converter.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4-62
Odometer
The odometer Indicates the total dis-
tance that the vehicle has been driv-
en and should be used to determine
when periodic maintenance should
be performed.
- Odometer range : 0 ~ 999999 miles
or kilometers.
Outside Temperature Gauge
This gauge indicates the current out-
side air temperatures by 1°F (1°C).
- Temperature range : -40°F ~ 140°F
(-40°C ~ 60°C)
The outside temperature on the dis-
play may not change immediately
like a general thermometer to pre-
vent the driver from being inattentive.
The temperature unit (from °C to °F
or from °F to °C) can be changed by
pressing the OFF button and AUTO
button on the front climate control
panel for 3 seconds simultaneously.
Transaxle Shift Indicator
Automatic Transaxle Shift
Indicator
This indicator displays which auto-
matic transaxle shift lever is selected.
• Park : P
• Reverse : R
• Neutral : N
• Drive : D
• Sports Mode : 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
OKH043124N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OKH043059N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OKH043060N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4
4-63
LCD Modes
LCD DISPLAY
Modes Symbol Explanation
Trip Computer
This mode displays driving information like the tripmeter, fuel economy,
and so on. For more details, refer to “Trip Computer” in this chapter.
Turn By Turn This mode displays the state of the navigation.
ASCC/LDWS
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the Advanced Smart Cruise Control system (ASCC)
and Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS).
For more details, refer to "Advanced Smart Cruise Control system (ASCC)" or
"Lane Departurn Warning System (LDWS)" in chapter 5.
A/V This mode displays the state of the A/V system.
Information This mode informs of service interval (mileage or days) and pressure status of each tire.
User Settings On this mode, you can change settings of the doors, lamps and so on.
❈ For controlling the LCD modes, refer to "LCD Display Control" in this chapter.
Features of your vehicle
4-64
Trip Computer Mode
This mode displays driving informa-
tion like the tripmeter, fuel economy,
and so on.
❈For more details, refer to “Trip
Computer” in this chapter.
Turn By Turn (TBT) Mode
This mode displays the state of the
navigation.
ASCC/LDWS Mode
(if equipped)
This mode displays the state of the
Advanced Smart Cruise Control
(ASCC) or Lane Departure Warning
System (LDWS).
❈ For more details, refer to "Advanced
Smart Cruise Control (ASCC)" and
"Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS)" in chapter 5.
OKH043400N
OKH043408N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043411N
ASCC LDWS
Features of your vehicle
4
4-65
A/V Mode
This mode displays the state of the
A/V system.
Information Mode
This mode shows the service interval
(mileage and days) and pressure of
each tire.
To change the information mode,
Press the
,
(MOVE) button.
❈ For the setting of the service inter-
val, refer to "User Settings Mode"
of the LCD display.
Service Interval
Service required
It calculates and displays when you
need a scheduled maintenance
service (mileage or days).
If the remaining mileage or time
reaches 900 miles (1,500 km) or 30
days, "Service required" message is
displayed for several seconds each
time you set the Engine Start/Stop
Button to the ON position.
OKH043404N
OKH043412N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4-66
Service required
If you do not have your vehicle serv-
iced according to the already inputted
service interval, "Service required"
message is displayed for several sec-
onds each time you set the Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON position.
To reset the service interval to the
mileage and days you inputted before:
- Press the OK button for more than
1 second.
Service interval OFF
If the service interval is not set,
"Service interval OFF" message is
displayed on the LCD display.
✽ NOTICE
If any of the following conditions
occurs, the mileage and days may be
incorrect.
- The battery cable is disconnected.
- The fuse switch is turned off.
- The battery is discharged.
Tire Pressure
This mode displays the pressure sta-
tus of each tire.
You can change the tire pressure unit
in "User settings" mode.
❈For more details, refer to "User
Settings mode" in this chapter.
OKH043403N
OKH043405N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043413N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4
4-67
User Settings Mode
On this mode, you can change set-
ting of the doors, lights, and so on.
Items Explanation
Display Height Adjust the height of the HUD image on the windshield glass.
Brightness Adjust the intensity of the HUD brightness
Contents
Selection
Activate or deactivate each contents of the HUD
(TBT*, ASCC*, LDWS*, BSD*).
❈ TBT : Turn By Turn
ASCC : Advanced Smart Cruise Control
LDWS : Lane Departure Warning System
BSD : Blind Spot Detection
* : if equipped
Speedometer
Size
Choose the size of the HUD speedometer (Small, Medium, Large).
Speedometer
Color
Choose the color of the HUD speedometer (White, Orange, Green).
✽ NOTICE
If you select the Turn By Turn (TBT) navigation information as HUD con-
tents, the Turn By Turn (TBT) navigation information will not be displayed
on the LCD.
OKH043401N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Head-Up Display (HUD) (if equipped)
Features of your vehicle
4-68
Door
Items Explanation
Automatically Lock
• Off : The auto door lock operation will be deactivated.
• Enable on Speed : All doors will be automatically locked when the vehicle speed exceeds
9.3mph (15km/h)
• Enable on Shift : All doors will be automatically locked if the automatic transmission shift lever is
shifted from the P (Park) position to the R (Reverse), N (Neutral), or D (Drive) position.
Automatically Unlock
• Off: The auto door unlock operation will be canceled.
• Vehicle Off : All doors will be automatically unlocked when the Engine Star/Stop Button is set to
the OFF position.
• Driver Door Unlock : All doors will be automatically unlocked if the driver's door is unlocked
• On Shift to P : All doors will be automatically unlocked if the automatic transmission shift lever is
shifted to the P (Park) position.
Two Press Unlock
• Off (Unchecked) : The two press unlock function will be deactivated.Therefore, all doors will
unlock if the door is unlocked.
• On: (checked) : The driver’s door will unlock if the door is unlocked.When the door is unlocked
again within 4 seconds, all doors will unlock.
Door Lock Sound Activate or deactivate door lock confirm sound.
Features of your vehicle
4
4-69
Display (for Type B Cluster)
Items Explanation
Theme Choose the instrument cluster theme. (Default or Retro)
Auto Theme change
• On (checked) : The instrument cluster theme is automatically changed.
• Off : The automatic change function of the instrument cluster theme will be deactivated
Traffic Alerts
• On(checked) : The LCD display will show traffic information.
• Off(unchecked) : The LCD display will not show traffic information.
Speedometer Size Choose the size of the number in the speedometer (Small, Medium, Large).
Speedometer Unit Choose the main unit of the speedometer (MPH or km/h).
Features of your vehicle
4-70
Lights
Items Explanation
One Touch Turn Signal
• Off: The one touch turn lamp function will be deactivated.
• 3, 5, 7 Flashing : The lane change signals will blink 3, 5, or 7 times when the turn signal lever is
moved slightly.
❈ For more details, refer to “Lighting” in this chapter.
Head Lamp Delay
Activate or deactivate the head lamp delay function.
❈ For more details, refer to “Lighting” in this chapter.
Welcome Light
Activate or deactivate the welcome light function.
❈ For more details, refer to “Welcome system” in this chapter.
Features of your vehicle
4
4-71
Seat/Steering
Items Explanation
Seat Easy Access
• None : The seat easy access function will be deactivated.
• Normal/Enhanced:
- When you turn off the engine, the driver’s seat will automatically move rearward by 2
inches (Normal) or 3 inches (Enhanced) for you to enter or exit the vehicle more com-
fortably.
- If you change the Engine Start/Stop Button from OFF position to the ACC, ON, or
START position, the driver’s seat will return to the original position.
❈ For more details, refer to “Driver Position Memory System” in chapter 3.
Steering Easy Access
• On (checked) : The steering wheel will automatically move forward or rearward for the driver to
enter or exit the vehicle comfortably.
• Off (unchecked) : The steering easy access function will be deactivated.
❈ For more details, refer to “Driver Position Memory System” in chapter 3.
Features of your vehicle
4-72
Additional Features
Items Explanation
Advance Vehicle Safety
Management (AVSM)
(if equipped)
• On (checked) : The AVSM system will be activated.
• Off (unchecked) : The AVSM system will be deactivated.
❈ For more details, refer to “Advanced Vehicle Safety Management (AVSM) System” in chapter 5.
❈ AVSM : Advanced Vehicle Safety Management
Fuel Economy Auto Reset The average fuel economy will reset automatically when refueling.
Tire Pressure Unit Choose the tire pressure unit. (psi, kPa, bar)
Features of your vehicle
4
4-73
Service Interval
On this mode, you can activate the
service interval function with mileage
(km or mi.) and period (months).
• Off : The service interval function
will be deactivated.
• On : You can set the service inter-
val (mileage and months).
Warning Messages
Shift to "P" position
• This warning message illuminates if
you try to turn off the engine without
the shift lever in P (Park) position.
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).
Low Key Battery
• This warning message illuminates
if the battery of the smart key is
discharged when the Engine
Start/Stop Button changes to the
OFF position.
OKH043921N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043512N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043922N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4-74
Check headlamp LED (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if the headlamp does not turned on
normally when you turn the head
lamp on.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
Check headlamp FAN (if equipped)
• This warning message illuminates
if the headlamp is overheated.
It means, the headlamp fan does
not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer as soon as possible.
Check battery voltage
• This warning message illuminates
if the battery voltage is abnormally
low, or the battery has poor per-
formance. In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
OKH043514N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043513N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043515N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4
4-75
Press brake pedal to start engine
• This warning message illuminates
if the Engine Start/Stop Button
changes to the ACC position twice
by pressing the button repeatedly
without depressing the brake pedal.
• It means that you should depress
the brake pedal to start the engine.
Key not in vehicle
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not in the vehicle
while the door is opened or closed
with the ignition switch in the ACC
position or engine is running.
• It means that you should always
have the smart key with you.
Key not detected
• This warning message illuminates
if the smart key is not detected
when you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button.
OKH043927N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043928N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043929N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4-76
Press start button again
• This warning message illuminates
if you can not operate the Engine
Start/Stop Button when there is a
problem with the Engine Start/Stop
Button system.
• It means that you could start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/ Stop Button once more.
• If the warning illuminates each
time you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
Press start button with smart key
• This warning message illuminates
if you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button while the warning message
“Key not detected” is illuminating.
• At this time, the immobilizer indica-
tor light blinks.
Check fuse "BRAKE SWITCH"
• This warning message illuminates
if the brake switch fuse is discon-
nected.
• It means that you should replace
the fuse with a new one. If that is
not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the Engine
Start/Stop Button for 10 seconds in
the ACC position.
OKH043930N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043931N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043932N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4
4-77
Shift to "P" or "N" to start engine
• This warning message illuminates
if you try to start the engine with
the shift lever not in the P (Park) or
N (Neutral) position.
✽ NOTICE
You can start the engine with the
shift lever in the N (Neutral) position.
But, for your safety, we recommend
that you start the engine with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position.
Press Start Button and Shift to "P"
• This warning message illuminates
if you try to turn off the engine with-
out the shift lever in P (Park) posi-
tion.
• At this time, the Engine Start/Stop
Button turns to the ACC position (If
you press the Engine Start/Stop
Button once more, it will turn to the
ON position).
• Set the Engine Start/Stop Button to
the ON position, then shift to P
(Park) by pressing the P button on
the top of the shift lever.
OKH043933N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043924N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4-78
Door / Hood / Trunk Open
• It means that any door, hood, or
trunk is open.
Sunroof Open (if equipped)
• The warning message illuminates
if you turn off the engine when the
sunroof is open.
Align steering wheel
• This warning message illuminates
if you start the engine when the
steering wheel is turned to more
than 90 degrees to the left or right.
• It means that you should turn the
steering wheel and make the angle
of the steering wheel be less than
30 degrees.
OKH043934N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043402N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043937N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4
4-79
Turn on "FUSE SWITCH"
• This warning message illuminates
if the fuse switch on the fuse box is
OFF.
• It means that you should turn the
fuse switch on.
For more details, refer to “Fuses” in
chapter 7.
OKH043938N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4-80
Overview
Description
The trip computer is a microcomput-
er-controlled driver information sys-
tem that displays information related
to driving.
✽ NOTICE
Some driving information stored in
the trip computer (for example
Average Vehicle Speed) resets if the
battery is disconnected.
Trip Modes
Fuel Economy
Range (1)
• The range is the estimated dis-
tance the vehicle can be driven
with the remaining fuel.
- Distance range : 30 ~ 990 mi or
50 ~ 990 km.
• If the estimated distance is below
30 mi. (50 km), the trip computer will
display “---” as range.
TRIP COMPUTER
• Tripmeter [A]
• Average Vehicle Speed [A]
• Elapsed Time [A]
TRIP A
• Tripmeter [B]
• Average Vehicle Speed [B]
• Elapsed Time [B]
TRIP B
• Range
• Average Fuel Economy
• Instant Fuel Economy
FUEL ECONOMY
To change the trip mode, press the
, (MOVE) button.
OKH043407N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4
4-81
✽ NOTICE
• If the vehicle is not on level ground
or the battery power has been
interrupted, the range function
may not operate correctly.
• The range may differ from the
actual driving distance as it is an
estimate of the available driving
distance.
• The trip computer may not register
additional fuel if less than 1.6 gal-
lons (6 liters) of fuel are added to
the vehicle.
• The fuel economy and range may
vary significantly based on driving
conditions, driving habits, and con-
dition of the vehicle.
Average Fuel Economy (2)
• The average fuel economy is calcu-
lated by the total driving distance
and fuel consumption since the last
average fuel economy reset.
- Fuel economy range: 0.0 ~ 99.9
MPG or L/100km
• The average fuel economy can be
reset both manually and automati-
cally.
Manual reset
To clear the average fuel economy
manually, press the OK (RESET) but-
ton on the steering wheel for more
than 1 second when the average fuel
economy is displayed.
Automatic reset
To make the average fuel economy
be reset automatically whenever refu-
eling, select the “Auto Reset” mode in
User Setting menu of the LCD display
(Refer to “LCD Display”).
Under “Auto Reset” mode, the aver-
age fuel economy will be cleared to
zero (---) when the vehicle speed
exceeds 1 km/h after refueling more
than 1.6 gallons (6 liters).
✽ NOTICE
The average fuel economy is not dis-
played for more accurate calculation
if the vehicle does not drive more
than 0.19 miles (300 meters) since
the Engine Start/Stop button is
turned to ON.
Features of your vehicle
4-82
Instant Fuel Economy (3)
• This mode displays the instant fuel
economy during the last few sec-
onds when the vehicle speed is
more than 6.2 MPH (10 km/h).
- Fuel economy range: 0 ~ 50
MPG or 0 ~ 20 L/100km
Trip A/B
Tripmeter (1)
• The tripmeter is the total driving dis-
tance since the last tripmeter reset.
- Distance range: 0.0 ~ 9999.9 mi. or
km
• To reset the tripmeter, press the
OK (RESET) button on the steering
wheel for more than 1 second
when the tripmeter is displayed.
Average Vehicle Speed (2)
• The average vehicle speed is cal-
culated by the total driving dis-
tance and driving time since the
last average vehicle speed reset.
- Speed range: 0 ~ 999 MPH or km/h
• To reset the average vehicle speed,
press the OK (RESET) button on
the steering wheel for more than 1
second when the average vehicle
speed is displayed.
✽ NOTICE
• The average vehicle speed is not dis-
played if the driving distance is less
than 0.19 miles (300 meters) since
the Engine Start/Stop button is
turned to ON.
• Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the average vehicle speed keeps
going while the engine is running.
OKH043408N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4
4-83
Elapsed Time (3)
• The elapsed time is the total driv-
ing time since the last elapsed time
reset.
- Time range (hh:mm): 00:00 ~ 99:59
• To reset the elapsed time, press the
OK (RESET) button on the steering
wheel for more than 1 second when
the elapsed time is displayed.
✽ NOTICE
Even if the vehicle is not in motion,
the elapsed time keeps going while
the engine is running.
One time driving information mode
This display shows trip distance (1)
and the vehicle can be driven with
the remaining fuel (2).
This information is displayed for a
few seconds when you turn off the
engine and then goes off automati-
cally. The information provided is cal-
culated according to each trip.
If the estimated distance is below 30
mi. (50km), the distance to empty (2)
will display as "---" and a refuel mes-
sage will appear (3).
OKH043406N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4-84
Warning lights
✽ NOTICE -
Warning lights
Make sure that all warning lights
are OFF after starting the engine. If
any light is still ON, this indicates a
situation that needs attention.
Air bag Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 6
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the SRS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
Seat Belt Warning Light
This warning light informs the driver
that the seat belt is not fastened.
For more details, refer to the “Seat
Belts” in chapter 3.
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Features of your vehicle
4
4-85
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds
- It remains on if the parking brake
is applied.
• When the parking brake is applied.
• When the brake fluid level in the
reservoir is low.
- If the warning light illuminates
with the parking brake released, it
indicates the brake fluid level in
reservoir is low.
If the brake fluid level in the reservoir
is low:
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.With the engine stopped, check the
brake fluid level immediately and
add fluid as required (For more
details, refer to “Brake Fluid” in
chapter 7).
Then check all brake components
for fluid leaks. If any leaks in the
brake system is still found, the
warning light remains on, or the
brakes do not operate properly, do
not drive the vehicle.
In this case, have your vehicle
towed to an authorized K900 Kia
dealer and inspected.
Dual-diagonal braking system
Your vehicle is equipped with dual-
diagonal braking systems. This
means you still have braking on two
wheels even if one of the dual sys-
tems should fail.
With only one of the dual systems
working, more than normal pedal
travel and greater pedal pressure are
required to stop the vehicle.
Also, the vehicle will not stop in as
short a distance with only a portion
of the brake system working.
If the brakes fail while you are driv-
ing, shift to a lower gear for addition-
al engine braking and stop the vehi-
cle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Features of your vehicle
4-86
Anti-lock Brake System
(ABS) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ABS (The normal braking sys-
tem will still be operational without
the assistance of the anti-lock
brake system).
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
Electronic
Brake force
Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
These two warning lights illuminate at
the same time while driving:
• When the ABS and regular brake
system may not work normally.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
Parking Brake & Brake
Fluid Warning Light
Driving the vehicle with a warn-
ing light ON is dangerous. If the
Parking Brake & Brake Fluid
Warning Light illuminates with
the parking brake released, it
indicates that the brake fluid
level is low.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4
4-87
✽ NOTICE
- Electronic Brake
force Distribution
(EBD) System
Warning Light
When the ABS Warning Light is on
or both ABS and Parking Brake &
Brake Fluid Warning Lights are on,
the speedometer, odometer, or trip-
meter may not work. Also, the EPS
Warning Light may illuminate and
the steering effort may increase or
decrease.
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized K900 Kia dealer
as soon as possible.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
the emission control system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
Electronic Brake force
Distribution (EBD) System
Warning Light
When both ABS and Parking
Brake & Brake Fluid Warning
Lights are on, the brake system
will not work normally and you
may experience an unexpected
and dangerous situation during
sudden braking.
In this case, avoid high speed
driving and abrupt braking.
Have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized K900 Kia dealer
as soon as possible.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4-88
Charging System
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When there is a malfunction with
either the alternator or electrical
charging system.
If there is a malfunction with either
the alternator or electrical charging
system:
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.Turn the engine off and check the
alternator drive belt for looseness
or breakage.
If the belt is adjusted properly,
there may be a problem in the elec-
trical charging system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer as soon as possible.
Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL)
Driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Lamp (MIL) on may
cause damage to the emission
control systems which could
effect drivability and/or fuel
economy.
CAUTION
Gasoline Engine
If the Malfunction Indicator
Lamp (MIL) illuminates, potential
catalytic converter damage is
possible which could result in
loss of engine power.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer as soon as possible.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4
4-89
Engine Coolant
Temperature Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When the engine coolant tempera-
ture is above 248°F (120°C). This
means that the engine is overheat-
ed and may be damaged.
If your vehicle is overheated, refer
to “Overheating” in chapter 6.
• When your vehicle is overheated,
the color of the engine coolant
temperature symbol will change
(white → red). (for type B cluster)
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It remains on until the engine is
started.
• When the engine oil pressure is low.
If the engine oil pressure is low:
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.Turn the engine off and check the
engine oil level (For more details,
refer to “Engine Oil” in chapter 7). If
the level is low, add oil as required.
If the warning light remains on after
adding oil or if oil is not available,
have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer as
soon as possible.
Engine Overheating
Do not continue driving with the
engine overheated. Otherwise
engine may be damaged.
CAUTION
Engine Oil Pressure
Warning Light
• If the engine does not stop
immediately after the Engine
Oil Pressure Warning Light is
illuminated, severe damage
could result.
• If the warning light stays on
while the engine is running, it
indicates that there may be
serious engine damage or
malfunction. In this case,
1. Stop the vehicle as soon as
it is safe to do so.
2. Turn off the engine and
check the oil level. If the oil
level is low, fill the engine
oil to the proper level.
3. Start the engine again. If the
warning light stays on after
the engine is started, turn
the engine off immediately.
In this case, have your vehi-
cle inspected by an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4-90
Low Fuel Level Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
• When the fuel tank is nearly empty.
• When the fuel tank is nearly empty,
the color of the fuel level symbol
will change (white → orange). (for
type B cluster)
If the fuel tank is nearly empty:
Add fuel as soon as possible.
Low Tire Pressure
Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When one or more of your tires are
significantly underinflated (The
location of the underinflated tires
are displayed on the LCD display).
For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
This warning light remains on after
blinking for approximately 60 seconds
or repeats blinking on and off at the
intervals of approximately 3 seconds:
• When there is a malfunction with
the TPMS.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer as soon as possible.
For more details, refer to “Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS)” in chapter 6.
Low Fuel Level
Driving with the Low Fuel Level
warning light on or with the fuel
level below “E” can cause the
engine to misfire and damage
the catalytic converter
(if equipped).
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4
4-91
Door Ajar Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
When a door is not closed securely.
Trunk Open Warning
Light
This warning light illuminates:
When the trunk is not closed securely.
Adaptive Front Lighting
System (AFLS) Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light blinks:
• Once you set the Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON posi-
tion.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the AFLS.
If there is a malfunction with the AFLS:
1.Drive carefully to the nearest safe
location and stop your vehicle.
2.Turn the engine off and restart the
engine. If the warning light remains
on, have your vehicle inspected by
an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Low tire pressure
• Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable
and can contribute to loss of
vehicle control and increased
braking distances.
• Continued driving or low pres-
sure tires will cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
WARNING
Safe Stopping
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire damage
caused by external factors.
• If you notice any vehicle insta-
bility, immediately take your
foot off the accelerator pedal,
apply the brakes gradually with
light force, and slowly move to
a safe position off the road.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4-92
LED Headlamp Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the Engine Start/Stop
Button to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the LED headlamp.
In this case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
This warning light blinks:
• When there is a malfunction with a
LED headlamp related part.
In this case, we recommend that you
have the vehicle inspected by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Electric Parking Brake
(EPB) Warning Light
This warning light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the EPB.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
- Electric Parking
Brake (EPB)
Warning Light
The Electric Parking Brake (EPB)
Warning Light may illuminate when
the Electronic Stability control
(ESC) Indicator Light comes on to
indicates that the ESC is not work-
ing properly (This does not indicate
malfunction of the EPB).
LED Headlamp Warning Light
Continuous driving with the
LED Headlamp Warning Light
on or blinking can reduce LED
headlamp (low beam) life.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4
4-93
Advanced Smart Cruise
Control (ASCC) Warning
Light (if equipped)
This warning light illuminates :
• When there is a malfunction with
the advanced smart cruise control
system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900 Kia
dealer.
❈For more details, refer to
"Advanced Smart Cruise Control
System" in chapter 5.
Advanced Smart Cruise
Control (ASCC) Radar
Warning Light
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates:
• When the radar of the advanced
smart cruise control system or its
cover is stained.
Remove the stains with a soft cloth
❈For more details, refer to
“Advanced Smart Cruise Control
(ASCC) System” in chapter 5.
Indicator Lights
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When there is a malfunction with
the ESC system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
While the ESC is operating.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
Features of your vehicle
4-94
Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) OFF
Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the ignition switch or
Engine Start/Stop Button to the ON
position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the ESC sys-
tem by pressing the ESC OFF but-
ton.
For more details, refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in chapter 5.
AUTO HOLD Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• [White] When you activate the auto
hold system by pressing the AUTO
HOLD button.
• [Green] When you stop the vehicle
completely by depressing the
brake pedal with the auto hold sys-
tem activated.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
tion with the auto hold system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
❈For more details, refer to “Auto
Hold” in chapter 5.
Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) Indicator Light (if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• [Green] When you activate the lane
departure warning system by
pressing the LDWS button.
• [Yellow] When there is a malfunc-
tion with the lane departure warn-
ing system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
❈For more details, refer to “Lane
Departure Warning System
(LDWS)” in chapter 5.
Features of your vehicle
4
4-95
Advanced Vehicle Safety
Management (AVSM)
OFF Indicator Light
(if equipped)
This indicator light illuminates:
• Once you set the Engine Start/Stop
Button to the ON position.
- It illuminates for approximately 3
seconds and then goes off.
• When you deactivate the AVSM sys-
tem by setting on the LCD display.
❈For more details, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
If this indicator stays on when AVSM
OFF is not selected, the AVSM may
have malfunctioned.
In this case, have your vehicle inspect-
ed by an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
❈For more details, refer to “Advanced
Vehicle Safety Management
(AVSM) System” in chapter 5.
SPORT/SNOW Mode Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When you select "SPORT/SNOW"
mode as drive mode.
❈For more details, refer to "Drive
mode integrated control system" in
chapter 5.
ECO Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates :
• When the Active ECO system is
activated by pressing the DRIVE
mode button.
• The ECO indicator (green) will illu-
minate to show that the Active
ECO is operating.
❈For more detailed information,
refer to “Drive Mode Integrated
Control System" in chapter 5.
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type A ■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4-96
Immobilizer Indicator
Light (With Smart Key)
This indicator light illuminates for up
to 30 seconds:
• When the vehicle detects the
smart key in the vehicle properly
while the Engine Start/Stop Button
is ACC or ON.
- At this time, you can start the
engine.
- The indicator light goes off after
starting the engine.
This indicator light blinks for a few
seconds:
• When the smart key is not in the
vehicle.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine.
This indicator light illuminates for 2
seconds and goes off:
• When the vehicle can not detect
the smart key which is in the vehi-
cle while the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
This indicator light blinks:
• When the battery of the smart key
is weak.
- At this time, you can not start the
engine. However, you can start
the engine if you press the Engine
Start/Stop Button with the smart
key. (For more details, refer to
“Starting the Engine” in chapter
5).
• When there is a malfunction with
the immobilizer system.
In this case, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
Turn Signal Indicator
Light
This indicator light blinks:
• When you turn the turn signal light
on.
If any of the following occurs, there
may be a malfunction with the turn
signal system. In this case, have your
vehicle inspected by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
- The indicator light does not blink
but illuminates.
- The indicator light blinks more
rapidly.
- The indicator light does not illu-
minate at all.
Features of your vehicle
4
4-97
High Beam Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the headlights are on and in
the high beam position.
• When the turn signal lever is pulled
into the Flash-to-Pass position.
Light ON Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the tail lights or headlights
are on.
Front Fog Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the front fog lights are on.
Cruise Indicator Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control system is
enabled.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.
Features of your vehicle
4-98
Cruise SET Indicator
Light
This indicator light illuminates:
• When the cruise control speed is set.
For more details, refer to “Cruise
Control System” in chapter 5.
Features of your vehicle
4
4-99
Description
The head up display is a transparent
display which projects a shadow of
some information of the instrument
cluster and navigation on the wind-
shield glass.
• The head up display image on the
windshield glass may be invisible
when:
- Sitting posture is bad.
- Wearing polarized sunglasses.
- There is an object on the dash
covering the Heads Up Display.
- Driving on a wet road.
- A light is turned on inside the
vehicle.
- Light reflecting off the windshield
in the area of the Head Up
Display.
• If the head up display image is not
shown well, adjust the height or
illumination of the head up display
in the LCD display.
❈For more details, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
• When the head up display needs
inspection or repair, we recom-
mend that you consult an author-
ized Kia dealer.
HEAD UP DISPLAY (HUD) (IF EQUIPPED)
OKH043164N
Head Up Display
• Do not make the front wind-
shield glass have window tint
or other types of metallic
coating. Otherwise, the head
up display image may be
invisible.
• Do not place any accessories
on the clash pad or attach any
objects on the windshield
glass.
• As the Blind Spot Detection
(BSD) system is a supplemen-
tal device that may help you
drive safe, it may be danger-
ous to rely on only the BSD
information of the head up
display image when changing
the lane. Always pay attention
to drive safely.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4-100
Head Up Display ON/OFF
To activate the head up display,
press the HUD button.
If you press the HUD button again, the
head up display will be deactivated.
Head Up Display Information
1.Turn By Turn navigation information
2.Road signs
3.Speedometer
4.Cruise setting speed
5.Advanced Smart Cruise Control
(ASCC) information (if equipped)
6.Lane Departure Warning System
(LDWS) information (if equipped)
7.Blind Spot Detection (BSD) system
information (if equipped)
8.Warning lights (Low fuel)
OKH043165N OKH043167N
When replacing the front wind-
shield glass of the vehicles
equipped with the head up dis-
play, replace it with a wind-
shield glass designed for the
head up display operation.
Otherwise, duplicated images
may be displayed on the wind-
shield glass.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4
4-101
Head Up Display Setting
On the LCD display, you can change
the head up display settings as fol-
lows.
1. Display height
2. Brightness
3. Contents selection
4. Speedometer size
5. Speedometer color
❈For more details, refer to “LCD
Display” in this chapter.
Features of your vehicle
4-102
The Parking Assist System is not a
substitute for proper and safe parking
and backing-up procedures. Always
drive safely and use caution when
parking. The Parking Assist System
may not detect every object behind or
in front of the vehicle.
The parking assist system assists the
driver during movement of the vehicle
by chiming if any object is sensed
within the distance of 39 in (100 cm)
in front or behind the vehicle.
This system is a supplemental sys-
tem and it is not intended to nor does
it replace the need for extreme care
and attention of the driver.
The sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors are limit-
ed. When the vehicle moving, pay
attention to your surroundings.
Operation of the parking
assist system
Operating condition
• This system activates when the
parking assist button is pressed with
the Engine Start/Stop Button ON.
• The parking assist button turns on
automatically and activates the
parking assist system when you
shift the gear to the R (Reverse)
position.
PARKING ASSIST SYSTEM
OKH043168N
OKH043169N
Sensor
■ Front
■ Rear
Sensor
OKH043170N
The parking assist system is a
supplementary function only.
The operation of the parking
assist system can be affected
by several factors (including
environmental conditions). It is
the responsibility of the driver
to always check the area in front
of and behind the vehicle before
and while moving.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4
4-103
• The sensing distance while backing
up is approximately 39 in. (100 cm)
when you are driving less than 6.2
mph (10 km/h).
• The sensing distance while moving
forward is approximately 39 in. (100
cm) when you are driving less than
6.2 mph (10 km/h).
• When more than two objects are
sensed at the same time, the clos-
est one will be recognized first.
✽ NOTICE
The system may not detect and
object if the distance from the object
is already less than approximately
10 in. (25 cm) when the system is
turned ON.
Types of warning sound and indicator
Distance
from object
Warning indicator
Warning sound
When driving
forward
When driving
rearward
39 in. ~ 24 in.
(100cm~60cm)
Front -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
Rear -
Buzzer beeps
intermittently
24 in. ~ 12 in.
(60cm~30cm)
Front
Buzzer beeps
frequently
Rear -
Buzzer beeps
frequently
12 in.
(30cm)
Front
Buzzer sounds
continuously
Rear -
Buzzer sounds
continuously
✽ NOTICE
The indicator may differ from the illustration as objects or sensors status.
If the indicator blinks, the system should be checked by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
Features of your vehicle
4-104
Non-operational conditions of
parking assist system
Parking assist system may not
operate normally when:
1.Moisture is frozen to the sensor. (It
will operate normally when mois-
ture melts.)
2.Sensor is covered with foreign mat-
ter, such as snow or water, or the
sensor cover is blocked. (It will
operate normally when the materi-
al is removed or the sensor is no
longer blocked.)
3.Sensor is stained with foreign mat-
ter such as snow or water.
(Sensing range will return to nor-
mal when removed.)
4.The parking assist button is off.
There is a possibility of parking
assist system malfunction when:
1.Driving on uneven road surfaces
such as unpaved roads, gravel,
bumps, or gradient.
2.Objects generating excessive noise
such as vehicle horns, loud motor-
cycle engines, or truck air brakes
can interfere with the sensor.
3.Heavy rain or water spray.
4.Wireless transmitters or mobile
phones present near the sensor.
5.Sensor is covered with snow.
Detecting range may decrease
when:
1.Outside air temperature is
extremely hot or cold.
2.Undetectable objects smaller than
39 in (1 m) and narrower than 5.5
in (14 cm) in diameter.
The following objects may not be
recognized by the sensor:
1.Sharp or slim objects such as
ropes, chains or small poles.
2.Objects, which tend to absorb sen-
sor frequency such as clothes,
spongy material or snow.
Features of your vehicle
4
4-105
✽ NOTICE
1. The warning may not sound
sequentially depending on the
speed and shapes of the objects
detected.
2. The parking assist system may
malfunction if the vehicle bumper
height or sensor installation has
been modified. Any non-factory
installed equipment or accessories
may also interfere with the sensor
performance.
3. Sensor may not recognize objects
less than 12 in (30 cm) from the
sensor, or it may sense an incor-
rect distance. Use with caution.
4. When the sensor is frozen or
stained with snow or water, the
sensor may be inoperative until
the stains are removed using a
soft cloth.
5. Do not push, scratch or strike the
sensor with any hard objects that
could damage the surface of the
sensor. Sensor damage could occur.
✽ NOTICE
This system can only sense objects
within the range and location of the
sensors, it can not detect objects in
other areas where sensors are not
installed. Also, small or slim objects,
or objects located between sensors
may not be detected.
Always visually check in front and
behind the vehicle when driving.
Be sure to inform any drivers in the
vehicle that may be unfamiliar with
the system regarding the system’s
capabilities and limitations.
Pay close attention when the
vehicle is driven close to
objects on the road, particularly
pedestrians, and especially
children. Be aware that some
objects may not be detected by
the sensors, due to the objects
distance, size or material, all of
which can limit the effective-
ness of the sensor. Always per-
form a visual inspection to
make sure the vehicle is clear of
all obstructions before moving
the vehicle in any direction.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4-106
Self-diagnosis
If you don’t hear an audible warning
sound or if the buzzer sounds inter-
mittently when shifting the shift lever
into the R (Reverse) position, this
may indicate a malfunction in the
parking assist system. If this occurs,
have the system checked by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Your new vehicle warranty does
not cover any accidents or dam-
age to the vehicle or injuries to
its occupants related to a park-
ing assist system. Always drive
safely and cautiously.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4
4-107
The Rear-Camera Display is not a
substitute for proper and safe back-
ing-up procedures. The Rear-Camera
Display may not display every object
behind the vehicle. Always drive safe-
ly and use caution when backing up.
The rear camera display will activate
when the back-up light is ON with the
Engine Start/Stop Button ON and the
shift lever in the R (Reverse) position.
This system is a supplemental system
that shows behind the vehicle through
the navigation display while backing-
up.
Always keep the camera lens clean. If
the lens is covered with foreign matter,
the camera may not operate normally.
REAR CAMERA DISPLAY (IF EQUIPPED)
OKH043175N
OKH043174N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OKH043263N
Rear camera display
The rear camera display is not a
safety device. It only serves to
assist the driver in identifying
objects directly behind the mid-
dle of the vehicle. The camera
does NOT cover the complete
area behind the vehicle.
WARNING
Relying on the Rear-
Camera Display
Never rely solely on the rear cam-
era display when backing-up.
WARNING
• This system is a supplemen-
tary function only. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the area behind
the vehicle before and while
backing up.
• Always keep the camera lens
clean. If the lens is covered
with foreign matter, the cam-
era may not operate normally.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4-108
The Parking Guide System is not a
substitute for proper and safe park-
ing procedures. The Parking Guide
System may not detect every object
surrounding the vehicle. Always drive
safely and use caution when parking.
The Parking Guide System (PGS)
will activate when the back-up light is
ON with the Engine Start/Stop
Button ON and the shift lever in the R
(Reverse) position.
Parking guide system (PGS)
display
1.Changing rear view angle
(Top/Normal)
Changes the view angle of the rear
camera.
2. Parking guide line
According to steering angle, the
parking guide line displays to help
parking.
PARKING GUIDE SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OKH043175N
OKH043174N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OKH043263N
OKH043304N
This is a supplementary sys-
tem. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always check the
area around the vehicle when
parking the vehicle.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4
4-109
Changing rear view angle
1. Top view
When Top View is selected, the rear
view angle is displayed as if looking
down from above.
2. Normal view
When Normal View is selected, the
rear view angle is displayed in a cus-
tomary view with a normal rear view
perspective.
OKH043305N
OKH043306N
Features of your vehicle
4-110
The Blind Spot Detection System is
not a substitute for proper and safe
lane changing procedures. Always
drive safely and use caution when
changing lanes. The Blind Spot
Detection System may not detect
every object alongside the vehicle.
Front blind spot monitoring system is
a supplemental system that shows
blind spot in front of the vehicle
through the AV monitor.
The front blind spot monitoring sys-
tem will operate when you press the
button and shift the shift lever into
N(Neutral) or D(Drive) while driving
less then 6.2mph (10km/h).
✽ NOTICE
The front blind spot monitoring sys-
tem may not operate normally, when
you drive in the extremely high or low
temperature area. (operating temper-
ature: -4°F ~ 149°F (-20°C~65°C))
FRONT BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OKH043172N
OKH043173N
This is a supplementary sys-
tem. It is the responsibility of
the driver to always check the
area around the vehicle before
driving because there is a dead
zone that can't be seen through
the camera.
Always keep the camera lens
clean. If the lens is covered with
foreign matter, the camera may
not operate normally.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4
4-111
The Surround View Monitoring
System (SVM) is not a substitute for
proper and safe parking procedures.
The Surround View Monitoring
System (SVM) may not detect every
object surrounding the vehicle.
Always drive safely and use caution
when parking.
The Surround View Monitoring
System (SVM) can assist in parking
by allowing the driver to see around
the vehicle. Push the button into the
[ON] position to operate the system.
To cancel the system, push the but-
ton again.
Operating conditions
- When the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON position
- When the transaxle is on D, N or R
- When the vehicle speed is not over
12.4 mph (20km/h)
• When the vehicle speed is over
12.4mph (20km/h), the SVM sys-
tem is turned off. If the vehicle
speed is not over 12.4mph (20km/h)
after turning off the SVM by over
speed, the SVM is not turned on. To
operate again, push the button.
• When the vehicle moves back-
wards, regardless of On/Off of but-
ton and vehicle speed, the SVM is
operated.
• When the trunk and driver/passen-
ger door are opened and the out-
side mirror is folded, the warning is
illuminated in SVM system.
• If the SVM system is not operating
normally, the system should be
checked by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
SURROUND VIEW MONITORING SYSTEM (SVM) (IF EQUIPPED)
OKH043184N
This system is a supplementary
function only. It is the responsi-
bility of the driver to always
check the area around the vehi-
cle before and while moving.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4-112
Puddle lamp
When all the doors (and trunk) are
locked and closed, the puddle lamp
will come on for about 15 seconds if
any of the below is performed.
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
- When the vehicle is approached
with the smart key in possession.
Also, if the outside rearview mirror
folding switch is in the AUTO posi-
tion, the outside rearview mirror will
unfold automatically.
Headlight
When the headlight(light switch in the
headlight or AUTO position) is on and
all doors (and trunk) are locked and
closed, the position light and head-
light will come on for 15 seconds if
any of the below is performed.
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button, the position light and
headlight will turn off immediately.
Interior light
When the interior light switch is in the
DOOR position and all doors (and
trunk) are locked and closed, the
room lamp will come on for 30 sec-
onds if any of the below is performed.
- When the door unlock button is
pressed on the smart key.
- When the button of the outside
door handle is pressed.
At this time, if you press the door lock
or unlock button, the room lamp will
turn off immediately.
WELCOME SYSTEM
OKH043285N
Features of your vehicle
4
4-113
LIGHTING
Battery saver function
• The purpose of this feature is to
prevent the battery from being dis-
charged. The system automatically
turns off the parking lights when
the driver turns off the engine and
opens the driver-side door.
• With this feature, the parking lights
will be turned off automatically if
the driver parks on the side of the
road at night.
If necessary, to keep the lights on
when the engine is turned OFF,
perform the following:
1) Open the driver-side door.
2) Turn the parking lights OFF and
ON again using the light switch
on the steering column.
Headlight escort function
If you turn the Engine Start/Stop
Button to the ACC or OFF position
with the headlights ON, the head-
lights (and/or tail lights) remain on for
about 5 minutes. However, if the dri-
ver’s door is opened and closed, the
headlights are turned off after 15
seconds.
The headlights can be turned off by
pressing the lock button on the smart
key twice or turning the light switch to
the OFF or Auto position.
However, if you turn the light switch
to the Auto position when it is dark
outside, the headlights will not be
turned off.
If the driver gets out of the vehi-
cle through other doors (except
driver's door), the battery saver
function does not operate and
the headlight escort function
does not turn off automatically.
Therefore, It causes the battery
to be discharged. In this case,
make sure to turn off the lamp
before getting out of the vehicle.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4-114
Daytime running light
(if equipped)
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) can
make it easier for others to see the
front of your vehicle during the day.
DRL can be helpful in many different
driving conditions, and it is especially
helpful after dawn and before sunset.
The DRL system turns OFF when:
1. The headlights(Front position lamp,
Low beam, High beam) are ON.
2. The parking brake is applied.
3. Engine stops.
4. The front fog light is ON.
5. The light switch is in the DRL off
position. (USA only)
Lighting control
The light switch has a Headlight and
a Parking light position.
To operate the lights, turn the knob at
the end of the control lever to one of
the following positions:
(1) OFF or DRL OFF position
(2) Auto light position
(3) Parking light position
(4) Headlight position
OKH043189N
OKH043509N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4
4-115
Parking light position ( )
When the light switch is in the park-
ing light position, the tail and license
lights will turn ON.
Headlight position ( )
When the light switch is in the head-
light position, the head, tail and
license lights will turn ON.
✽ NOTICE
The Engine Start/Stop Button must
be in the ON position to turn on the
headlights.
Auto light/AFLS position
When the light switch is in the AUTO
light position, the taillights and head-
lights will be turned ON or OFF auto-
matically depending on the amount
of light outside the vehicle.
OKH043192N
OKH043190N
OKH043191N
Features of your vehicle
4-116
If your vehicle is equipped with the
adaptive front lighting system
(AFLS), it will also operate when the
headlamp is ON.
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting
System) (if equipped)
Adaptive front lighting system uses
the steering angle and vehicle speed,
to keep your field of vision wide by
swiveling and leveling the headlamp.
Change the switch to the AUTO posi-
tion when the engine is running. The
adaptive front lighting system will
operate when the headlamp is ON. To
turn off the AFLS, change the switch
to other positions. After turning the
AFLS off, headlamp swiveling no
longer occurs, but leveling operates
continuously.
If the AFLS malfunction indicator
comes on, the AFLS is not working
properly. Drive to the nearest safe
location and restart the engine. If the
indicator remains on, have the sys-
tem checked by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
OKH043188N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH043187N
• Never place anything over the
sensor (1) located on the
instrument panel, this will
ensure better auto-light sys-
tem control.
• Don’t clean the sensor using a
window cleaner, the cleaner
may leave a light film which
could interfere with sensor
operation.
• If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of coating on
the front windshield, the Auto
light system may not work
properly.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4
4-117
High beam operation
To turn on the high beam headlights,
push the lever away from you. Pull it
back for low beams.
The high beam indicator will illumi-
nate when the headlight high beams
are switched on.
To prevent the battery from being
discharged, do not leave the lights
on for a prolonged time while the
engine is not running.
To flash the headlights, pull the lever
towards you. It will return to the nor-
mal (low beam) position when
released. The headlight switch does
not need to be on to use this flashing
feature.
OKH043193N
OKH043194N
Do not use high beam when
there are other vehicles. Using
high beam could obstruct the
other driver’s vision.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4-118
Turn signals and lane change
signals
The Engine Start/Stop Button must
be ON position for the turn signals to
function. To turn on the turn signals,
move the lever up or down (A). The
green arrow indicators on the instru-
ment panel indicate which turn signal
is operating.
They will self-cancel after a turn is
completed. If the indicator continues
to flash after a turn, manually return
the lever to the OFF position.
To signal a lane change, move the
turn signal lever slightly and hold it in
position (B). The lever will return to
the OFF position when released.
If an indicator stays on and does not
flash or if it flashes abnormally, one of
the turn signal bulbs may be burned
out and will require replacement.
One-touch lane change function
To activate an one-touch lane
change function, move the turn sig-
nal lever slightly and then release it.
The lane change signals will blink 3,
5 or 7 times.
You can choose one-touch lane
change blinking function in “One
touch turn lamp” of “User setting”.
Refer to “User setting” in chapter 4.
✽ NOTICE
If an indicator flash is abnormally
quick or slow, a bulb may be burned
out or have a poor electrical connec-
tion in the circuit.
OKH043196N
Features of your vehicle
4
4-119
Front fog light
Fog lights are used to provide
improved visibility when visibility is
poor due to fog, rain or snow, etc.
1. Turn on the head light.
2. Turn the light switch (1) to the front
fog light position.
3. To turn off the front fog light, turn
the light switch to the front fog light
position again or turn off the head
light.
Headlight leveling device
(if equipped)
Automatic type
It is automatically adjusted the head-
light beam level according to the
number of the passengers and the
loading weight in the luggage area.
And it offers the proper headlight
beam under the various conditions.
OKH043197N
When in operation, the fog
lights consume large amounts
of vehicle electrical power. Only
use the fog lights when visibili-
ty is poor or unnecessary bat-
tery and generator drain could
occur.
CAUTION
If it is not working properly even
though your car is inclined
backward according to passen-
ger's posture, or the headlight
beam is irradiated to the high or
low position, have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
Don't attempt to inspect or
replace the wiring yourself to
prevent malfunction.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4-120
Windshield wiper/washer
A : Wiper speed control
· MIST – Single wipe
· OFF – Off
· AUTO – AUTO control wipe
· LO – Low wiper speed
· HI – High wiper speed
B : Auto control wipe time adjustment
C : Wash with brief wipes
Windshield wipers
Operates as follows when the Engine
Start/Stop Button is turned ON.
MIST : For a single wiping cycle,
push the lever upward and
release it with the lever in the
OFF position. The wipers will
operate continuously if the
lever is pushed upward and
held.
OFF : Wiper is not in operation
AUTO : The rain sensor located on
the upper end of the wind-
shield glass senses the
amount of rainfall and con-
trols the wiping cycle for the
proper interval. The more it
rains, the faster the wiper
operates. When the rain
stops, the wiper stops. To
vary the speed setting, turn
the speed control knob (B).
LO : Normal wiper speed
HI : Fast wiper speed
✽ NOTICE
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow or ice on the windshield, defrost
the windshield for about 10 minutes,
or until the snow and/or ice is
removed before using the windshield
wipers to ensure proper operation.
WIPERS AND WASHERS
OKH043516N OKH043198N
Features of your vehicle
4
4-121
Auto control (if equipped)
The rain sensor located on the upper
end of the windshield glass senses
the amount of rainfall and controls the
wiping cycle for the proper interval.
The more it rains, the faster the wiper
operates. When the rain stops, the
wiper stops.
To vary the speed setting, turn the
speed control knob (1).
If the wiper switch is set in AUTO
mode when the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON, the wiper will operate
once to perform a self-check of the
system. Set the wiper to OFF posi-
tion when the wiper is not in use.
When the Engine Start/Stop
Button is ON and the wind-
shield wiper switch is placed in
the AUTO mode, use caution in
the following situations to avoid
any injury to the hands or other
parts of the body:
• Do not touch the upper end of
the windshield glass facing
the rain sensor.
• Do not wipe the upper end of
the windshield glass with a
damp or wet cloth.
• Do not put pressure on the
windshield glass.
CAUTION
When washing the vehicle, set
the wiper switch to the OFF posi-
tion so the auto wiper will not
operate.
The wiper may operate and be
damaged if the switch is set in
the AUTO mode while washing
the vehicle.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
passenger side windshield
glass. Damage to system parts
could occur and may not be cov-
ered by your vehicle warranty.
When starting the vehicle in win-
ter, set the wiper switch in the
OFF position. Otherwise, wipers
may operate and ice may dam-
age the windshield wiper blades.
Always remove all snow and ice
and defrost the windshield prop-
erly prior to operating the wind-
shield wipers.
CAUTION
OKH043517N
Features of your vehicle
4-122
Windshield washers
In the OFF position, pull the lever
gently toward you to spray washer
fluid on the windshield and to run the
wipers 1-3 cycles.
Use this function when the wind-
shield is dirty.
The spray and wiper operation will
continue until you release the lever.
If the washer does not work, check
the washer fluid level. If the fluid level
is not sufficient, you will need to add
appropriate non-abrasive windshield
washer fluid to the washer reservoir.
The reservoir filler neck is located in
the front of the engine compartment
on the passenger side.
To prevent possible damage to
the washer pump, do not oper-
ate the washer when the fluid
reservoir is empty.
CAUTION
• To prevent possible damage
to the wipers or windshield,
do not operate the wipers
when the windshield is dry.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper blades, do not use
gasoline, kerosene, paint thin-
ner, or other solvents on or
near them.
• To prevent damage to the
wiper arms and other compo-
nents, do not attempt to move
the wipers manually.
CAUTION
Do not use the washer in freez-
ing temperatures without first
warming the windshield with
the defrosters; the washer solu-
tion could freeze on contact
with the windshield and
obscure your vision.
WARNING
OKH043199N
Features of your vehicle
4
4-123
Automatic turn off function
(if equipped)
The interior lights automatically turn
off approximately 20 minutes after
the engine is turned off.
If your vehicle is equipped with the
theft alarm system, the interior lights
automatically turns off several sec-
onds after the system is armed.
Front lamp switch
• : Press the button to turn the
lamp on. This light produces
a spot beam for convenient
use as a map lamp at night
or as a personal lamp for
the driver and the front pas-
senger. To turn the lamp off,
press the button again.
• ROOM : Press the button to turn
the front and rear lamp on.
To turn the lamp off, press
the button again.
INTERIOR LIGHT
OKH043200N
Do not use the interior lights for
extended periods when the
engine is not running.
It may cause battery discharge.
CAUTION
Do not use the interior lights
when driving in the dark.
Accidents could happen
because the view may be
obscured by interior lights.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4-124
• REAR ROOM : Press the button to
turn the rear lamp
on. To turn the lamp
off, press the but-
ton again.
• DOOR :
Press the button to operate the door
mode. The indicator on the button will
illuminate and lamps will turn on or off
as follows:
- The front and rear lamp comes
on when a door is opened. If the
door is closed, the lamps will go
out in 30 seconds.
- The front and rear lamp comes
on for approximately 30 seconds
when doors are unlocked with
the smart key as long as the
doors are not opened.
- The front and rear lamp will stay
on for approximately 20 minutes
if a door is opened with the
engine start/stop button in the
ACC or OFF position.
- The front and rear lamp will stay
on continuously if the door is
opened with the engine
start/stop button in the ON posi-
tion.
- The front and rear lamp will go
out immediately if the engine
start/stop button is changed to
the ON position or all doors are
locked.
To turn off the door mode, press the
button again. The indicator on the
button will turn off.
• PRIVACY :
Press the button to operate the pri-
vacy mode. The indicator on the but-
ton will illuminate and lamps will turn
on or off as follows:
- If you open any door, the lamp for
the open door will illuminate.
To turn off the privacy mode, press
the button again. The indicator on the
button will turn off.
Rear lamp switch
Type A
• : Press the button to turn the
lamp on. This light produces
a spot beam for convenient
use as a map lamp at night
or as a personal lamp for
the driver and the front pas-
senger. To turn the lamp off,
press the button again.
• ROOM : Press the button to turn
the rear lamp on. To turn
the lamp off, press the but-
ton again.
OKH043201N
Features of your vehicle
4
4-125
Type B
Press the button to turn the rear
lamp on. To turn the lamp off, press
the button again.
Trunk room lamp
The trunk room lamp comes on
when the trunk is opened.
Door courtesy lamp
The door courtesy lamp comes ON
when the door is opened to assist
entering or exiting the vehicle. It also
serves as a warning to passing vehi-
cles that the vehicle door is open.
OKH043307N
OKH043203N
OKH043202N
To prevent unnecessary charg-
ing system drain, close the
trunk lid securely after using
the trunk room.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4-126
Glove box lamp
The glove box lamp comes on when
the glove box is opened.
Vanity mirror lamp
Opening the lid of the vanity mirror
will automatically turn on the mirror
light.
To prevent unnecessary charg-
ing system drain, close the glove
box securely after using the
glove box.
CAUTION
Vanity mirror lamp
(if equipped)
Always have the switch in the
off position when the vanity
mirror lamp is not in use. If the
sunvisor is closed without the
lamp off, it may discharge the
battery or damage the sunvisor.
CAUTION
OKH043204N OKH043205N
Features of your vehicle
4
4-127
✽ NOTICE
If you want to defrost and defog the
front windshield, refer to
“Windshield Defrosting and
Defogging” in this section.
Rear window defroster
The defroster heats the window to
remove frost, fog and thin ice from
the rear window, while the engine is
running.
To activate the rear window
defroster, press the rear window
defroster button located in the center
facia switch panel.
The indicator on the rear window
defroster button illuminates when the
defroster is ON.
If there is heavy accumulation of
snow on the rear window, brush it off
before operating the rear defroster.
The rear window defroster automati-
cally turns off after approximately 20
minutes or when the Engine
Start/Stop Button is turned off. To
turn off the defroster, press the rear
window defroster button again.
Outside rearview mirror defroster
(if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
outside rearview mirror defrosters,
they will operate at the same time you
turn on the rear window defroster.
Wiper deicer (if equipped)
If your vehicle is equipped with the
wiper deicer, it will be operating at the
same time you turn on the rear win-
dow defroster.
DEFROSTER
OKH043207N
Conductors
To prevent damage to the con-
ductors bonded to the inside
surface of the rear window,
never use sharp instruments or
window cleaners containing
abrasives to clean the window.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4-128
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM
1. Driver’s temperature control button
2. AUTO (automatic control) button
3. OFF button
4. Fan speed control button
5. Air conditioning button
6. Mode selection button
7. Front windshield defrost button
8. Air intake control button
9. Synchronize (Driver, passenger and rear
side) temperature control button
10. Passenger’s temperature control button
11. Rear window defrost button
12. Climate information screen selection button
13. Fan speed control button (Rear)
14. OFF button (Rear)
15. LCD display
16. Rear side temperature control knob
17. AUTO (automatic control) button
OKH043208N/OKH043209N
■ Front
■ Rear
Features of your vehicle
4
4-129
Automatic heating and air con-
ditioning
1.Press the AUTO button.
The modes, fan speeds, air intake
and air-conditioning will be controlled
automatically according to the tem-
perature setting.
2.Press the TEMP button to set the
desired temperature.
✽ NOTICE
• To turn the automatic operation off,
select any of the following buttons:
- Mode selection button
- Air conditioning button
- Front windshield defroster button
- Air intake control button
- Fan speed control button
The selected function will be con-
trolled manually while other func-
tions operate automatically.
• For your convenience and to
improve the effectiveness of the
climate control, use the AUTO
button and set the temperature to
73°F (23°C).
OKH043210N
■ Front
■ Rear
OKH043286N
■ Front
Features of your vehicle
4-130
✽ NOTICE
Never place anything over the sen-
sor located on the instrument panel
to ensure better control of the heat-
ing and cooling system.
Manual heating and air condi-
tioning
The heating and cooling system can
be controlled manually by pushing
buttons other than the AUTO button.
In this case, the system works
sequentially according to the order of
buttons selected. When pressing any
button except the AUTO button while
using automatic operation, the func-
tions not selected will be controlled
automatically.
1.Start the engine.
2.Set the mode to the desired posi-
tion.
For improving the effectiveness of
heating and cooling;
- Heating:
- Cooling:
3.Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the air intake control to the out-
side (fresh) air position.
5.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
6.If air conditioning is desired, turn
the air conditioning system on.
Press the AUTO button in order to
convert to full automatic control of
the system.
OKH043211N
Features of your vehicle
4
4-131
❈ Rear outlet vents (F)
• The air flow of the Rear outlet
vents is controlled by the front cli-
mate control system and delivered
through the inside air duct of the
front doors. If the door is open or
not closed completely, the air flow
of the Rear outlet vent is not deliv-
ered properly. Make sure the front
doors are closed completely.
• The air flow of the Rear outlet
vents may be weaker than the
instrument panel vents for the long
air duct in the front doors.
OKH043213N
Features of your vehicle
4-132
Mode selection
The mode selection button controls
the direction of the air flow through
the ventilation system.
The air flow outlet port is converted
as follows:
Face-Level (B, C, D, E, F, G)
Air flow is directed toward the upper
body and face. Additionally, each
outlet can be controlled to direct the
air discharged from the outlet.
Bi-Level (B, C, D, E, F, G)
Air flow is directed towards the face
and the floor.
Floor & Defrost
(A, C, D, E, F, G)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor and the windshield with a small
amount directed to the side window
defrosters.
Floor-Level (A, C, D, E, F, G)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
floor, with a small amount of the air
being directed to the windshield and
side window defrosters.
OKH043212N
Features of your vehicle
4
4-133
Defrost-Level (A)
Most of the air flow is directed to the
windshield with a small amount of air
directed to the side window defrosters.
Instrument panel vents
The outlet vents can be opened or
closed separately using the horizon-
tal thumbwheel. To close the vent,
rotate it left to the maximum position.
To open the vent, rotate it right to the
desired position.
Also, you can adjust the direction of
air delivery from these vents using
the vent control lever as shown.
Temperature control
The temperature will increase to the
maximum (HI) by pushing the up ( )
button (for front) or turn the knob to the
right (for rear).
OKH043214N OKH043215N
OKH043216N
OKH043217N
■ Front
■ Rear
Features of your vehicle
4-134
The temperature will decrease to the
minimum (Lo) by pushing the down
( ) button (for front) or turn the knob
to the left (for rear).
When pushing the button (for front) or
turning the knob (for rear), the tem-
perature will increase or decrease by
0.5°C/1°F. When set to the lowest
temperature setting, the air condition-
ing will operate continuously.
Adjusting the driver, passenger and
rear side temperature equally
1. Press the SYNC button to activate
SYNC mode. The passenger and
rear side temperature will be set to
the same temperature as the driv-
er side temperature.
2. Press the driver side temperature
control button. The driver, passen-
ger and rear side temperature will
be adjusted equally.
Adjusting the driver, passenger and
rear side temperature individually
• Press the SYNC button again to
operate the driver, passenger and
rear side temperature individually.
• Pressing the passenger side tem-
perature control button will auto-
matically cancel the SYNC mode.
At this time, rear side temperature
will be set to the same temperature
as the driver side.
• Turning the rear temperature con-
trol knob will automatically cancel
the SYNC mode. At this time, pas-
senger side temperature will be set
to the same temperature as the
driver side.
OKH043300N
Features of your vehicle
4
4-135
Temperature conversion
You can switch the temperature
mode from Centigrade to Fahrenheit
as follows:
While pressing the OFF button,
press the AUTO button for 3 seconds
or more.
The display will change from
Centigrade to Fahrenheit, or from
Fahrenheit to Centigrade.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, the temperature mode
display will reset to Fahrenheit.
Air intake control
This is used to select the outside
(fresh) air position or recirculated air
position.
To change the air intake control posi-
tion, push the control button.
Recirculated air position
With the recirculated air
position selected, air from
the passenger compart-
ment will be drawn through
the heating system and
heated or cooled according
to the function selected.
When driving at high
speed, the outside air may
come in to circulate the air
inside the vehicle.
To block the air from enter-
ing, press the air intake
control button for about 2
seconds. The outside air
will be blocked from coming
in for 3 minutes.
Outside (fresh) air position
With the outside (fresh) air
position selected, air
enters the vehicle from out-
side and is heated or
cooled according to the
function selected.
OKH043219N
Features of your vehicle
4-136
✽ NOTICE
Prolonged operation of the heater in
the recirculated air position (with-
out air conditioning selected) may
cause fogging of the windshield and
side windows and the air within the
passenger compartment may
become stale.
In addition, prolonged use of the air
conditioning with the recirculated
air position selected will result in
excessively dry air in the passenger
compartment.
Fan speed control
The fan speed can be set to the
desired speed by pressing the fan
speed control button(for front) or
turning the fan speed control knob
(for rear).
To change the fan speed, press the
( ) part of the button for higher
speed or press the ( ) part of the
button for lower speed. (for front)
To change the fan speed, turn the
knob to the right for higher speed, or
left for lower speed. (for rear)
To turn the fan speed control off,
press the OFF button.
OKH043221N
■ Front
■ Rear
• Continue using the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
may allow humidity to
increase inside the vehicle
which may fog the glass and
obscure visibility.
• Do not sleep in a vehicle with
the air conditioning or heating
system on. It may cause seri-
ous harm or death due to a
drop in the oxygen level
and/or body temperature.
• Continuous use of the climate
control system operation in
the recirculated air position
can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness, and loss of vehi-
cle control. Set the air intake
control to the outside (fresh)
air position as much as possi-
ble while driving.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4
4-137
Air conditioning
Press the A/C button to turn the air
conditioning system on (indicator
light will illuminate).
Press the button again to turn the air
conditioning system off.
OFF mode
• Press the front OFF button to turn
off the air climate control system.
However, you can still operate the
mode and air intake buttons as
long as the Engine Start/Stop
Button is in the ON position.
• Press the rear OFF button to turn
off the air coming out of the rear
console vent.
Climate information screen selec-
tion (if equipped)
Press the climate information screen
selection button to display climate
information on the screen.
OKH043222N
OKH043224N
OKH043223N
■ Front
■ Rear
Features of your vehicle
4-138
Rear control lock
You can activate or deactivate the
rear seat control, rear audio control
and climate control by using the
REAR LOCK button on the rear arm-
rest or “System Settings” in the AVN
(Audio, Video, and Navigation).
Detailed information for the “System
Settings” is described in a separately
supplied manual.
If the rear control button has deacti-
vated through AVN, you can reacti-
vate the rear control button only
through AVN.
System operation
Ventilation
1.Set the mode to the position.
2.Set the air intake control to the out-
side (fresh) air position.
3.Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
Heating
1.Set the mode to the position.
2.Set the air intake control to the out-
side (fresh) air position.
3.Set the temperature control to the
desired position.
4.Set the fan speed control to the
desired speed.
5.If dehumidified heating is desired,
turn the air conditioning system (if
equipped) on.
• If the windshield fogs up, set the
mode to the
or position.
Operation Tips
• To keep dust or unpleasant fumes
from entering the vehicle through
the ventilation system, temporarily
set the air intake control to the
recirculated air position. Be sure to
return the control to the fresh air
position when the irritation has
passed to keep fresh air in the
vehicle. This will help keep the driv-
er alert and comfortable.
• Air for the heating/cooling system
is drawn in through the grilles just
ahead of the windshield. Care
should be taken that these are not
blocked by leaves, snow, ice or
other obstructions.
• To prevent interior fog on the wind-
shield, set the air intake control to
the fresh air position and fan speed
to the desired position, turn on the
air conditioning system, and adjust
the temperature control to desired
temperature.
OKH033040N
Features of your vehicle
4
4-139
Air conditioning (if equipped)
All Kia Air Conditioning Systems are
filled with R-134a refrigerant.
1.Start the engine. Press the air con-
ditioning button.
2.Set the mode to the position.
3.Set the air intake control to the out-
side air or recirculated air position.
4.Adjust the fan speed control and
temperature control to maintain
maximum comfort.
Air conditioning system operation tips
• If the vehicle has been parked in
direct sunlight during hot weather,
open the windows for a short time
to let the hot air inside the vehicle
escape.
• To help reduce moisture inside of
the windows on rainy or humid
days, decrease the humidity inside
the vehicle by operating the air
conditioning system.
• During air conditioning system
operation, you may occasionally
notice a slight change in engine
speed as the air conditioning com-
pressor cycles. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
• Use the air conditioning system
every month only for a few minutes
to ensure maximum system per-
formance.
• When using the air conditioning
system, you may notice clear water
dripping (or even puddling) on the
ground under the passenger side
of the vehicle. This is a normal sys-
tem operation characteristic.
• Operating the air conditioning sys-
tem in the recirculated air position
provides maximum cooling, how-
ever, continual operation in this
mode may cause the air inside the
vehicle to become stale.
• During cooling operation, you may
occasionally notice a misty air flow
because of rapid cooling and
humid air intake. This is a normal
system operation characteristic.
Excessive A/C
When using the air conditioning
system, monitor the engine
coolant closely while driving up
hills or in heavy traffic when out-
side temperatures are high. Air
conditioning system operation
may cause engine overheating
and potential engine damage.
Continue to use the blower fan
but turn the air conditioning sys-
tem off if the engine coolant tem-
perature gauge indicates engine
overheating.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4-140
Climate control air filter
(if equipped)
The climate control air filter installed
behind the glove box filters the dust or
other pollutants that come into the
vehicle from the outside through the
heating and air conditioning system. If
dust or other pollutants accumulate in
the filter over a period of time, the air
flow from the air vents may decrease,
resulting in moisture accumulation on
the inside of the windshield even
when the outside (fresh) air position is
selected. If this happens, have the cli-
mate control air filter replaced by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
• Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is being driven in
severe conditions such as dusty or
rough roads, more frequent air
conditioner filter inspections and
changes are required.
• When the air flow rate suddenly
decreases, the system should be
checked at an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
Checking the amount of air
conditioner refrigerant and
compressor lubricant
When the amount of refrigerant is
low, the performance of the air con-
ditioning is reduced. Overfilling also
has a negative impact on the air con-
ditioning system.
Therefore, if abnormal operation is
found, have the system inspected by
an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
1LD
A5047
Outside air
Recirculated
air
Climate control
air filter
Blower
Evaporator
core
Heater core
Because the refriger-
ant is at very high
pressure, the air con-
ditioning system
should only be serv-
iced by trained and certified
technicians. It is important that
the correct type and amount of
oil and refrigerant is used, oth-
erwise damage to the vehicle
and personal injury may occur.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4
4-141
Air Conditioning refrigerant
label
❈ The actual Air Conditioning refrigerant
label in the vehicle may differ from the
illustration.
Each symbols and specification on
air conditioning refrigerant label
means as below ;
1. Classification of refrigerant
2. Amount of refrigerant
3. Classification of Compressor lubri-
cant
Refer to chapter 8 for more detail
location of air conditioning refrigerant
label.
OXM063009
■ Example
Features of your vehicle
4-142
• For maximum defrosting, set the
temperature control to the extreme
right/hot position and the fan speed
control to the highest speed.
• If warm air to the floor is desired
while defrosting or defogging, set
the mode to the floor-defrost posi-
tion.
• Before driving, clear all snow and
ice from the windshield, rear win-
dow, outside rear view mirrors, and
all side windows.
• Clear all snow and ice from the
hood and air inlet in the cowl grill to
improve heater and defroster effi-
ciency and to reduce the probabili-
ty of fogging up the inside of the
windshield.
To defog inside windshield
1.Set the fan speed to the desired
position.
2.Select desired temperature.
3.Press the defrost button ( ).
4.The air conditioning will be turned
on according to the detected ambi-
ent temperature and outside (fresh)
air position will be selected auto-
matically.
OKH043225N
WINDSHIELD DEFROSTING AND DEFOGGING
Windshield heating
Do not use the or posi-
tion during cooling operation in
extremely humid weather. The
difference between the temper-
ature of the outside air and that
of the windshield could cause
the outer surface of the wind-
shield to fog up, causing loss of
visibility. In this case, set the
mode selection knob or button
to the position and fan
speed control knob or button to
the lower speed.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4
4-143
If the air conditioning and outside
(fresh) air position are not selected
automatically, adjust the correspon-
ding button manually. If the posi-
tion is selected, lower fan speed is
adjusted to a higher fan speed.
To defrost outside windshield
1.Set the fan speed to the highest
position.
2.Set the temperature to the extreme
hot (HI) position.
3.Press the defrost button ( ).
4.The air conditioning will be turned
on according to the detected ambi-
ent temperature and outside
(fresh) air position will be selected
automatically.
If the position is selected, lower
fan speed is adjusted to a higher fan
speed.
Defogging logic
To reduce the probability of fogging
up the inside of the windshield, the
air intake or air conditioning are con-
trolled automatically according to
certain conditions such as or
position. To cancel or return the
defogging logic, do the following.
OKH043226N
Features of your vehicle
4-144
1. Turn the Engine Start/Stop Button
to the ON position.
2. Press the defroster button ( ).
3. While pressing the air conditioning
button (A/C), press the air intake
control button at least 5 times with-
in 3 seconds.
The indicator on the air intake button
blinks 3 times with 0.5 seconds of
interval. It indicates that the defog-
ging logic is canceled or returned to
the programmed status.
If the battery has been discharged or
disconnected, it resets to the defog
logic status.
Auto Defogging System
Auto Defogging reduces the proba-
bility of fogging up the inside of the
windshield by automatically sensing
the moisture of inside the windshield.
The Auto Defogging System oper-
ates when the heater or air condi-
tioning is on.
This indicator illuminates
when the Auto Defogging
System senses moisture
inside the windshield and
the Auto Defogging
System starts to operate.
If more moisture is in the vehicle, the
higher steps operate as follow. For
example if auto defogging does not
defog inside the windshield at step 1
Outside air position, it tries to defog
again at step 2 Blowing air toward
the windshield.
Step 1 :Outside air position
Step 2 :Operating the air condition-
ing
Step 3 :Blowing air toward the wind-
shield
Step 4 :Increasing air flow toward
the windshield
OKH043228N
OKH043227N
Features of your vehicle
4
4-145
If your vehicle is equipped with the
auto defogging system, it is automat-
ically activated when the conditions
are met. However, if you would like to
cancel the auto defogging system,
press the front defroster button 4
times within 2 seconds while press-
ing the AUTO button. The indicator
will blink 3 times to notify you that the
system is cancelled. To use the auto
defogging system again, follow the
procedures mentioned above.
If the battery has been disconnected
or discharged, it resets to the auto
defogging status.
✽ NOTICE
If the A/C off or recirculated air
position is manually selected while
the auto defogging system is on, the
auto defogging indicator will blink 3
times to give notice that manual
operation is canceled.
Do not remove the sensor cover
located on the upper end of the
driver side windshield glass.
Damage to the system parts
could occur and may not be cov-
ered by your vehicle warranty.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4-146
These compartments can be used to
store small items required by the
driver or passengers.
Center console storage
To open the center console storage,
pull up the lever.
Rear seat storage
To open the rear seat storage, pull up
the lever.
STORAGE COMPARTMENTS
OKH043275NOKH043231N
• To avoid possible theft, do not
leave valuables in the storage
compartments.
• Always keep the storage com-
partment covers closed while
driving. Do not attempt to
place so many items in the
storage compartment that the
storage compartment cover
cannot close securely.
CAUTION
Flammable materials
Do not store cigarette lighters,
propane cylinders, or other
flammable/explosive materials
in the vehicle. These items may
catch fire and/or explode if the
vehicle is exposed to hot tem-
peratures for extended periods.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4
4-147
Glove box
The glove box can be locked and
unlocked with the mechanical key of
the smartkey (1).
To open the glove box, push the but-
ton (2) and the glove box will auto-
matically open. Close the glove box
after use.
Sunglass holder
To open the sunglass holder, press
the cover and the holder will slowly
open. Place your sunglasses with the
lenses facing out.
To close the sunglass holder push it
up.
OKH043232N OKH043233N
To help reduce the risk of injury
in an accident or sudden stop,
always keep the glove box door
closed while driving.
WARNING
Do not keep food in the glove
box for a long time.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4-148
Seatback pocket
The seatback pocket is provided on
the back of the front passenger’s and
driver’s seatbacks.
OKH033016N
• Do not keep objects except
sunglasses inside the sun-
glass holder. Such objects
can be thrown from the holder
in the event of a sudden stop
or an accident, possibly injur-
ing the passengers in the
vehicle.
• Do not open the sunglass
holder while the vehicle is
moving. The rear view mirror
of the vehicle can be blocked
by an open sunglass holder.
• Do not put the glasses
forcibly into a sunglass holder
to prevent breakage or defor-
mation of glasses. It may
cause personal injury if you
try to open it forcibly when the
glasses are jammed in holder.
WARNING
Seatback pocket
Do not put heavy or sharp
objects in the seatback pocket.
An occupant could contact such
objects in a crash. Heavy objects
in the front passenger seatback
could also interfere with the air
bag sensing system.
WARNING
Be careful not to nip fingers
when using the pocket.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4
4-149
Map pocket
The map pocket is provided on the
doors.
OKH043292N
Be careful not to nip fingers
when using the pocket.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4-150
Cup holder
Cups or small beverage cans may be
placed in the cup holders.
Sunvisor
Use the sunvisor to shield direct light
through the front or side windows.
To use the sunvisor, pull it downward.
To use the sunvisor for the side win-
dow, pull it downward, unsnap it from
the bracket (1) and swing it to the
side (2).
To use the vanity mirror, pull down the
visor and slide the mirror cover (3).
Adjust the sunvisor extension for-
ward or backward (4).
The ticket holder (5) is provided for
holding a tollgate ticket.
INTERIOR FEATURES
OKH043236N
OKH043237N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OKH043238N
Hot liquids
• Do not place uncovered cups
of hot liquid in the cup holder
while the vehicle is in motion.
If the hot liquid spills, you
could be burned. Such a burn
to the driver could lead to loss
of control of the vehicle.
• To help reduce the risk of per-
sonal injury in the event of
sudden stop or collision, do
not place uncovered or unse-
cured bottles, glasses, cans,
etc., in the cup holder while
the vehicle is in motion.
WARNING
Keep cans or bottles out of
direct sun light and do not put
them in a vehicle that is heated
up. It may explode.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4
4-151
Power outlet
The power outlets provide power for
mobile telephones or other devices
designed to operate with the vehi-
cle's electrical systems. These
devices should draw less than 10
amps while the engine is running.
OKH043301N
OKH043239N
■ Center
■ Rear
■ Front
OKH043240N
For your safety, do not obstruct
your vision when using the sun-
visor.
WARNING
Vanity mirror lamp
If you use the vanity mirror
lamp, turn off the lamp before
returning the sunvisor to its
original position. It could result
in battery discharge and possi-
ble sunvisor damage.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4-152
Seat warmer
OKH033013N
OKH033034N
■ Rear seat (Type A)
■ Rear seat (Type B)
■ Front seat
OKH033042N
Do not put a finger or a foreign
element (pin, etc.) into a power
outlet and do not touch with a
wet hand. You may get an elec-
tric shock.
WARNING
• Use the power outlet only
when the engine is running
and remove the accessory
plug after use. Using the
accessory plug for prolonged
periods of time with the
engine off could cause the
battery to discharge.
• Only use 12V electric acces-
sories which are less than
10A in electric capacity.
• Adjust the air-conditioner or
heater to the lowest operating
level when using the power
outlet.
• Close the cover when not in
use.
• Some electronic devices can
cause electronic interference
when plugged into a vehicle’s
power outlet. These devices
may cause excessive audio
static and malfunctions in
other electronic systems or
devices used in your vehicle.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4
4-153
The seat warmer is provided to warm
the seats during cold weather. With
the engine start/stop button in the
ON position, push the switch to warm
the seat.
During mild weather or under condi-
tions where the operation of the seat
warmer is not needed, keep the
switches in the OFF position.
With the seat warmer switch in the
ON position, the heating system in
the seat turns off or on automatically
depending on the seat temperature.
• Each time you push the button, the
temperature setting of the seat is
changed as follows :
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
warmer operating, the seat warmer
will turn OFF.
• The seat warmer defaults to the
OFF position whenever the engine
start/stop button is turned on.
• You can activate or deactivate the
rear seat warmer button by using
the REAR LOCK button on the rear
armrest or “System Settings” in
AVN (Audio, Video, and Navigation).
Detailed information for “System
Settings” is described in a separate-
ly supplied manual. If the REAR
LOCK button activated (LED “ON”),
you can not activate the rear seat
warmer button.
After deactivating (LED “OFF”) the
REAR LOCK button, you can acti-
vate the rear seat warmer button.
If the REAR LOCK button has acti-
vated through AVN, you can deac-
tivate the REAR LOCK button only
through AVN.
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
Features of your vehicle
4-154
Air ventilation seat (if equipped)
The air ventilation is provided to cool
the seats during hot weather by
blowing air through small vent holes
on the surface of the seats and seat-
backs. While the engine is running,
press the switch to cool the seat.
OKH033014N
OKH033043N
■ Front seat
■ Rear seat
Seat damage
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, ben-
zene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the
surface of the heater or seats.
• To prevent overheating the
seat warmer, do not place any-
thing on the seats that insu-
lates against heat, such as
blankets, cushions or seat
covers on the seats while the
seat warmer is in operation.
• Do not place heavy or sharp
objects on the seat. Those
things may damage the seat
warmer system.
CAUTION
Seat warmer burns
Passengers should use extreme
caution when using seat warm-
ers due to the possibility of
excess heating or burns. The
seat warmer may cause burns
even at low temperatures, espe-
cially if used for long periods of
time. The occupants must be
able to feel if the seat is becom-
ing too warm and to turn the
seat warmer off.
In particular, the driver must
exercise extreme care for the
following types of passengers:
1. Infants, children, elderly or
disabled persons, or hospital
outpatients
2. Persons with sensitive skin
or those that burn easily
3. Fatigued individuals
4. Intoxicated individuals
5. Individuals taking medication
that can cause drowsiness or
sleepiness (sleeping pills,
cold tablets, etc.)
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4
4-155
When the operation of the air ventila-
tion is not needed, keep the switches
in the OFF position.
• Each time you press the switch,
the airflow will change as follows:
• When pressing the switch for more
than 1.5 seconds with the seat
cooler operating, the seat cooler
will turn OFF.
• When the air ventilation seat is
turned on, the seat may get cooler
after about 5 minutes.
• Because the air ventilation uses
the air in the vehicle, cooling effi-
ciency depends on the tempera-
ture of the air. In order to improve
cooling efficiency, use the air con-
ditioning system together.
• The air ventilation seat defaults to
the OFF position whenever the
Engine Start/Stop Button is turned
to the ON position.
• You can activate or deactivate the
rear air ventilation button by using
the REAR LOCK button on the rear
armrest or “System Settings” in
AVN (Audio, Video, and
Navigation). Detailed information
for “System Settings” is described
in a separately supplied manual. If
the REAR LOCK button activated
(LED “ON”), you can not activate
the rear air ventilation button.
After deactivating (LED “OFF”) the
REAR LOCK button, you can acti-
vate the rear air ventilation button.
If the REAR LOCK button has acti-
vated through AVN, you can deacti-
vate the REAR LOCK button only
through AVN.
OFF→HIGH( )→MIDDLE( )→LOW( )
→
• The air ventilation seat is a
supplementary cooling/heat-
ing system. Use the air venti-
lation seat when the climate
control system is on. Using
the air ventilation seat for pro-
longed periods of time with
the climate control system off
could cause the air ventilation
seat performance to impair.
• When cleaning the seats, do
not use an organic solvent
such as paint thinner, ben-
zene, alcohol and gasoline.
Doing so may damage the
surface of the seats.
• Do not spill liquid such as
water or beverages on the
surface of the front seats and
seatbacks, or the air vent
holes may be blocked and
prevented from working prop-
erly.
(Continued)
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4-156
Clock
Whenever the battery terminals or
related fuses are disconnected, you
must reset the time.
(Continued)
• Do not place materials such
as plastic bags or newspa-
pers under the seats. The air
vent may not work properly as
the air intake can be blocked.
• When the air vent does not
operate, restart the vehicle. If
there is no change, have your
vehicle inspected by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Air intake
There is an air intake for the
rear air ventilation at the lower
part of the rear center seatback.
If the air intake is blocked, effi-
ciency of the rear air ventilation
will be lower. Be careful not to
block the air intake.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4
4-157
You can set the clock by using the
AVN (Audio or Navigation)
For the details, refer to the AVN man-
ual.
Clothes hanger (if equipped)
To use the hanger, pull down the
upper portion of hanger.
Floor mat anchor(s)
When using a floor mat on the floor
carpet, make sure it attaches to the
floor mat anchor(s) in your vehicle.
This keeps the floor mat from sliding
forward.
OKH043511N
OKH043510N
OKH043241N
Do not adjust the clock while
driving. You may lose your
steering control and cause an
accident that results in severe
personal injury or death.
WARNING
Hanging colothing
Do not hang heavy clothes, since
those may damage the hook.
CAUTION
After market floor mat
Do not install aftermarket floor
mats that are not capable of
being securely attached to the
vehicle's floor mat anchors.
Unsecured floor mats can inter-
fere with pedal operation.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4-158
The following must be observed
when installing ANY floor mat in the
vehicle.
• Ensure that the floor mats are
securely attached to the vehicle's
floor mat anchor(s) before driving
the vehicle.
• Do not use ANY floor mat that can-
not be firmly attached to the vehi-
cle's floor mat anchors.
• Do not stack floor mats on top of
one another (e.g. ,all-weather rub-
ber mat on top of a carpeted floor
mat). Only a single floor mat should
be installed in each position.
IMPORTANT - Your vehicle was
manufactured with driver's side floor
mat anchors that are designed to
securely hold the floor mat in place.
To avoid any interference with pedal
operation, Kia recommends that only
the Kia floor mat designed for use in
your vehicle be installed.
Rear vanity mirror (if equipped)
To use the rear vanity mirror, press
the cover and it will slowly open and
the mirror lamp will turn on.
Bag hanger (if equipped)
Pull the strap (1) to hang a bag on
the hook (2).
When you are not using the hook,
fold the hook.
OKH043289N OKH043242N
Close the mirror cover securely.
If the mirror cover is not closed,
the lamp will stay on and could
result in battery discharge and
possible mirror damage.
CAUTION
Do not hang heavy things, since
those may damage the hook.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4
4-159
Luggage net (holder)
(if equipped)
To keep items from shifting in the
cargo area, you can use the holders
located in the cargo area to attach
the luggage net.
Rear curtain (if equipped)
OKH043243N
OKH043244N
OKH043267N
■ Rear
■ Front
OKH043269N
To prevent damage to the goods
or the vehicle, care should be
taken when carrying fragile or
bulky objects in the luggage
compartment.
CAUTION
To avoid eye injury, DO NOT
overstretch the luggage net.
ALWAYS keep your face and
body out of the luggage net’s
recoil path. DO NOT use the lug-
gage net when the strap has vis-
ible signs of wear or damage.
WARNING
Features of your vehicle
4-160
To raise the rear curtain, depress the
button. To lower the rear curtain,
depress the button again.
The rear curtain will be lowered auto-
matically when you shift the shift
lever into R (Reverse) and raised
automatically when you shift the shift
lever from R (Reverse) into P (Park).
After the rear curtain is lowered by
shifting the shift lever into R
(Reverse), if you drive more than
12mph (20km/h) with the shift lever
in D (Drive), the rear curtain will be
raised automatically.
You can activate or deactivate the
rear curtain button on the rear arm-
rest by using the REAR LOCK button
on the rear armrest or “System
Settings” in AVN (Audio, Video, and
Navigation).
Detailed information for “System
Settings” is described in a separately
supplied manual.
If the REAR LOCK button activated
(LED “ON”), you can not activate the
rear curtain button.
After deactivating (LED “OFF”) the
REAR LOCK button, you can acti-
vate the rear curtain button.
If the REAR LOCK button has acti-
vated through AVN, you can deacti-
vate the REAR LOCK button only
through AVN.
Side curtain (if equipped)
To use the side curtain:
1.Lift the curtain by the hook (1).
2.Hang the curtain on both sides of
the hook.
3.Pull the curtain backward by the
hook (2).
4.Hang the curtain on the hook.
OKH043268N
Do not lower or raise the rear
curtain by hand. It could cause
motor failure.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4
4-161
Aux, USB and iPod
®
port
If your vehicle has an aux and/or
USB(universal serial bus) port or
iPod
®
port, you can use an aux port
to connect audio devices and a USB
port to plug in a USB, and an iPod
®
port to plug in an iPod
®
.
✽ NOTICE
When using a portable audio device
connected to the power outlet, noise
may occur during playback. If this
happens, use the power source of the
portable audio device.
* iPod
®
is a Registered trademark of
Apple Inc.
USB charger
The USB charger is designed to
recharge batteries of small size elec-
trical devices using a USB cable. The
electrical devices can be recharged
when the Engine Start/Stop button is
in ACC/ON/START position.
The battery charging state may be
monitored on the electrical device.
Disconnect the USB cable from the
USB port after use.
MULTIMEDIA SYSTEM
OKH043302N
OKH043248N
OKH043276N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Features of your vehicle
4-162
• Some devices are not supported
for fast charging but will be
charged with normal speed.
• Use the USB charger when the
engine is running to prevent bat-
tery discharge.
• Only devices that fits the USB port
can be used.
• The USB charger can be used only
for battery charging purposes.
• Battery chargers cannot be
charged.
Audio / Video / Navigation sys-
tem (AVN)
Detailed information for the AVN sys-
tem is described in a separately sup-
plied manual.
Driver Information System
(DIS)
Detailed information for the DIS sys-
tem is described in a separately sup-
plied manual.
OKH043271NOKH043270N
Features of your vehicle
4
4-163
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology hands-free
You can use the phone wirelessly by
using the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless
Technology.
1. Call / Answer lever
2. Call end lever
3. Microphone
Detailed information for the
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology
hands-free is described in the manu-
al supplied separately.
The
Bluetooth
®
word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by
Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of
such marks by Kia is under license.
Other trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
A compatible
Bluetooth
®
enabled cell
phone is required to use
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology.
Antenna
When the radio power switch is
turned on while the Engine
Start/Stop Button is in either the
“ON” or “ACC” position, your car will
receive both AM and FM broadcast
signals through the antenna in the
rear window glass.
OKH043249N
OKH043303N
OKH043290N
Features of your vehicle
4-164
Shark fin antenna (if equipped)
The shark fin antenna will receive the
transmit data.
Steering wheel audio control
The steering wheel audio control but-
ton is installed to promote safe driving.
OKH043246N
• Do not clean the inside of the
rear window glass with a clean-
er or use a scraper to remove
foreign deposits as this may
cause damage to the antenna
elements.
• Avoid adding metallic coatings
such as Ni, Cd, and so on. These
can disturb receiving AM and
FM broadcast signals.
• To prevent damage to the rear
glass antenna, never use sharp
instruments or window cleaners
containing abrasives to clean
the window. Clean the inside
surface of the rear glass window
with a piece of soft cloth.
• When putting a sticker on the
inside surface of the rear win-
dow, be careful not to damage to
the rear glass antenna.
• Do not put sharp instruments
nearby the rear glass antenna.
• Tinted rear window may affect
the proper functioning of the
antenna.
CAUTION
Do not operate audio remote
control buttons simultaneously.
CAUTION
Features of your vehicle
4
4-165
VOLUME (VOL + / VOL -) (1)
• Press the up button (VOL+) to
increase volume.
• Press the down button (VOL-) to
decrease volume.
SEEK/PRESET ( / ) (2)
The SEEK/PRESET button has dif-
ferent functions based on the system
mode. For the following functions the
button should be pressed for 0.8 sec-
onds or more.
RADIO mode
It will function as the AUTO SEEK
select button.
CD/USB/iPod mode
It will function as the FF/REW button.
If the SEEK/PRESET button is
pressed for less than 0.8 seconds, it
will work as follows in each mode.
RADIO mode
It will function as the PRESET STA-
TION buttons.
CD/USB/iPod mode
It will function as TRACK UP/DOWN
button.
MODE (3)
Press the MODE button to select
Radio, DISC, USB or AUX.
When the AV is OFF and the MODE
button is pressed for less than 0.8
second, the AV will turn on.
When the AV is ON and the MODE
button is press for more than 0.8 sec-
ond, the AV will turn off.
MUTE (4)
• Move the MUTE lever up to cancel
the sound.
• Move the MUTE lever up again to
activate the sound.
Detailed information is described in a
separately supplied manual.
Driving your vehicle
5
Driving your vehicle
5
Driving your vehicle
Before driving......................................................5-4
• Before entering vehicle............................................5-4
• Necessary inspections ..........................................5-4
• Before starting ........................................................5-4
Engine START/STOP button...............................5-6
• Illuminated ENGINE START/STOP button ..............5-6
• ENGINE START/STOP button position ...................5-6
Starting the engine .............................................5-9
• Starting the engine with a smart key ......................5-9
Automatic transmission (shift by cable) ............5-11
• Automatic transmission operation .........................5-11
• Good driving practices ..........................................5-15
Automatic transmission (shift by wire) ..............5-16
• Automatic transmission operation .........................5-16
• Good driving practices ..........................................5-26
Brake system ....................................................5-27
• Power brakes ......................................................5-27
• Electric parking brake (EPB).................................5-30
• AUTO HOLD..........................................................5-36
• Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ...............................5-40
• Electronic stability control (ESC)...........................5-42
• Hill-start assist control (HAC)................................5-46
• Good braking practices .........................................5-46
Advanced Vehicle Safety Management (AVSM).5-48
Drive mode integrated control system ..............5-52
• DRIVE mode / SNOW mode.................................5-52
Cruise control system .......................................5-55
• Cruise control switch .............................................5-56
• To set cruise control speed ...................................5-56
• To increase cruise control set speed ....................5-57
• To decrease the cruising speed ............................5-57
• To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on ...........................................5-57
• To cancel cruise control, do one of the following ..5-58
• To resume cruising speed at more than
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) ........................5-58
• To turn cruise control off, do one of the following ..5-59
Advanced Smart Cruise Control System..........5-60
• Speed setting (ASCC)...........................................5-61
• Vehicle to vehicle distance setting (ASCC)...........5-65
• To convert to cruise control mode.........................5-69
• Limitations of the system ......................................5-69
Lane Departure Warning System (LDWS)........5-75
• Warning indicator .................................................5-77
• The LDWS does not operate when.......................5-77
5
Blind Spot Detection System (BSD) .................5-79
• BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist) .................................5-80
• RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) ..............................5-83
• Non-operating condition ........................................5-85
• Pursuant to Code of Federal Regulations, Title 47,
Part 15 ("FCC Rules").........................................5-86
Economical operation .......................................5-87
Special driving conditions .................................5-89
• Hazardous driving conditions................................5-89
• Rocking the vehicle ...............................................5-89
• Smooth cornering..................................................5-90
• Driving at night ......................................................5-90
• Driving in the rain ..................................................5-91
• Driving in flooded areas ........................................5-91
• Driving off-road......................................................5-92
• Highway driving .....................................................5-92
Winter driving....................................................5-93
• Snowy or Icy conditions ........................................5-93
• Use high quality ethylene glycol coolant ...............5-95
• Check battery and cables .....................................5-95
• Change to "winter weight" oil if necessary............5-96
• Check spark plugs and ignition system ................5-96
• To keep locks from freezing ..................................5-96
• Use approved window washer anti-freeze in system .5-96
• Don't let your parking brake freeze .......................5-96
• Don't let ice and snow accumulate underneath ....5-96
• Carry emergency equipment.................................5-97
Trailer Towing ....................................................5-97
Vehicle load limit ...............................................5-98
• Tire and loading information label.........................5-98
• Certification label.................................................5-101
Vehicle weight.................................................5-103
5
Driving your vehicle
5
5-3
Be sure the exhaust system
does not leak.
The exhaust system should be
checked whenever the vehicle is
raised to change the oil or for any
other purpose. If you
hear a change in the sound of the
exhaust or if you drive over some-
thing that strikes the underneath side
of the vehicle, have the exhaust sys-
tem checked as soon as possible by
an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Engine exhaust
Do not inhale exhaust fumes or
leave your engine running in an
enclosed area for a prolonged
time.
Exhaust fumes contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless, odorless
gas that can cause unconscious-
ness and death by asphyxiation.
WARNING
Open trunk
Do not drive with the trunk
open.
Poisonous exhaust gases can
enter the passenger compart-
ment. If you must drive with the
trunk open proceed as follows:
1.Close all windows.
2.Open side vents.
3.Set the air intake control at
"Fresh", the air flow control at
"Floor" or "Face" and the fan
at the highest speed.
WARNING
California proposition 65
Engine exhaust and a wide vari-
ety of automobile components
and parts, including compo-
nents found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or
emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects and repro-
ductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain or emit chem-
icals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm.
WARNING
5-4
Driving your vehicle
Before entering vehicle
• Be sure that all windows, outside
mirror(s), and outside lights are
clean.
• Check the condition of the tires.
• Check under the vehicle for any
sign of leaks.
• Be sure there are no obstacles
behind you if you intend to back up.
Necessary inspections
Fluid levels, such as engine oil,
engine coolant, brake fluid, and
washer fluid should be checked on a
regular basis, with the exact interval
depending on the fluid. Further
details are provided in Section 7,
“Maintenance”.
Before starting
• Close and lock all doors.
• Position the seat so that all con-
trols are easily reached.
• Buckle your seat belt.
• Adjust the inside and outside
rearview mirrors.
• Be sure that all lights work.
• Check all gauges.
• Check the operation of warning
lights when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
• Release the parking brake and
make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
For safe operation, be sure you are
familiar with your vehicle and its
equipment.
BEFORE DRIVING
Distracted driving
Focus on the road while driving.
The driver's primary responsi-
bility is in the safe and legal
operation of the vehicle. Use of
any hand held devices, other
equipment or vehicle systems
that distract the driver should
not be used during vehicle
operation.
WARNING
Check surrounding
Always check the surrounding
areas near your vehicle for peo-
ple, especially children, before
putting a vehicle into D (Drive)
or R (Reverse).
WARNING
Driving your vehicle
5
5-5
Driving while intoxicated
Do not drive while intoxicated.
Drinking and driving is danger-
ous. Even a small amount of
alcohol will affect your reflexes,
perceptions and judgment.
Driving while under the influ-
ence of drugs is as dangerous
as or more dangerous than driv-
ing drunk.
WARNING
Loose object
Securely store items in your
vehicle. When you make a sud-
den stop or turn the steering
wheel rapidly, loose objects
may drop on the floor and it
could interfere with the opera-
tion of the foot pedals, possibly
causing an accident.
WARNING
Fire risk
When you intend to park or stop
the vehicle with the engine on,
be careful not to depress the
accelerator pedal for a long
period of time. It may overheat
the engine or exhaust system
and cause a fire.
WARNING
5-6
Driving your vehicle
Illuminated ENGINE
START/STOP button
Whenever the front door is opened,
the ENGINE START/STOP button
will illuminate for your convenience.
The light will go off after about 30
seconds after the door is closed.
ENGINE START/STOP button
position
OFF
To turn off the engine (START/STOP
position) or vehicle power (ON posi-
tion), press the ENGINE START/STOP
button with the shift lever in the P
(Park) position. When you press the
ENGINE START/STOP button without
the shift lever in the P (Park) position,
the ENGINE START/STOP button will
not change to the OFF position but to
the ACC position.
In an emergency situation while the
vehicle is in motion, you are able to
turn the engine off and to the ACC
position by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for more than 2
seconds or 3 times successively within
3 seconds. If the vehicle is still moving,
you can restart the engine without
depressing the brake pedal by press-
ing the ENGINE START/STOP button
with the shift lever in the N (Neutral)
position.
ENGINE START/STOP BUTTON
OKH053001N
White
Driving your vehicle
5
5-7
ACC(Accessory)
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the OFF position
without depressing the brake pedal.
The steering wheel unlocks and
electrical accessories are opera-
tional.
If the ENGINE START/STOP button
is in the ACC position for more than
1 hour, the button is turned off auto-
matically to prevent battery dis-
charge.
ON
Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while it is in the ACC position
without depressing the brake pedal.
The warning lights can be checked
before the engine is started. Do not
leave the ENGINE START/STOP
button in the ON position for a long
time. The battery may discharge,
because the engine is not running.
START/RUN
To start the engine, depress the
brake pedal and press the ENGINE
START/STOP button with the shift
lever in the P (Park) or the N
(Neutral) position. For your safety,
start the engine with the shift lever in
the P (Park) position.
If you press the ENGINE
START/STOP button without
depressing the brake pedal, the
engine will not start and the button
will change as follows:
OFF ➔ ACC ➔ ON ➔ OFF
Orange
Red
Not illuminated
5-8
Driving your vehicle
If you leave the ENGINE START/
STOP button in the ACC or ON posi-
tion for a long time, the battery will
discharge.
Starting vehicle
Never press the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
vehicle is in motion. This would
result in loss of directional con-
trol and braking function, which
could cause an accident.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle
5
5-9
Starting the engine with a
smart key
1.Carry the smart key or leave it
inside the vehicle.
2.Make sure the parking brake is
firmly applied
3.Place the transaxle shift lever in P
(Park).
4.Press the ENGINE START/STOP
button while depressing the brake
pedal.
5.In extremely cold weather (below
0°F / -18°C) or after the vehicle has
not been operated for several days,
let the engine warm up without
depressing the accelerator.
Whether the engine is cold or warm,
it should be started without depress-
ing the accelerator.
• Even if the smart key is in the vehi-
cle, but is far away from you, the
engine may not start.
• When the ENGINE START/STOP
button is in the ACC position or
above, if any door is opened, the
system checks for the smart key. If
the smart key is not in the vehi-
cle,the “ ” indicator will blink or
the warning "Key not in vehicle" will
illuminate on the LCD display. And
if all doors are closed, the chime
will sound for 5 seconds. The indi-
cator or warning will turn off while
the vehicle is moving. Always have
the smart key with you.
The engine will start only when the
smart key is in the vehicle.
STARTING THE ENGINE
Proper footwear
Always wear appropriate shoes
when operating your vehicle.
Unsuitable shoes (high heels, ski
boots, sandals, etc.) may inter-
fere with your ability to use the
brake and accelerator pedals.
WARNING
5-10
Driving your vehicle
• If the battery is weak or the smart
key does not work correctly, you
can start the engine by pressing
the engine start/stop button with
the smart key.
The side with the lock button
should contact the engine
start/stop button directly.
When you press the engine
start/stop button directly with the
smart key, the smart key should
contact the button at a right angle.
• When the stop lamp fuse is blown,
you can't start the engine normally.
Replace the fuse with a new one. If
it is not possible, you can start the
engine by pressing the ENGINE
START/STOP button for 10 sec-
onds while it is in the ACC position.
The engine can start without
depressing the brake pedal. But for
your safety always depress the
brake pedal before starting the
engine.
Do not press the ENGINE START/
STOP button for more than 10 sec-
onds except when the stop lamp fuse
is blown.
OKH053003
Unintended vehicle move-
ment
Never leave the smart key in the
vehicle with children or vehicle
occupants who are unfamiliar
with the vehicle operation.
Pushing the ENGINE
START/STOP button while the
smart key is in the vehicle may
result in unintended engine
activation and/or unintended
vehicle movement.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle
5
5-11
Automatic transmission opera-
tion
The automatic transmission has 8
forward speeds and one reverse
speed. The individual speeds are
selected automatically, depending on
the position of the shift lever.
✽ NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle
or if the battery has been discon-
nected, may be somewhat abrupt.
This is a normal condition, and the
shifting sequence will adjust after
shifts are cycled a few times by the
TCM (Transaxle Control Module) or
PCM (Powertrain Control Module).
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (SHIFT BY CABLE)
OKH053007N
+
+
(
(
U
U
P
P
)
)
-
-
(
(
D
D
O
O
W
W
N
N
)
)
Lock release
button
To shift, depress the brake pedal and press the button.
The shift lever can be shifted freely.
Press the button when shifting.
5-12
Driving your vehicle
For smooth operation, depress the
brake pedal when shifting from N
(Neutral) to a forward or reverse
gear.
When stopped on an incline, do not
hold the vehicle with engine power.
Use the service brake or the parking
brake.
Transmission ranges
The indicator in the instrument clus-
ter displays the shift lever position
when the Engine Start/Stop Button is
in the ON position.
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). This
position locks the transmission and
prevents the drive wheels from rotat-
ing.
Shifting into P (Park) while the vehi-
cle is in motion will cause the drive
wheels to lock which will cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.
Transmission
To avoid damage to your trans-
mission, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the
brakes on. The transmission
may be damaged if you shift
into P (Park) while the vehicle is
in motion.
CAUTION
Driving your vehicle
5
5-13
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transmission will auto-
matically shift through a 8-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or climbing grades,
depress the accelerator fully, at
which time the transmission will
automatically downshift to the next
lower gear.
Manual mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, sports mode is selected by
pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range opera-
tion, push the shift lever back into the
main gate.
In manual mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward once
to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
OKH053008N
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
Manual mode
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into or out of R
(Reverse); you may damage the
transmission if you shift into R
(Reverse) while the vehicle is in
motion, except as explained in
“Rocking the vehicle” in this
section.
CAUTION
5-14
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• In manual mode, the driver must
execute upshifts in accordance
with road conditions, taking care
to keep the engine speed below the
red zone.
• In manual mode, only the 8 for-
ward gears can be selected. To
reverse or park the vehicle, move
the shift lever to the R (Reverse)
or P (Park) position as required.
• In manual mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the
vehicle slows down. When the
vehicle stops, 1st gear is automati-
cally selected.
• In manual mode, when the engine
rpm approaches the red zone shift
points are varied to upshift auto-
matically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety,
the system may not execute cer-
tain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into
the +(up) position. This causes the
transmission to shift into the 2nd
gear which is better for smooth
driving on a slippery road. Push
the shift lever to the -(down) side
to shift back to the 1st gear.
Shift lock system
For your safety, the automatic trans-
mission has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transmis-
sion from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transmission from P
(Park) into R (Reverse):
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or set the Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON posi-
tion.
3. Move the shift lever.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, a
chattering noise near the shift lever
may be heard. This is a normal con-
dition.
Shifting from park
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to help avoid
inadvertent motion of the vehicle.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle
5
5-15
Shift-lock override
If the shift lever cannot be moved
from the P (Park) or N (Neutral) posi-
tion into the R (Reverse) position
with the brake pedal depressed, con-
tinue depressing the brake, then do
the following:
1.Carefully remove the cap (1) cov-
ering the shift-lock access hole.
2.Insert a screwdriver into the
access hole and press down on
the screwdriver.
3.Move the shift lever.
4.Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer imme-
diately.
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the
transaxle in P (Park) to keep the
vehicle from moving.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D
(Drive). Select the appropriate gear
depending on load weight and steep-
ness of the grade, and release the
parking brake. Depress the accelera-
tor gradually while releasing the
service brakes.
OKH053009N
5-16
Driving your vehicle
Automatic transmission opera-
tion
The automatic transmission has 8
forward speeds and one reverse
speed. The individual speeds are
selected automatically, depending on
the position of the shift lever.
✽ NOTICE
The first few shifts on a new vehicle,
if the battery has been disconnected,
may be somewhat abrupt. This is a
normal condition, and the shifting
sequence will adjust after shifts are
cycled a few times by the TCM
(Transmission Control Module) or
PCM (Powertrain Control Module).
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION (SHIFT BY WIRE)
OKH053010N
UNLOCK
button
❈ When you shift the transmission, depress the brake pedal with pressing [UNLOCK] button.
Driving your vehicle
5
5-17
For smooth operation, depress the
brake pedal when shifting from N
(Neutral) to a forward or reverse
gear.
When stopped on an incline, do not
hold the vehicle with engine power.
Use the service brake or the parking
brake.
Transmission ranges
The indicator in the instrument clus-
ter and shift lever displays the shift
lever position when the Engine
Start/Stop Button is in the OFF/
ACC/ON position.
Transmission
To avoid damage to your trans-
mission, do not accelerate the
engine in R (Reverse) or any for-
ward gear position with the
brakes on. The transmission
may be damaged if you shift
into P (Park) while the vehicle is
in motion.
CAUTION
5-18
Driving your vehicle
P (Park)
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into P (Park). This
position locks the transmission and
prevents the drive wheels from rotat-
ing.
To shift the gear from [R], [N], [D] or
[M] to [P], press the [P] button on the
shift lever.
If you turn off the engine in [D], [R] or
[M], the shifting automatically
changes to [P].
If you press the [P] button when the
shifting is on [M] or if you turn the
engine off when the shifting is on [M],
the shift lever is automatically moved
to right side and the shifting is
changed to [P].
When the shift lever is automatically
moved to right side, if you hold the
shift lever by force, the warning mes-
sage will be illuminated in cluster.
Move the shift lever to right side
manually.
When you park the vehicle, press the
[P] button of shift lever with applying
brake pedal and apply the parking
brake.
Shifting into P (Park) while the vehi-
cle is in motion will cause the drive
wheels to lock which will cause you
to lose control of the vehicle.
R (Reverse)
Use this position to drive the vehicle
backward.
To shift the gear to [R] press the
[UNLOCK] button of shift lever with
depressing brake pedal and move
the shift lever forward.
OKH053011N
OKH053013N
OKH053014N
Driving your vehicle
5
5-19
N (Neutral)
The wheels and transmission are not
engaged. The vehicle will roll freely
even on the slightest incline unless
the parking brake or service brakes
are applied.
In neutral range if you turn off the
engine, the range will be on [N] and
the engine start/stop button position
will be on ACC.
To turn off engine :
1.Press the engine start/stop button
again to the ON position.
2.Press the [P] button on the shift
lever.
3.Press the engine start/stop button
again, the engine start/stop button
will change to the OFF position.
However, when you open the door
with the shift lever in N (Neutral) and
the engine start/stop button in the
ACC position, the shift lever will auto-
matically move to P (Park) and the
engine start/stop button will change
to the OFF position.
OKH053015N
Always come to a complete
stop before shifting into or out
of R (Reverse); you may dam-
age the transmission if you shift
into R (Reverse) while the vehi-
cle is in motion, except as
explained in “Rocking the vehi-
cle” in this section.
CAUTION
5-20
Driving your vehicle
D (Drive)
This is the normal forward driving
position. The transmission will auto-
matically shift through a 8-gear
sequence, providing the best fuel
economy and power.
For extra power when passing anoth-
er vehicle or climbing grades,
depress the accelerator fully, at
which time the transmission will
automatically downshift to the next
lower gear.
To shift into [D], depress the brake
pedal and press the [UNLOCK] but-
ton of shift lever. And then move the
shift lever to backward.
To shift into [D], from [N] you must
depress the brake pedal.
✽ NOTICE
Always come to a complete stop
before shifting into D (Drive).
Manual mode
Whether the vehicle is stationary or
in motion, manual mode is selected
by pushing the shift lever from the D
(Drive) position into the manual gate.
To return to D (Drive) range opera-
tion, push the shift lever back into the
main gate.
In manual mode, moving the shift
lever backwards and forwards will
allow you to make gearshifts rapidly.
Up (+) : Push the lever forward
once to shift up one gear.
Down (-) : Pull the lever backwards
once to shift down one
gear.
OKH053018N
+ (UP)
- (DOWN)
Manual mode
Driving your vehicle
5
5-21
✽ NOTICE
• In manual mode, the driver must
execute upshifts in accordance
with road conditions, taking care
to keep the engine speed below the
red zone.
• In manual mode, only the 8 for-
ward gears can be selected. To
reverse or park the vehicle, move
the shift lever to the R (Reverse)
or P (Park) position as required.
• In manual mode, downshifts are
made automatically when the
vehicle slows down. When the
vehicle stops, 1st gear is automati-
cally selected.
• In manual mode, when the engine
rpm approaches the red zone shift
points are varied to upshift auto-
matically.
• To maintain the required levels of
vehicle performance and safety,
the system may not execute cer-
tain gearshifts when the shift lever
is operated.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When driving on a slippery road,
push the shift lever forward into
the +(up) position. This causes the
transmission to shift into the 2nd
gear which is better for smooth
driving on a slippery road. Push
the shift lever to the -(down) side
to shift back to the 1st gear.
Shift lock system (if equipped)
For your safety, the automatic trans-
mission has a shift lock system
which prevents shifting the transmis-
sion from P (Park) into R (Reverse)
unless the brake pedal is depressed.
To shift the transmission from P
(Park) into R (Reverse) or D (Drive) :
1. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
2. Start the engine or turn the Engine
Start / Stop Button to the ON posi-
tion.
3. Move the shift lever to R (Reverse) or
D (Drive) with pressing [UNLOCK]
button.
If the brake pedal is repeatedly
depressed and released with the
shift lever in the P (Park) position, a
chattering noise near the shift lever
may be heard. This is a normal con-
dition.
5-22
Driving your vehicle
■
When the battery is dis-
charged:
When the battery is discharged, the
automatic transmission (shift by wire)
is not shifted.
In emergency, if you want to shift into
[N], follow actions
You can shift into [N] by using the
driver if the jump starting is impossi-
ble to do.
1) Open the storage cover.
2) Remove the rubber on bottom of
storage box.
3) Insert the driver (-) to service hole
as direction of clockwise 10 times.
The shifting is changed to [N]
from [P] position. If you want to
shift to [P] position, turn the driver
counter-clockwise.
OKH053045N
Shifting from park
Always fully depress the brake
pedal before and while shifting
out of the P (Park) position into
another position to help avoid
inadvertent motion of the vehicle.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle
5
5-23
1.If the transmission is not operated
as normal, the warning will be illu-
minated. Have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
2.If the shift lever has some problem
with main system, the warning will
be illuminated. Have your vehicle
inspected by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
OKH053020N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH053019N
■ Type A ■ Type B
If the electric parking brake is
not released, we recommend
that the vehicle is towed as flat-
bed towing.
CAUTION
5-24
Driving your vehicle
3.If the shifting condition is not
matched by high engine RPM or
high vehicle speed, the warning
will be illuminated. When you
reduce the engine RPM or vehicle
speed, the shifting will be operat-
ed.
4.When you shift the transmission, if
you do not depress the brake
pedal, the warning will be illuminat-
ed.
5.When you shift into [P], if the vehi-
cle speed is high, warning will be
illuminated. Stop the vehicle at
safe area and shift into [P].
OKH053023N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH053022N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH053021N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
5
5-25
6.When the transmission is fixed on
[M], the warning will be illuminated.
7.While stopping in [D], [R] and [M],
when you get off the vehicle, the
warning will be illuminated for your
safety and the shifting is automati-
cally changed to [P].
If you do not press [UNLOCK] but-
ton, the warning will be illuminated.
OKH053102N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH053024N
■ Type A ■ Type B
OKH053025N
■ Type A ■ Type B
5-26
Driving your vehicle
Good driving practices
• Never move the shift lever from P
(Park) or N (Neutral) to any other
position with the accelerator pedal
depressed.
• Never move the shift lever into P
(Park) when the vehicle is in
motion.
• Be sure the car is completely
stopped before you attempt to shift
into R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• Do not "ride" the brakes. This can
cause them to overheat and mal-
function. Instead, when you are
driving down a long hill, slow down
and shift to a lower gear. When you
do this, engine braking will help
slow the car.
• Slow down before shifting to a
lower gear. Otherwise, the lower
gear may not be engaged.
• Always use the parking brake. Do
not depend on placing the trans-
mission in P (Park) to keep the car
from moving.
• Optimum vehicle performance and
economy is obtained by smoothly
depressing and releasing the
accelerator pedal.
Moving up a steep grade from a
standing start
To move up a steep grade from a
standing start, depress the brake
pedal, shift the shift lever to D (Drive)
or [1st] gear of [M] mode. Select the
appropriate gear depending on load
weight and steepness of the grade,
and release the parking brake.
Depress the accelerator gradually
while releasing the service brakes.
Driving your vehicle
5
5-27
Power brakes
Your vehicle has power-assisted
brakes that adjust automatically
through normal usage.
In the event that the power-assisted
brakes lose power because of a
stalled engine or some other reason,
you can still stop your vehicle by
applying greater force to the brake
pedal than you normally would. The
stopping distance, however, will be
longer.
When the engine is not running, the
reserve brake power is partially
depleted each time the brake pedal
is applied. Do not pump the brake
pedal when the power assist has
been interrupted.
Pump the brake pedal only when
necessary to maintain steering con-
trol on slippery surfaces.
Wet brakes may impair the vehicle’s
ability to safely slow down; the vehi-
cle may also pull to one side when
the brakes are applied. Applying the
brakes lightly will indicate whether
they have been affected in this way.
To dry the brakes, apply them lightly
while maintaining a safe forward
speed until brake performance
returns to normal.
Always, confirm the position of the
brake and accelerator pedal before
driving. If you don’t check the posi-
tion of the accelerator and brake
pedal before driving, you may
depress the accelerator instead of
the brake pedal. It may cause a seri-
ous accident.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Brake pedal
Do not drive with your foot rest-
ing on the brake pedal. This will
create abnormally high brake
temperatures which can cause
excessive brake lining and pad
wear.
CAUTION
Steep hill braking
Avoid continuous application of
the brakes when descending a
long or steep hill by shifting to a
lower gear. Continuous brake
application will cause the
brakes to overheat and could
result in a temporary loss of
braking performance.
WARNING
In the event of brake failure
If service brakes fail to operate while
the vehicle is in motion, you can
make an emergency stop with the
parking brake. The stopping dis-
tance, however, will be much greater
than normal.
Disc brakes wear indicator
When your brake pads are worn and
new pads are required, you will hear
a high-pitched warning sound from
your front brakes or rear brakes (if
equipped). You may hear this sound
come and go or it may occur when-
ever you depress the brake pedal.
Please remember that some driving
conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when you first apply (or
lightly apply) the brakes. This is nor-
mal and does not indicate a problem
with your brakes.
Always replace the front or rear
brake pads as pairs.
5-28
Driving your vehicle
Parking brake
Avoid applying the parking
brake to stop the vehicle while it
is moving except in an emer-
gency situation. Applying the
parking brake while the vehicle
is moving at normal speeds can
cause a sudden loss of control
of the vehicle. If you must use
the parking brake to stop the
vehicle, use great caution in
applying the brake.
WARNING
Replace brake pads
Do not continue to drive with
worn brake pads. Continuing to
drive with worn brake pads can
damage the braking system and
result in costly brake repairs.
CAUTION
Brake wear
Do not ignore high pitched wear
sounds from your brakes. If you
ignore this audible warning, you
will eventually lose braking per-
formance, which could lead to a
serious accident.
WARNING
Check the brake warning light by
turning the ignition switch ON (do not
start the engine). This light will be
illuminated when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the
START or ON position.
Before driving, be sure the parking
brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off.
If the brake warning light remains on
after the parking brake is released
while engine is running, there may
be a malfunction in the brake sys-
tem. Immediate attention is neces-
sary.
If at all possible, cease driving the
vehicle immediately. If that is not pos-
sible, use extreme caution while
operating the vehicle and only con-
tinue to drive the vehicle until you
can reach a safe location or repair
shop.
Driving your vehicle
5
5-29
WKH-002
• To prevent unintentional move-
ment when stopped and leav-
ing the vehicle, do not use the
gearshift lever in place of the
parking brake. Set the parking
brake AND make sure the
gearshift lever is securely posi-
tioned in P (Park) for automatic
transmission equipped vehi-
cles.
• Never allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
• All vehicles should always
have the parking brake fully
engaged when parking to
avoid inadvertent movement
of the vehicle which can injure
occupants or pedestrians.
WARNING
5-30
Driving your vehicle
Electric parking brake (EPB)
Applying the parking brake
To apply the EPB (electric parking
brake):
1.Depress the brake pedal.
2.Pull up the EPB switch.
Make sure the warning light comes
on.
Also, the EPB is applied automatical-
ly if the Auto Hold button is on when
the Engine Start/Stop Button is OFF
position. (for shift by cable)
Also, the EPB is applied automatical-
ly when the Engine Start/Stop Button
is OFF position.(for shift by wire)
However, if you press the EPB switch
after the engine is turned off, the
EPB will not be applied.
Releasing the parking brake
To release the EPB (electric parking
brake), press the EPB switch in the
following condition:
• Set the Engine Start/Stop Button in
the ON position.
OKH053031N
OKH053032N
OKH053029N
OKH053030N
Do not operate the parking
brake / EPB while the vehicle is
moving except in an emergency
situation.
CAUTION
Driving your vehicle
5
5-31
• Depress the brake pedal.
Make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
To release EPB (electric parking
brake) automatically:
• Shift lever in P (Park)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of P
(Park) to R (Rear), N (Neutral) or D
(Drive).
• Shift lever in N (Neutral)
With the engine running depress
the brake pedal and shift out of N
(Neutral) to R (Rear) or D (Drive).
• Automatic transaxle vehicle
1. Start the engine.
2. Fasten the driver's seat belt.
3. Close the driver's door, engine
hood and trunk.
4. Depress the accelerator pedal
while the shift lever is in R
(Rear), D (Drive) or M (Manual)
mode.
Make sure the brake warning light
goes off.
✽ NOTICE
• For your safety, you can engage
the EPB even though the Engine
Start/Stop Button is in the OFF
position, but you cannot release it.
• For your safety, depress the brake
pedal and release the parking
brake manually with the EPB
switch when you drive downhill or
when backing up the vehicle.
• If the parking brake warning
light is still on even though
the EPB has been released,
have the system checked by
an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
• Do not drive your vehicle with
the EPB applied. It may cause
excessive brake pad and
brake rotor wear.
CAUTION
5-32
Driving your vehicle
EPB (electric parking brake) may be
automatically applied when:
• The EPB is overheated
• Requested by other systems
System warning
• If you try to drive off depressing the
accelerator pedal with the EPB
applied, but doesn't release auto-
matically, a warning will sound and
a message will appear.
• If the driver's seat belt is not fas-
tened and the engine hood in [D]
gear or trunk in [R] gear is opened,
a warning will sound and a mes-
sage will appear.
• If there is a problem with the vehi-
cle, a warning may sound and a
message may appear.
If the above situation occurs,
depress the brake pedal and release
EPB by pressing the EPB switch.
OKH053033N
■ Type A
■ Type B
• To prevent unintentional
movement when stopped and
leaving the vehicle, do not use
the shift lever in place of the
parking brake. Set the parking
brake and make sure the shift
lever is securely positioned in
P (Park).
• Never allow anyone who is
unfamiliar with the vehicle to
touch the parking brake. If the
parking brake is released
unintentionally, serious injury
may occur.
• All vehicles should always
have the parking brake fully
engaged when parking to
avoid inadvertent movement
of the car which can injure
occupants or pedestrians.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle
5
5-33
System warning
When the conversion from Auto Hold
to EPB is not working properly a
warning will sound and a message
will appear.
System warning
If the EPB is applied while Auto Hold is
activated because of ESC (Electronic
Stability Control) signal, a warning will
sound and a message will appear.
OKH053042N
OKH053040N
■ Type A
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type B
• A click sound may be heard
while operating or releasing
the EPB, but these conditions
are normal and indicate that
the EPB is functioning proper-
ly.
• When leaving your keys with a
parking lot attendant or valet,
make sure to inform him/her
how to operate the EPB.
• The EPB may malfunction if
you drive with the EPB
applied.
• When you automatically
release EPB by depressing
the accelerator pedal, depress
it slowly.
CAUTION
Depress the brake pedal when
the above message appears for
the Auto Hold and EPB may not
activate.
CAUTION
5-34
Driving your vehicle
EPB malfunction indicator
(if equipped)
This warning light illuminates if the
engine start/stop button is changed
to the ON position and goes off in
approximately 3 seconds if the sys-
tem is operation normally.
If the EPB malfunction indicator
remains on, comes on while driving,
or does not come on when the
engine start/stop button is changed
to the ON position, this indicates that
the EPB may have malfunctioned.
If this occurs, have your vehicle
checked by an authorized K900 Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
The EPB malfunction indicator may
illuminate when the ESC indicator
comes on to indicate that the ESC is
not working properly, but it does not
indicate a malfunction of the EPB.
OKH053034N
■ Type A
■ Type B
• The EPB warning light may
illuminate if the EPB switch
operates abnormally. Shut the
engine off and turn it on again
after a few minutes. The warn-
ing light will go off and the
EPB switch will operate nor-
mally. However, if the EPB
warning light is still on, have
the system checked by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
• If the parking brake warning
light does not illuminate or
blinks even though the EPB
switch was pulled up, the EPB
is not applied.
• If the parking brake warning
light blinks when the EPB
warning light is on, press the
switch, then pull it up. Once
more press it back to its origi-
nal position and pull it back
up. If the EPB warning does
not go off, have the system
checked by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
CAUTION
Driving your vehicle
5
5-35
Emergency braking
If there is a problem with the brake
pedal while driving, emergency brak-
ing is possible by pulling up and
holding the EPB switch. Braking is
possible only while you are holding
the EPB switch.
✽ NOTICE
During emergency braking by the
EPB, the parking brake warning
light will illuminate to indicate that
the system is operating.
When the EPB (electric parking
brake) is not released
If the EPB does not release normal-
ly, take your vehicle to an authorized
K900 Kia dealer by loading the vehi-
cle on a flatbed tow truck and have
the system checked.
Do not operate the electric park-
ing brake while the vehicle is
moving except in an emergency
situation. Applying the electric
parking brake while the vehicle
is moving at normal speeds can
cause a sudden loss of control
of the vehicle. If you must use
the electric parking brake to
stop the vehicle, use great cau-
tion in applying the brake.
WARNING
If you notice a continuous noise
or burning smell when the EPB
is used for emergency braking,
have your vehicle checked by
an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
CAUTION
5-36
Driving your vehicle
AUTO HOLD (if equipped)
The Auto Hold maintains the vehicle
in a standstill even though the brake
pedal is not depressed after the driv-
er brings the vehicle to a complete
stop by depressing the brake pedal.
Set up
1.Depress the brake pedal and then
press the Auto Hold button. The
white AUTO HOLD indicator will
come on and the system will be in
the standby position.
The driver's door, engine hood and
trunk closed and the driver's seat
belt must be fastened before EPB
will work.
OKH053035N
OKH053036N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
5
5-37
2.When you stop the vehicle com-
pletely by depressing the brake
pedal, the AUTO HOLD indicator
changes from white to green.
3.The vehicle will remain stationary
even if you release the brake
pedal.
4.If EPB is applied, Auto Hold will be
released.
Leaving
If you press the accelerator pedal
with the shift lever in R (Reverse), D
(Drive) or M (Manual) mode, the Auto
Hold will be released automatically
and the vehicle will start to move.
The indicator changes from green to
white.
Cancel
To cancel the Auto Hold operation,
press the Auto Hold switch. The
AUTO HOLD indicator will go out.
To cancel the Auto Hold operation
when the vehicle is at a standstill,
press the Auto Hold switch while
depressing the brake pedal.
OKH053037N
When driving off from Auto
Hold by depressing the acceler-
ator pedal, always check the
surrounding area near your
vehicle.
Slowly depress the accelerator
pedal for a smooth launch.
WARNING
5-38
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
• The Auto Hold does not operate
when:
- The driver's seat belt is unfas-
tened and driver's door is
opened
- The engine hood is opened
- The trunk is opened
- The shift lever is in P (Park)
- The EPB is applied
• For your safety, the Auto Hold
automatically switches to EPB in
such cases:
- The driver's seat belt is unfas-
tened and driver's door is
opened
- The engine hood is opened
- The trunk is opened
- The vehicle is in a standstill for
more than 10 minutes
- The vehicle is standing on a
steep slope
- The vehicle moved several times
(Continued)
(Continued)
In these cases, the brake warning
light comes on, the AUTO HOLD
indicator changes from green to
white, and a warning sounds and a
message will appear to inform you
that EPB has been automatically
engaged. Before driving off again,
press foot brake pedal, check the
surrounding area near your vehi-
cle and release parking brake
manually with the EPB switch.
• If the AUTO HOLD indicator
lights up yellow, the Auto Hold is
not working properly. Take your
vehicle to an authorized K900 Kia
dealer and have the system
checked.
• While operating Auto Hold, you
may hear mechanical noise.
However, it is normal operating
noise.
For your safety, cancel the Auto
Hold when you drive downhill or
back up the vehicle or park the
vehicle.
WARNING
If there is a malfunction with the
driver’s door, engine hood or
trunk open detection system,
the Auto Hold may not work
properly.
Take your vehicle to an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer and have
the system checked.
CAUTION
Driving your vehicle
5
5-39
When the EPB is applied from Auto
Hold, the notice will illuminate on the
LCD display. Also, warning chime
sounds once.
If it is impossible to apply EPB from
Auto Hold, the notice will illuminate
on the LCD display. Also, warning
chime sounds once. In that time,
apply the brake pedal.
If you did not apply the brake pedal
when you release the Auto Hold by
pressing the [AUTO HOLD] switch,
the notice will illuminate on the LCD
display. Also, warning chime sounds
once.
OKH053042N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OKH053040N
■ Type A
■ Type B
OKH053041N
■ Type A
■ Type B
If this notice illuminates, the
Auto Hold and EPB may not
operate. For your safety, apply
the brake pedal.
CAUTION
5-40
Driving your vehicle
When you press the [AUTO HOLD]
switch, if the driver door, engine
hood and trunk are not closed or the
driver seat belt is not fastened, the
notice will illuminate on the LCD dis-
play. Also warning chime sounds
once. In that time, press the [AUTO
HOLD] button after closing the driver
door, engine hood and trunk and fas-
tening the seat belt.
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
ABS (or ESC) will not prevent acci-
dents due to improper or dangerous
driving maneuvers. Even though
vehicle control is improved during
emergency braking, always maintain
a safe distance between you and
objects ahead. Vehicle speeds
should always be reduced during
extreme road conditions.
The vehicle should be driven at
reduced speeds in the following cir-
cumstances:
• When driving on rough, gravel or
snow-covered roads
• When driving with tire chains
installed
• When driving on roads where the
road surface is pitted or has differ-
ent surface heights.
Driving in these conditions increases
the stopping distance for your vehi-
cle.
The ABS continuously senses the
speed of the wheels. If the wheels
are going to lock, the ABS system
repeatedly modulates the hydraulic
brake pressure to the wheels.
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
responding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ABS is active.
In order to obtain the maximum ben-
efit from your ABS in an emergency
situation, do not attempt to modulate
your brake pressure and do not try to
pump your brakes. Press your brake
pedal as hard as possible or as hard
as the situation allows the ABS to
control the force being delivered to
the brakes.
OKH053046N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
5
5-41
✽ NOTICE
A click sound may be heard in the
engine compartment when the vehi-
cle begins to move after the engine is
started. These conditions are normal
and indicate that the anti-lock brake
system is functioning properly.
• Even with the anti-lock brake sys-
tem, your vehicle still requires suf-
ficient stopping distance. Always
maintain a safe distance from the
vehicle in front of you.
• Always slow down when cornering.
The anti-lock brake system cannot
prevent accidents resulting from
excessive speeds.
• On loose or uneven road surfaces,
operation of the anti-lock brake
system may result in a longer stop-
ping distance than for vehicles
equipped with a conventional
brake system.
The ABS warning light will stay on for
approximately 3 seconds after the
ignition switch is ON. During that
time, the ABS will go through self-
diagnosis and the light will go off if
everything is normal. If the light stays
on, you may have a problem with
your ABS but your regular brakes will
work normally. Contact an authorized
K900 Kia dealer as soon as possible.
• When you drive on a road with
poor traction, such as an icy road,
and operated your brakes continu-
ously, the ABS will be active con-
tinuously and the ABS warning
light may illuminate. Pull your vehi-
cle over to a safe place and stop
the engine.
• Restart the engine. If the ABS
warning light is off, then your ABS
is normal. Otherwise, you may
have a problem with the ABS.
Contact an authorized K900 Kia
dealer as soon as possible.
WKH-014
5-42
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
When you jump start your vehicle
because of a drained battery, the
engine may not run as smoothly and
the ABS warning light may turn on
at the same time. This happens
because of the low battery voltage. It
does not mean your ABS has mal-
functioned.
• Do not pump your brakes!
• Have the battery recharged before
driving the vehicle.
Electronic stability control
(ESC)
The Electronic Stability control
(ESC) system is designed to stabi-
lize the vehicle during cornering
maneuvers. ESC checks where you
are steering and where the vehicle is
actually going. ESC applies the
brakes on individual wheels and
intervenes with the engine manage-
ment system to stabilize the vehicle.
Electronic stability control (ESC) will
not prevent accidents. Excessive
speed in turns, abrupt maneuvers
and hydroplaning on wet surfaces
can still result in serious accidents.
Only a safe and attentive driver can
prevent accidents by avoiding
maneuvers that cause the vehicle to
lose traction. Even with ESC
installed, always follow all the normal
precautions for driving - including
driving at safe speeds for the condi-
tions.
The Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system is an electronic sys-
tem designed to help the driver main-
tain vehicle control under adverse
conditions. It is not a substitute for
safe driving practices. Factors includ-
ing speed, road conditions and driv-
er steering input can all affect
whether ESC will be effective in pre-
venting a loss of control. It is still your
responsibility to drive and corner at
reasonable speeds and to leave a
sufficient margin of safety.
OKH053043N
Driving your vehicle
5
5-43
When you apply your brakes under
conditions which may lock the
wheels, you may hear a “tik-tik’’
sound from the brakes, or feel a cor-
responding sensation in the brake
pedal. This is normal and it means
your ESC is active.
ESC operation
ESC ON condition
• When the ignition is
turned ON, ESC and
ESC OFF indicator lights
illuminate for approxi-
mately 3 seconds, then
ESC is turned on.
• Press the ESC OFF but-
ton for at least half a sec-
ond after turning the igni-
tion ON to turn ESC off.
(ESC OFF indicator will
illuminate). To turn the
ESC on, press the ESC
OFF button (ESC OFF
indicator light will go off).
• When starting the
engine, you may hear a
slight ticking sound. This
is the ESC performing an
automatic system self-
check and does not indi-
cate a problem.
When operating
When the ESC is in opera-
tion, ESC indicator light
blinks.
• When the Electronic
Stability Control is operat-
ing properly, you can feel
a slight pulsation in the
vehicle. This is only the
effect of brake control
and indicates nothing
unusual.
• When moving out of the
mud or slippery road,
pressing the accelerator
pedal may not cause the
engine rpm (revolutions
per minute) to increase.
-
5-44
Driving your vehicle
ESC operation off
ESC OFF state
This car has 2 kinds of
ESC off states.
If the engine stops when
ESC is off, ESC remains
off. Upon restarting the
engine, the ESC will auto-
matically turn on again.
• ESC off state 1
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF )
shortly (ESC OFF indicator light
(ESC OFF ) illuminates). At this
state, the engine control function
does not operate. It means the trac-
tion control function does not oper-
ate. Brake control function only oper-
ates.
• ESC off state 2
To cancel ESC operation, press the
ESC OFF button (ESC OFF ) for
more than 3 seconds. ESC OFF indi-
cator light (ESC OFF ) illuminates
and ESC OFF warning chime will
sound. At this state, the engine con-
trol function and brake control func-
tion do not operate. It means the car
stability control function does not
operate any more.
OKH053048NOKH053047N
■ Type A ■ Type B ■ Type A ■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
5
5-45
Indicator light
When the ignition switch is turned
ON, the indicator light illuminates,
then goes off if ESC system is oper-
ating normally.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever ESC is operating.
The ESC indicator light blinks when-
ever ESC is operating or illuminates
when ESC fails to operate.
The ESC OFF indicator light comes
on when the ESC is turned off with
the button.
Driving with varying tire or wheel
sizes may cause the ESC system to
malfunction. When replacing tires,
make sure they are the same size as
your original tires.
ESC OFF usage
When driving
• It’s a good idea to keep the ESC
turned on for daily driving whenev-
er possible.
• To turn ESC off while driving, press
the ESC OFF button while driving
on a flat road surface.
Never press the ESC OFF button
while ESC is operating (ESC indica-
tor light blinks).
If ESC is turned off while ESC is
operating, the vehicle may slip out of
control.
Electronic stability control
Drive carefully even though your
vehicle has Electronic Stability
Control. It can only assist you in
maintaining control under cer-
tain circumstances.
WARNING
Operating ESC
Never press the ESC OFF but-
ton while ESC is operating.
If the ESC is turned off while
ESC is operating, the vehicle
may go out of control.
WARNING
■ ESC indicator light
■ ESC OFF indicator light
5-46
Driving your vehicle
Hill-start assist control (HAC)
Hill start Assist Control is a comfort
function. The main intent is to pre-
vent the vehicle from rolling back-
wards while driving uphill on an
inclined surface. HAC holds the brak-
ing pressure builtup by driver during
stopping procedure for 2 seconds
after releasing brake pedal.
During the pressure-hold period, the
driver has enough time to press the
accelerator pedal to drive off.
The braking pressure is reduced as
soon as the system detects the dri-
ver’s intention to drive off.
• The HAC does not operate when
the transaxle shift lever is in the P
(Park) or N (Neutral) position.
• The HAC activates even though
the ESC is off but it does not acti-
vate when the ESC has malfunc-
tioned.
Good braking practices
• Check to be sure the parking brake
is not engaged and that the park-
ing brake indicator light is out
before driving away.
• Driving through water may get the
brakes wet. They can also get wet
when the vehicle is washed. Wet
brakes can be dangerous! Your
vehicle will not stop as quickly if the
brakes are wet. Wet brakes may
cause the vehicle to pull to one
side.
To dry the brakes, apply the brakes
lightly until the braking action
returns to normal, taking care to
keep the vehicle under control at
all times. If the braking action does
not return to normal, stop as soon
as it is safe to do so and call an
authorized K900 Kia dealer for
assistance.
• Don't coast down hills with the
vehicle out of gear. This is extreme-
ly hazardous. Keep the vehicle in
gear at all times, use the brakes to
slow down, then shift to a lower
gear so that engine braking will
help you maintain a safe speed.
Activating HAC
Drivers should pay close atten-
tion when activating the HAC.
The vehicle may roll backward
causing an accident due to
insufficient brake hold pressure.
WARNING
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal.
Resting your foot on the brake
pedal while driving can be danger-
ous because the brakes might
overheat and lose their effective-
ness. It also increases the wear of
the brake components.
• If a tire goes flat while you are driv-
ing, apply the brakes gently and
keep the vehicle pointed straight
ahead while you slow down. When
you are moving slowly enough for it
to be safe to do so, pull off the road
and stop in a safe place.
• If your vehicle is equipped with an
automatic transaxle, don't let your
vehicle creep forward. To avoid
creeping forward, keep your foot
firmly on the brake pedal when the
vehicle is stopped.
• Be cautious when parking on a hill.
Firmly engage the parking brake
and place the shift lever in P
(Park). If your vehicle is facing
downhill, turn the front wheels into
the curb to help keep the vehicle
from rolling. If your vehicle is facing
uphill, turn the front wheels away
from the curb to help keep the vehi-
cle from rolling. If there is no curb
or if it is required by other condi-
tions to keep the vehicle from
rolling, block the wheels.
• Under some conditions your park-
ing brake can freeze in the engaged
position. This is most likely to hap-
pen when there is an accumulation
of snow or ice around or near the
rear brakes or if the brakes are wet.
If there is a risk that the parking
brake may freeze, apply it only tem-
porarily while you put the shift lever
in P (Park) and block the rear
wheels so the vehicle cannot roll.
Then release the parking brake.
• Do not hold the vehicle on the
upgrade with the accelerator
pedal. This can cause the transaxle
to overheat. Always use the brake
pedal or parking brake.
Driving your vehicle
5
5-47
5-48
Driving your vehicle
The AVSM assists the driver by pro-
viding notification is the system
detects on object ahead that is too
close to the vehicle and which may
require the dirver to apply the brake
pedal or reduce vehicle speed. If the
AVSM detects such an object, the
system will issue a caution message,
provide a warning sound, and the
seat belt vibrate.
❈ The seat belt vibration is a option-
al function.
• If the AVSM senses the object
ahead is too close to the vehicle
that the driver needs to operate the
brake pedal, the warning light
above will illuminate.
Immediately reduce your speed.
• If the AVSM senses objects, the
warning sound also operates and
the seat belt vibrates.
Immediately reduce your speed.
❈ The seat belt vibration is a option-
al function.
This system is only a supplemental
system and it is not intended to, nor
does it replace the need for extreme
care and attention of the driver. The
sensing range and objects
detectable by the sensors are limit-
ed. Pay attention to the road condi-
tions at all times.
ADVANCED VEHICLE SAFETY MANAGEMENT (AVSM) (IF EQUIPPED)
OKH053049N
■ Type A ■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
5
5-49
Brake operation
• If the driver releases the accelera-
tor after the warning, the AVSM
automatically brakes the vehicle
gently.
• If the driver hits the brake to reduce
vehicle speed, the brake assistant
system operates to raise braking
efficiency.
• If the system detects that the
object is at a fair distance away
and the driver depresses the accel-
erator or releases the brake pedal,
braking will stop.
Seat belt operating (if equipped)
The seat belt may tighten if the sys-
tem detects that a vehicle of object is
close.
User setting mode
1.In user setting mode select the
AVSM.
2.If you select [OFF], the warning for
collision or brake control is can-
celled and [AVSM OFF] indicator
will turn on. If you select [ON], the
warning for collision or brake con-
trol is operated and [AVSM OFF]
indicator will turn off.
OKH053123N
■ Type A ■ Type B
The AVSM does not stop the
vehicle completely and does
not avoid collisions. Always
look ahead cautiously to pre-
vent unexpected and sudden
situations from occurring.
WARNING
The AVSM operates according
to the distance to the vehicle
ahead, the relative velocity of
the vehicles and the driver's
operation of the brake or accel-
erator pedal. Always pay atten-
tion to the road and road condi-
tions.
WARNING
5-50
Driving your vehicle
Malfunction indicator
• The AVSM OFF indicator will illu-
minate when the Engine Start/Stop
Button is turned ON, but should go
off after approximately 3 seconds.
If the indicator does not come on,
or continuously remains on after
coming on for about 3 seconds
when you turn the Engine
Start/Stop Button to the ON posi-
tion, or if the indicator comes on
while driving, the AVSM is not
working properly. Take your vehicle
to an authorized K900 Kia dealer
and have the system checked.
• The AVSM OFF indicator may illu-
minate when the ESC indicator or
SCC indicator comes on, but it
does not indicate a malfunction of
the AVSM.
OKH053118N
■ Type A ■ Type B
• When the AVSM system is
turned off, make sure that the
vehicle is stopped.
• When the engine is started,
the AVSM is automatically
turned on. To turn the AVSM
system off, select the AVSM
OFF in USM (User Settings
Mode).
• If the AVSM ON is selected in
USM (User Settings Mode),
and if the ESC is turned off by
pressing the ESC OFF button,
the AVSM function is automat-
ically cancelled.
CAUTION
The AVSM is not a substitute for
safe driving practices. It is the
responsibility of the driver to
always check the speed and the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle
5
5-51
• Even if there is a malfunction
to the brake operation of the
AVSM, when you depress the
brake pedal, the brake oper-
ates normally. AVSM brake
operation does not operate in
certain hazardous situations.
• The AVSM is designed to
function above approximately
10 mph (15 km/h) and below
approximately 110 mph (180
km/h).
• The AVSM does not detect:
- Persons or animals.
- Oncoming vehicles in the
opposite lane or a vehicle in
an intersection.
- Stopped objects.
• The AVSM can not detect the
objects, when:
- The sensors are stained
with dirt or covered.
- There is heavy rain or heavy
snow.
(Continued)
(Continued)
- There is interference by
electromagnetic waves.
- There are strong radar
reflections.
- Driving in a curve.
- Driving uphill or downhill.
- Driving in areas under con-
struction.
- A object ahead is very nar-
row such as motorcycles or
bicycles.
- A vehicle cuts in suddenly.
• The AVSM brake operation
does not operate, if the driver
does not release the accelera-
tor pedal or does not operate
the brake pedal.
WARNING
5-52
Driving your vehicle
DRIVE mode / SNOW mode
The drive mode may be selected
according to the driver’s preference
or road condition.
The system initializes to the normal
mode after the engine start/stop but-
ton has been turned off and on.
It is displayed on the AVN monitor
which mode the vehicle is in as
below.
• NORMAL
• ECO
• SPORT
• SNOW (if equipped)
The mode changes whenever the
DRIVE MODE button is pressed.
❈ When normal mode is selected, it
is not displayed on the cluster.
If the SNOW MODE button is
pressed, the SNOW mode will oper-
ate regardless of whichever DRIVE
MODE (NORMAL/SPORT/ECO) is
operating.
If the button is pressed once more,
the DRIVE MODE (NORMAL/
SPORT/ECO) that was operating
previously will operate.
❈ SNOW MODE : if equipped
DRIVE MODE INTEGRATED CONTROL SYSTEM
OKH053103N
NORMAL
ECO SPORT
OKH053052N
OKH053053N
■ Type A
■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
5
5-53
ECO mode (Active ECO)
Active ECO helps improve fuel effi-
ciency by controlling certain engine
and transaxle system operating
parameters. Fuel efficiency depends
on the driver's driving habit and road
condition.
• When the DRIVE MODE button is
pressed and the ECO mode is
selected, the ECO indicator
(green) will illuminate to show that
the Active ECO is operating.
• When the Active ECO is activated,
and the engine start/stop button is
turned off and on it will change to
NORMAL mode. To turn on the
ECO mode press the DRIVE
MODE button till it is selected.
When Active ECO is activated:
• The acceleration may slightly be
reduced eventhough you depress
the accelerator fully.
• The air conditioner performance
may be limited
• The shift pattern of the automatic
transaxle may change.
• The engine noise may get louder.
The above situations are normal
conditions when the active eco sys-
tem is activated to improve fuel effi-
ciency.
Limitation of Active ECO opera-
tion:
If the following conditions occur while
Active ECO is operating, the system
operation is limited even though
there is no change in the ECO indi-
cator.
• When the coolant temperature is
low:
The system will be limited until
engine performance becomes nor-
mal.
• When driving up a hill:
The system will be limited to gain
power when driving uphill because
the engine torque is restricted.
• When using manual mode:
The system will be limited accord-
ing to the shift location.
• When the accelerator pedal is
deeply depressed for a few sec-
onds:
The system will be limited, judging
that the driver wants to speed up.
5-54
Driving your vehicle
SPORT mode
SPORT mode focuses on dynamic
driving by automatically controlling
the steering wheel, engine and
transaxle system.
• When the DRIVE MODE button is
pressed and the SPORT mode is
selected, the SPORT indicator (yel-
low) will illuminate.
• When the SPORT mode is activat-
ed, and the engine start/stop button
is turned off and on it will change to
NORMAL mode. To turn on the
SPORT mode press DRIVE MODE
button again.
• If the system is activated:
- After speeding, it maintains the
gear and RPM for some time
even though the accelerator
pedal is not depressed.
- Up-shifting is delayed.
✽ NOTICE
In Sport drive mode, the fuel effi-
ciency may decrease.
SNOW mode (if equipped)
Snow mode helps the driver to drive
more effectively on slippery roads
such as snowy or muddy roads.
• If the SNOW MODE button is
pressed, the SNOW mode will oper-
ate regardless of whichever DRIVE
mode (NORMAL/SPORT/ECO) is
operating. If the button is pressed
once more, the DRIVE mode (NOR-
MAL/SPORT/ECO) that was operat-
ing previously will operate.
Driving your vehicle
5
5-55
The cruise control system allows you
to program the vehicle to maintain a
constant speed without depressing
the accelerator pedal.
This system is designed to function
above approximately 20 mph
(30 km/h).
If the cruise control is left on,
(CRUISE indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster illuminated) the cruise
control can be switched on acciden-
tally. Keep the cruise control system
off (CRUISE indicator light OFF)
when the cruise control is not in use,
to avoid inadvertently setting a
speed.
Use the cruise control system only
when traveling on open highways in
good weather.
Do not use the cruise control when
driving in heavy or varying traffic, or
on slippery (rainy, icy or snow-cov-
ered) or winding roads or over 6%
up-hill or down-hill roads.
✽ NOTICE
• During normal cruise control
operation, when the SET switch is
activated or reactivated after
applying the brakes, the cruise
control will energize after approx-
imately 3 seconds. This delay is
normal.
• To activate cruise control, depress
the brake pedal at least once after
turning the ignition switch to the
ON position or starting the engine.
This is to check if the brake switch
which is important part to cancel
cruise control is in normal condi-
tion.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
OKH053062N
Misuse of Cruise Control
or Cruise Control Misuse
Do not use cruise control if the
traffic situation does not allow
you to drive safely at a constant
speed and with sufficient dis-
tance to the vehicle in front.
WARNING
5-56
Driving your vehicle
Cruise control switch
CRUISE : Turns cruise control sys-
tem on or off.
CANCEL : Cancels cruise control
operation.
RES+: Resumes or increases cruise
control speed.
SET-: Sets or decreases cruise con-
trol speed.
To set cruise control speed:
1.Move the lever up (to CRUISE), to
turn the system on. The CRUISE
indicator light will illuminate.
2.Accelerate to the desired speed,
which must be more than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
3.Lever must be moved down (to
SET-) prior to setting any desired
speed. The SET indicator light in
the instrument cluster will illumi-
nate. Release the accelerator at
the same time. The desired speed
will automatically be maintained.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
OKH053119N OKH053058N
OKH053059N
Driving your vehicle
5
5-57
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
hold it. Your vehicle will accelerate.
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 2.0 km/h or
1 mph each time you move the
lever up (to RES+) in this manner.
To decrease the cruising
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
hold it. Your vehicle will gradually
slow down. Release the lever at the
speed you want to maintain.
• Move the lever down (to SET-) and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 2.0 km/h or
1 mph each time you move the
lever down (to SET-) in this man-
ner.
To temporarily accelerate with
the cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator pedal.
If you move the lever down (to SET-)
at increased speed, the cruising
speed will be set again.
OKH053060N OKH053059N
5-58
Driving your vehicle
To cancel cruise control, do
one of the following:
• Depress the brake pedal.
• Shift into N (Neutral) with an auto-
matic transaxle.
• Move up the lever (to CANCEL)
located on the steering wheel.
• Decrease the vehicle speed lower
than the memory speed by 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• Decrease the vehicle speed to less
than approximately 20 mph (30
km/h).
• Increasing the vehicle speed to
more than approximately 125 mph
(200 km/h).
• The ESC is operating.
• Downshifting to the 2nd gear with
manual mode.
• Operating the EPB switch. Do not
operate the parking brake while
driving except in an emergency sit-
uation.
Each of these actions will cancel
cruise control operation (the
SET
indicator light in the instrument clus-
ter will go off), but it will not turn the
system off. If you wish to resume
cruise control operation, move up the
lever (to RES+) located on your
steering wheel. You will return to your
previously preset speed.
To resume cruising speed at
more than approximately 20
mph (30 km/h):
If any method other than the
CRUISE lever was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the most recent set speed
will automatically resume when you
move the lever up (to RES+).
It will not resume, however, if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
OKH053061N
OKH053060N
Driving your vehicle
5
5-59
✽ NOTICE
Always check the road conditions
when you move the lever up (to
RES+) to resume the speed.
To turn cruise control off, do
one of the following:
• Move the lever up (to CRUISE).
(the CRUISE indicator light in the
instrument cluster will go off)
• Turn the Engine Start / Stop Button
off.
Both of these actions cancel cruise
control operation. If you want to
resume cruise control operation,
repeat the steps provided in “To set
cruise control speed” on the previous
page.
OKH053058N
5-60
Driving your vehicle
➀ Cruise indicator
➁ SET indicator
➂ Set speed
➃ Vehicle-to-vehicle distance
The ASCC allows you to program the
vehicle to maintain a set speed so
long as it is not limited by traffic.
When traffic is encountered the vehi-
cle will slow down to maintain a set
distance behind traffic without
depressing the accelerator or brake
pedal.
ADVANCED SMART CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM (ASCC) (IF EQUIPPED)
OKH053062N
OKH053063N
■ Type A ■ Type B
• If the ASCC is left on, (CRUISE
indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster illuminated) the
ASCC can be activated unin-
tentionally. Keep the ASCC off
(CRUISE indicator light OFF)
when the ASCC is not in use,
to avoid inadvertently setting
a speed.
• Use the ASCC only when trav-
eling on open highways in
good weather.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not use the ASCC when it
may not be safe to keep the
car at a constant speed, for
instance, driving in heavy or
varying traffic, or on slippery
(rainy, icy or snow-covered) or
winding roads or over 6% up-
hill or down-hill roads.
• Pay particular attention to the
driving conditions whenever
using the ASCC.
• Be careful when driving down-
hill using the ASCC.
• The ASCC is not a substitute
for safe driving practices. It is
the responsibility of the driver
to always check the speed
and distance to the vehicle
ahead.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle
5
5-61
Speed setting (ASCC)
To set cruise control speed:
1.Move the lever up (to CRUISE), to
turn the system on. The CRUISE
indicator light in the instrument
cluster will illuminate.
2. Accelerate to the desired speed.
• 20 mph (30 km/h) ~ 110 mph
(180 km/h) : when there is no
vehicle in front
• 0 mph (0 km/h) ~ 110 mph (180
km/h) : when there is a vehicle in
front
3.Lever must be moved down (to
SET-) prior to setting any desired
speed. The SET indicator light, set
speed and vehicle to vehicle dis-
tance on the LCD screen will illu-
minate.
4.Release the accelerator pedal. The
desired speed will automatically be
maintained.
If there is a vehicle in front of you, the
speed may decrease to maintain the
distance to the vehicle ahead.
On a steep grade, the vehicle may
slow down or speed up slightly while
going uphill or downhill.
To increase cruise control set
speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever up (to RES+), and
hold it. Your vehicle set speed will
increase by 5 mph (10 km/h).
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever up (to RES+), and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will increase by 1 mph (1.0
km/h) each time you move the
lever up (to RES+) in this manner.
• ASCC will operate to a maximum
setting of 110 mph (180 km/h).
However all local speed limit laws
must be followed.
OKH053058N
OKH053059N
OKH053060N
5-62
Driving your vehicle
To decrease the crusie control
set speed:
Follow either of these procedures:
• Move the lever down (to SET-), and
hold it. Your vehicle set speed will
decrease by 5 mph (10 km/h).
Release the lever at the speed you
want.
• Move the lever down (to SET-), and
release it immediately. The cruising
speed will decrease by 1 mph (1.0
km/h) each time you move the
lever down (to SET-) in this man-
ner.
• You can set the cruise control to any
speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
To temporarily accelerate with the
cruise control on:
If you want to speed up temporarily
when the cruise control is on,
depress the accelerator pedal.
Increased speed will not interfere
with cruise control operation or
change the set speed.
To return to the set speed, take your
foot off the accelerator.
If you move the lever down (to SET-)
at increased speed, the cruising
speed will be set again.
✽ NOTICE
Be careful when accelerating tem-
porarily, because the speed is not
regulated automatically at this time
even if there is a vehicle in front of
you.
ASCC will be temporarily can-
celed when:
Cancelled manually
• The brake pedal is depressed.
• Move down the lever (to CANCEL)
located on the steering wheel.
The ASCC turns off temporarily
when the indicator on the LCD dis-
play turns off.
The CRUISE indicator is illuminated
continuously.
OKH053059N OKH053061N
Driving your vehicle
5
5-63
Cancelled automatically
• The driver's door is opened.
• The shift lever is shifted to N
(Neutral), R (Reverse) or D (Drive).
• The EPB (electronic parking brake)
is applied.
• The vehicle speed is over 110 mph
(180 km/h)
• The vehicle stops on a steep
incline.
• The ESC or ABS is operating.
• The ESC is turned off.
• The sensor or the cover is dirty or
blocked with foreign matter.
• When the vehicle is stopped for
over 5 minutes.
• The vehicle stops and go repeat-
edly for a long period of time.
• The driver starts driving by
depressing the accelerator pedal
or move up the lever (to RES+), if a
vehicle stops far away ahead of the
your vehicle.
• The accelerator pedal is continu-
ously depressed for more than 1
minute.
Each of these actions will cancel
the ASCC operation. (the SET indi-
cator, set speed and vehicle to
vehicle distance on the LCD dis-
play will go off.)
In a condition the ASCC is can-
celled automatically, the ASCC will
not resume even though the RES+
or SET- lever is moved. Also, the
EPB (electronic parking brake) will
be applied when the vehicle is
stopped.
If the system is cancelled, the warn-
ing chime will sound and a message
will appear for a few seconds.
You must adjust the vehicle speed by
depressing the accelerator or brake
pedal according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition.
Always check the road conditions.
Do not rely on the warning chime.
If the ASCC is cancelled by other
than the reasons mentioned,
have the system checked by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
CAUTION
OKH053068N
■ Type A ■ Type B
5-64
Driving your vehicle
To resume cruise control set
speed:
If any method other than the
CRUISE lever was used to cancel
cruising speed and the system is still
activated, the cruising speed will
automatically resume when you
move the lever up/down (to RES+ or
SET-).
If you move the lever up (to RES+),
the speed will resume to the recently
set speed. It will not resume if the
vehicle speed has dropped below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
✽ NOTICE
Always check the road conditions
when you move the lever up (to
RES+) to resume speed.
To turn cruise control off:
Move the lever up (to CRUISE). (the
CRUISE indicator light in the instru-
ment cluster will go off).
OKH053060N
OKH053058N
Driving your vehicle
5
5-65
Vehicle to vehicle distance
setting (ASCC)
To set vehicle to vehicle distance:
This function allows you to program
the vehicle to maintain relative dis-
tance to the vehicle ahead without
depressing the accelerator pedal or
brake pedal.
The vehicle to vehicle distance will
automatically activate when the
ASCC is on.
Select the appropriate distance
according to road conditions and
vehicle speed.
Each time the button is pressed, the
vehicle to vehicle distance changes
as follows:
For example, if you drive at 56 mph
(90 km/h), the distance is maintained
as follows;
Distance 4 - approximately 172 feet
(52.5 m)
Distance 3 - approximately 130 feet
(40 m)
Distance 2 - approximately 106 feet
(32.5 m)
Distance 1 - approximately 82 feet
(25 m)
✽ NOTICE
The 'Distance 4' is always set when
the system is used for the first time
after starting the engine.
OKH053069N
Distance 4 Distance 3 Distance 2
Distance 1
5-66
Driving your vehicle
■ Type A ■ Type B
Distance 4
Distance 2 Distance 1
Distance 3
Distance 4
Distance 3
Distance 2 Distance 1
• The vehicle will maintain the set speed, when the lane ahead is clear.
• The vehicle will slow down or speed up within selected speed to maintain
the selected distance, when there is a vehicle ahead of you in the lane. (A
vehicle will appear in front of your vehicle in the LCD display only when
there is an actual vehicle in front of you)
• If the vehicle ahead speeds up, your vehicle will travel at a steady cruising
speed after accelerating to the selected speed.
OKH053070N/OKH053071N
• The warning chime sounds
and malfunction indicator
blinks if it is hard to maintain
the selected distance to the
vehicle ahead.
• If the warning chime sounds,
actively adjust the vehicle
speed by depressing the
brake pedal according to the
road condition ahead and
driving condition.
• Even if the warning chime is
not activated, always pay
attention to the driving condi-
tions to prevent dangerous
situations from occurring.
CAUTION
Driving your vehicle
5
5-67
In traffic situation
In traffic, your vehicle will stop if the
vehicle ahead of you stops. Also, if
the vehicle ahead of you starts mov-
ing, your vehicle will start as well.
However, if the vehicle stops for
more than 3 seconds, you must
depress the accelerator pedal or
move the lever (to RES+ or SET-) to
start driving.
Sensor to detect distance to the
vehicle ahead
The sensor detects distance to the
vehicle ahead.
If the sensor is covered with dirt or
other foreign matter, the vehicle to
vehicle distance control may not
operate correctly.
Always keep the sensor clean.
OKH053072N
OKH053073N
OKH053074N
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type A ■ Type B
If the vehicle ahead (vehicle
speed: less than 20 mph (30
km/h)) disappears to the next
lane, the warning chime will
sound and a message will
appear. Adjust your vehicle
speed for vehicles or objects
that can suddenly appear in
front of you by depressing the
brake pedal according to the
road condition ahead and driv-
ing condition.
CAUTION
5-68
Driving your vehicle
Sensor malfunction indicator
If the sensor or cover is
dirty or obscured with for-
eign matter such as snow,
the indicator will illuminate.
Clean the sensor by using
a soft cloth.
ASCC malfunction indicator
The warning light illumi-
nates when the vehicle to
vehicle distance control
system is not functioning
normally.
Take your vehicle to an
authorized K900 Kia dealer
and have the system
checked.
• Do not install accessories
around the sensor and do not
replace the bumper by your-
self. It may interfere with the
sensor performance.
• Always keep the sensor and
bumper clean.
• To prevent sensor cover dam-
age from occurring, wash the
car with a soft cloth.
• Do not damage the sensor or
sensor area by a strong
impact. If the sensor moves
slightly off position, the ASCC
will not operate correctly.
If this occurs, have your vehi-
cle checked by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer as soon as
possible.
• Use only a genuine Kia sensor
cover for your vehicle.
CAUTION
Driving your vehicle
5
5-69
To convert to cruise control
mode:
The driver may choose to only use
the cruise control mode (speed con-
trol function) by doing as follows:
1.Turn the ASCC on (the cruise indi-
cator light will be on but the system
will not be activated).
2.Push the distance to distance
switch for more than 2 seconds.
3.Choose between "Smart cruise
control(SCC) mode" and "Cruise
control(CC) mode".
Limitations of the system
The ASCC may have limits to its abil-
ity to detect distance to the vehicle
ahead due to road and traffic condi-
tions.
On curves
• On curves, the ASCC may not
detect a moving vehicle in your
lane, and then your vehicle could
accelerate to the set speed. Also,
the vehicle speed will rapidly slow
down when the vehicle ahead is
recognized suddenly.
OKH053200N
OKH053106N
OKH053107N
■ Type A
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type B
When using the cruise control
mode, you must manually
assess the distance to other
vehicles as the system will not
automatically brake to slow
down for other vehicles.
WARNING
5-70
Driving your vehicle
• Select the appropriate set speed
on curves and adjust your vehicle
speed by depressing the accelera-
tor or brake pedal according to the
road condition ahead and driving
condition.
• Your vehicle speed can be reduced
due to a vehicle in the adjacent
lane. Adjust your vehicle speed by
depressing the brake pedal
according to the road condition
ahead and driving condition. Apply
the accelerator pedal and select
the appropriate set speed. Check
to be sure that the road conditions
permit safe operation of the ASCC.
On inclines
• During uphill or downhill driving,
the ASCC may not detect a moving
vehicle in your lane, and cause
your vehicle to accelerate to the
set speed. Also, the vehicle speed
will rapidly slow down when the
vehicle ahead is recognized sud-
denly.
• Select the appropriate set speed
on inclines and adjust your vehicle
speed by depressing the accelera-
tor or brake pedal according to the
road condition ahead and driving
condition.
OKH053202N
OKH053201N
Driving your vehicle
5
5-71
Lane changing
• A vehicle which moves into your
lane from an adjacent lane cannot
be recognized by the sensor until it
is in the sensor's detection range.
• The sensor may not detect imme-
diately when a vehicle cuts in sud-
denly. Always pay attention to the
traffic, road and driving conditions.
• If a vehicle which moves into your
lane is slower than your vehicle,
your speed may decrease to main-
tain the distance to the vehicle
ahead.
• If a vehicle which moves into your
lane is faster than your vehicle,
your vehicle will accelerate to the
selected speed.
• Your vehicle may accelerate when
a vehicle ahead of you disappears.
• When you are warned that the
vehicle ahead of you is not detect-
ed, drive with caution.
OKH053203N
OKH053204N
5-72
Driving your vehicle
Vehicle recognition
Some vehicles ahead in your lane
cannot be recognized by the sensor
as follows:
- Narrow vehicles such as motorcy-
cles or bicycles
- Vehicles offset to one side
- Slow-moving vehicles or sudden-
decelerating vehicles
- Stopped vehicles
- Vehicles with small rear profile
such as trailers with no loads
A vehicle ahead cannot be recog-
nized correctly by the sensor if any of
following occurs:
- When the vehicle is pointing
upwards due to overloading in the
trunk
- While making turns by steering
- When driving to one side of the
lane
- When driving on narrow lanes or
on curves
Adjust your vehicle speed by
depressing the brake pedal accord-
ing to the road condition ahead and
driving condition.
• When vehicles are at a standstill
and the vehicle in front of you
changes to the next lane, be care-
ful when your vehicle starts to
move because it may not recog-
nize the stopped vehicle in front of
you.
OKH053205N
OKH053206N
Driving your vehicle
5
5-73
• Always look out for pedestrians
when your vehicle is maintaining a
distance with the vehicle ahead.
• Always be cautious for vehicles
with higher height or vehicles car-
rying loads that sticks out to the
back of the vehicle.
OKH053207N OKH053208N
• The ASCC cannot guarantee
the stop for every emergency
situation.
If an emergency stop is nec-
essary, you must apply the
brakes.
• Keep a safe distance accord-
ing to road conditions and
vehicle speed. If the vehicle to
vehicle distance is too close
during high-speed driving, a
serious collision may result.
• The ASCC cannot recognize a
stopped vehicle, pedestrians
or an oncoming vehicle.
Always look ahead cautiously
to prevent unexpected and
sudden situations from occur-
ring.
(Continued)
WARNING
5-74
Driving your vehicle
(Continued)
• When other vehicles are
changing lanes in front of you
frequently, the ASCC may not
detect the vehicle at certain
times. Always look ahead cau-
tiously to prevent unexpected
and sudden situations from
occurring.
• The ASCC is not a substitute
for safe driving practices but
a convenience function only. It
is the responsibility of the
driver to always check the
speed and the distance to the
vehicle ahead.
• Always be aware of the select-
ed speed and vehicle to vehi-
cle distance.
• Always maintain sufficient
braking distance and deceler-
ate your vehicle by applying
the brakes if necessary.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• As the ASCC may not recog-
nize complex driving situa-
tions, always pay attention to
driving conditions and control
your vehicle speed.
• For safe operation, carefully
read and follow the instruc-
tions in this manual before
use.
The ASCC may not operate tem-
porarily due to electrical inter-
ference.
CAUTION
Driving your vehicle
5
5-75
This system detects the lane with a
sensor at the front windshield and
notifies you if it detects that your
vehicle leaves the lane.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING SYSTEM (LDWS) (IF EQUIPPED)
OKH053075N
OKH053076N
• The LDWS does not make the
vehicle change lanes. It is the
driver's responsibility to
always check the road condi-
tions.
• Do not turn the steering wheel
suddenly if the LDWS warns
that your vehicle is leaving the
lane.
• If the sensor cannot detect the
lane or if the vehicle speed
does not exceed 44 mph (70
km/h), the LDWS will not be
able to notify you if the vehi-
cle leaves the lane.
• If your vehicle has window tint
or other types of coating on
the front windshield, the
LDWS may not work properly.
• Prevent damage to the LDWS
sensor from water or any liq-
uid.
• Do not remove the LDWS
parts and do not damage the
sensor by a strong impact.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• Do not put objects that reflect
light on the dash board.
• The operation of the LDWS
can be affected by several fac-
tors (including environmental
conditions). It is the responsi-
bility of the driver to pay
attention to the roadway and
to maintain the vehicle in it's
lane at all times.
WARNING
5-76
Driving your vehicle
To operate the LDWS, press the but-
ton with the engine start/stop button
in the ON position. The indicator
(green) illuminates on the cluster. To
cancel the LDWS, press the button
again.
If the system detects that your vehi-
cle is leaving the lane when the
LDWS is operating and vehicle
speed exceeds 44 mph (70 km/h),
the warning operates as follows:
1.Visual warning
If you leave the lane, the lane you
leave on the LCD display blinks yel-
low.
2.Auditory warning
If you leave the lane, the warning
sound operates.
OKH053078N
OKH053079N
■ When the sensor detects the lane line
■ When the sensor doesn’t detect the lane line
OKH053080N
OKH053081N
■ Lane departure warning (Type A)
■ Lane departure warning (Type B)
OKH053108N
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
■ Type A
■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
5
5-77
Warning indicator
If the LDWS warning indicator (yel-
low) comes on, the LDWS is not
working properly. Take your vehicle
to an authorized K900 Kia dealer
and have the system checked.
The LDWS does not operate
when:
• The driver turns on the turn signal
or the hazard warning flasher to
change lane.
• Driving on the lane line.
✽ NOTICE
To change lane, operate the turn sig-
nal switch then change the lane.
The LDWS may not warn you
even if the vehicle leaves the
lane, or may warn you even if
the vehicle does not leave the
lane when;
• The lane can't be visible due to
snow, rain, stain, a puddle or other
environmental conditions.
• The brightness of the outside
changes suddenly such as tunnel
enter/exit.
• Not turning on the headlight at
night or in the tunnel, or light level
is low.
• Difficult to distinguish the color of
the lane from the road.
• Driving on a steep grade or a
curve.
• Light such as street light, sunlight
or oncoming vehicle light reflects
from water on the road.
• The lens or windshield is stained
with foreign matter.
• The sensor cannot detect the lane
because of fog, heavy rain or
heavy snow.
OKH053212N
■ Type A ■ Type B
5-78
Driving your vehicle
• The surrounding of the inside rear
view mirror temperature is high
due to a direct ray of light.
• The lane is very wide or narrow.
• The lane line is damaged or indis-
tinct.
• The windshield is fogged by humid
air in the vehicle.
• The shadow is on the lane line by a
median strip.
• The sensor cannot distinguish the
lane from the road due to the dust.
• There is a mark similar to a lane
line.
• There is a boundary structure.
• The distance from vehicle ahead is
very short or the vehicle ahead
drives hiding the lane line.
• The vehicle vibrates heavily due to
road conditions.
• The lane number increases or
decreases or the lane lines are
crossing.
• Putting something on the dash-
board.
• Driving with the sun in front of you.
• Driving in areas under construc-
tion.
• The lane line is more than two in
either side (Left/Right)
Driving your vehicle
5
5-79
The Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) uses a radar sensor to alert
the driver.
It senses the rear side territory of the
vehicle and provides an indication to
the driver if it detects an object
approaching from these areas.
(1) BSD (Blind Spot Detection)
The warning range depends on
your vehicle speed. However, if
your vehicle is about 6 mph (10
km/h) faster than the other vehi-
cle, the system will not warn you.
(2) LCA (Lane Change Assist)
If the system detects a vehicle
approaching you at high speed,
the system will warn you.
(3) RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic Alert)
If the sensor detects an
approaching vehicle from the left
and right side as your vehicle
moves rearward, the system will
warn you.
BLIND SPOT DETECTION SYSTEM (BSD) (IF EQUIPPED)
OVI053129L
• Always check the road condi-
tion while driving for unex-
pected situations even though
the Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is operating.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is a supplemen-
tal system to assist you. Do
not solely rely on the system
and always pay attention and
drive safely.
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) is not a substi-
tute for proper and safe driv-
ing. Always drive safely and
use caution when changing
lanes or backing the vehicle
up. The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) may not detect
every object alongside the
vehicle.
WARNING
5-80
Driving your vehicle
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist)
Operating conditions
The indicator on the switch will illumi-
nate when the Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) switch is pressed with
the Engine Start/Stop Button ON.
If vehicle speed exceeds about 18.6
mph (30 km/h), the system will acti-
vate.
If you press the switch again, the
switch indicator and system will be
turned off.
If the ignition switch is turned OFF
and ON the system returns to the
previous state.
When the system is not used turn the
system off by turning off the switch.
When the system is turned on the
warning light will illuminate for 3 sec-
onds on the outside rearview mirror.
Warning type
The system will activate when:
1.The system is on
2.Vehicle speed is above about 18.6
mph (30 km/h)
3.Other vehicles are detected in the
rear side
OKH053082N
Driving your vehicle
5
5-81
If a vehicle is detected within the
boundary of the system, a warning
light will illuminate on the outside
rearview mirror and the head up dis-
play.
If the detected vehicle is not in warn-
ing range, the warning will turn off
according to driving conditions.
The second stage alarm will activate
when:
1.The first stage alert is on
2.The turn signal is on to change a
lane
When the second stage alert is acti-
vated, a warning light will blink on the
outside rearview mirror, the head up
display and a alarm will sound.
If you move the turn signal switch to
the original position, the second
stage alert will be deactivated.
OKH053084N
1st stage
OKH033020N
OKH033021N
2nd stage
5-82
Driving your vehicle
Detecting sensor
The sensors are located inside of the
rear bumper.
Always keep the rear bumper clean
for the system to work properly.
Warning message
The message will appear to notify
the driver if there are foreign sub-
stances on the rear bumper or it is
hot near the rear bumper. The light
on the switch and the system will
turn off automatically.
Remove the foreign matter on the
rear bumper.
If the system does not work normally
even though the foreign matter is
removed, take your vehicle to an
authorized K900 Kia dealer and have
the system checked.
If the system does not work properly,
a warning message will appear and
the light on the switch will turn off.
The system will turn off automatical-
ly.
Have your vehicle inspected by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
OKH053085N OKH053086N
OKH053087N
■ Type A ■ Type B
■ Type A ■ Type B
Driving your vehicle
5
5-83
RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert)
When your vehicle moves backwards
from a parking position, the sensor
detects approaching vehicles to the
left or right side direction and gives
information to the driver.
Operating conditions
• The indicator on the switch will llu-
minate when the Blind Spot
Detection System (BSD) switch is
pressed with the Engine Start/Stop
Button ON.
The system will turn on and stand-
by to activate.
• The system operates when the
vehicle speed is below about 6.2
mph (10 km/h) with the shift lever
in R (Reverse).
• The RCTA (Rear Cross Traffic
Alert) detecting range is about 1.6
feet ~ 65.6 feet (0.5 m ~ 20m)
based on the side direction.
However, the system sensing
range is different base on condi-
tions. Always pay attention to the
surrounding.
OKH053082NOVI053131
5-84
Driving your vehicle
Warning type
• If the vehicle detected by the sen-
sors approaches your vehicle, the
warning chime will sound, the
warning light on the outside
rearview mirror will blink and a
message will appear on the LCD
display.
• If the detected vehicle is out of the
sensing range of your vehicle,
move the vehicle away from the
detected object slowly; the warning
will be cancelled.
• The system may not operate prop-
erly due to other factors or circum-
stances. Always pay attention to
your surrounding.
❈ If your vehicle's left or right side
bumper is blinded by barrier or
vehicles, the system sensing abili-
ty may be reduced.
OKH053209N
OKH053213N
• The warning light on the out-
side rearview mirror will illu-
minate whenever a vehicle is
detected at the rear side by
the system.
To avoid accidents, do not
focus only on the warning
light and neglect to see the
surrounding of the vehicle.
• Drive safely even though the
vehicle is equipped with a
Blind Spot Detection System
(BSD) and Rear Cross Traffic
Alert (RCTA). Do not solely
rely on the system but check
for yourself before changing
lanes or backing the vehicle
up.
The system may not alert the
driver in some conditions so
always check the surround-
ings while driving.
(Continued)
WARNING
Driving your vehicle
5
5-85
Non-operating condition
Driver's Attention
The driver must be cautious in the
below situations for the system may
not detect other vehicles or objects in
certain circumstances.
- Curved roads, tollgates, etc.
- The surrounding of the sensor is
polluted with rain, snow, mud, etc
- The rear bumper near the sensor is
covered or hidden with a foreign
matter such as a sticker, bumper
guard, bicycle stand etc.
- The rear bumper is damaged or
the sensor is out of place.
- The height of the vehicle is altered
such as when the trunk is loaded
with heavy objects, or there is low
tire pressure etc.
- Bad weather such as heavy rain or
snow.
- A fixed object is near such as a
guardrail, tunnel, human and ani-
mal etc.
- Metal substances are near the
vehicles such as in a construction
area.
(Continued)
• The Blind Spot Detection
System (BSD) and Rear Cross
Traffic Alert (RCTA) are not a
substitute for proper and safe
driving. Always drive safely
and use caution when chang-
ing lanes or backing the vehi-
cles up. The Blind Spot
Detection System (BSD) may
not detect every object along-
side the vehicle.
• The system may not work
properly if the bumper has
been replaced or if repair
work has been done near the
sensor.
• The detection area differs
according to the roads width.
If the road is narrow the sys-
tem may detect other vehicles
in the next lane.
• In addition, if the road is very
wide the system may not
detect other vehicles.
• The system may turn off due
to strong electromagnetic
waves.
CAUTION
5-86
Driving your vehicle
- A big vehicle is near such as a bus
or truck.
- A motorcycle or bicycle is near.
- A flat trailer like vehicle is near.
- If the vehicle has started at the
same time as the vehicle next to it
and has accelerated.
- When the other vehicle passes by
very fast.
- When changing lanes.
- When going down or up a steep
road where the height of the lane is
different.
- When the other vehicle drives at
the rear very nearby or drives very
close.
- When a trailer or carrier is installed.
- When the temperature of the rear
bumper is high.
- When the sensors are covered by
the vehicle, wall or a pillar of park-
ing lot.
- When your vehicle is backing up, if
the detected vehicle approaches
your vehicle or also backs up.
- Small objects like shopping carts
and baby carriages.
- If there is a vehicle with decreased
ride height (lowered).
- When the vehicle is close to anoth-
er vehicle.
- When the vehicle in the next lane
moves two lanes away from my
vehicle OR when the vehicle two
lanes away moves to the next lane
from my vehicle.
Outside rearview mirror may not
alert the driver when:
- The outside rearview mirror hous-
ing is damaged or covered with
debris.
- The window is covered with debris.
- The windows are severely tinted.
Pursuant to Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 47, Part 15
("FCC Rules").
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
Driving your vehicle
5
5-87
ECONOMICAL OPERATION
Your vehicle's fuel economy depends
mainly on your style of driving, where
you drive and when you drive.
Each of these factors affects how
many miles (kilometers) you can get
from a gallon (liter) of fuel. To operate
your vehicle as economically as pos-
sible, use the following driving sug-
gestions to help save money in both
fuel and repairs:
• Drive smoothly. Accelerate at a
moderate rate. Don't make "jack-
rabbit" starts or full-throttle shifts
and maintain a steady cruising
speed. Don't race between stop-
lights. Try to adjust your speed to
the traffic so you don't have to
change speeds unnecessarily.
Avoid heavy traffic whenever pos-
sible. Always maintain a safe dis-
tance from other vehicles so you
can avoid unnecessary braking.
This also reduces brake wear.
• Drive at a moderate speed. The
faster you drive, the more fuel your
vehicle uses. Driving at a moderate
speed, especially on the highway,
is one of the most effective ways to
help reduce fuel consumption.
• Don't "ride" the brake pedal. This
can increase fuel consumption and
also increase wear on brake com-
ponents. In addition, driving with
your foot resting on the brake pedal
may cause the brakes to overheat,
which reduces their effectiveness
and may lead to more serious con-
sequences.
• Take care of your tires. Keep them
inflated to the recommended pres-
sure. Incorrect inflation, either too
much or too little, results in unnec-
essary tire wear. Check the tire
pressures at least once a month.
• Be sure that the wheels are
aligned correctly. Improper align-
ment can result from hitting curbs
or driving too fast over irregular
surfaces. Poor alignment causes
faster tire wear and may also result
in other problems as well as
greater fuel consumption.
• Keep your vehicle in good condi-
tion. For better fuel economy and
reduced maintenance costs, main-
tain your vehicle in accordance
with the maintenance schedule in
section 7. If you drive your vehicle
in severe conditions, more frequent
maintenance is required (see sec-
tion 7 for details).
• Keep your vehicle clean. For maxi-
mum service, your vehicle should
be kept clean and free of corrosive
materials. It is especially important
that mud, dirt, ice, etc. not be
allowed to accumulate on the
underside of the vehicle. This extra
weight can result in increased fuel
consumption and also contribute to
corrosion.
• Travel lightly. Don't carry unneces-
sary weight in your vehicle. Weight
reduces fuel economy.
• Don't let the engine idle longer
than necessary. If you are waiting
(and not in traffic), turn off your
engine and restart only when
you're ready to go.
5-88
Driving your vehicle
• Remember, your vehicle does not
require extended warm-up. After
the engine has started, allow the
engine to run for 10 to 20 seconds
prior to placing the vehicle in gear.
In very cold weather, however, give
your engine a slightly longer warm-
up period.
• Don't "lug" or "over-rev" the engine.
Lugging is driving too slowly in a
very high gear resulting in engine
bucking. If this happens, shift to a
lower gear. Over-revving is racing
the engine beyond its safe limit.
This can be avoided by shifting at
the recommended speed.
• Use your air conditioning sparingly.
The air conditioning system is
operated by engine power so your
fuel economy is reduced when you
use it.
• Open windows at high speeds can
reduce fuel economy.
• Fuel economy is reduced by cross-
winds and headwinds. To help off-
set some of this loss, slow down
when driving in these conditions.
Keeping a vehicle in good operating
condition is important both for econ-
omy and safety. Therefore, have an
authorized K900 Kia dealer perform
scheduled inspections and mainte-
nance.
Engine off during motion
Never turn the engine off to
coast down hills or anytime the
vehicle is in motion. The power
steering and power brakes will
not function properly without
the engine running. In addition,
turning off the ignition while
driving could engage the steer-
ing wheel lock resulting in loss
of vehicle steering. Keep the
engine on and downshift to an
appropriate gear for engine
braking effect.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle
5
5-89
Hazardous driving conditions
When hazardous driving conditions
are encountered such as water,
snow, ice, mud, sand, or similar haz-
ards, follow these suggestions:
• Drive cautiously and allow extra
distance for braking.
• Avoid sudden braking or steering.
• When braking with non-ABS
brakes pump the brake pedal with
a light up-and-down motion until
the vehicle is stopped.
Do not pump the brake pedal on a
vehicle equipped with ABS.
• If stalled in snow, mud, or sand,
use second gear. Accelerate slow-
ly to avoid spinning the drive
wheels.
• Use sand, rock salt, tire chains, or
other non-slip material under the
drive wheels to provide traction
when stalled in ice, snow, or mud.
Rocking the vehicle
If it is necessary to rock the vehicle
to free it from snow, sand, or mud,
first turn the steering wheel right and
left to clear the area around your
front wheels. Then, shift back and
forth between R (Reverse) and any
forward gear in vehicles equipped
with an automatic transaxle. Do not
race the engine, and spin the wheels
as little as possible. If you are still
stuck after a few tries, have the vehi-
cle pulled out by a tow vehicle to
avoid engine overheating and possi-
ble damage to the transaxle.
The ESC system should be turned
OFF prior to rocking the vehicle.
SPECIAL DRIVING CONDITIONS
Downshifting
Do not downshift with an auto-
matic transaxle while driving on
slippery surfaces. The sudden
change in tire speed could
cause the tires to skid and
result in an accident.
WARNING
Vehicle rocking
Prolonged rocking may cause
engine overheating, transaxle
damage or failure, and tire dam-
age.
CAUTION
5-90
Driving your vehicle
Smooth cornering
Avoid braking or gear changing in
corners, especially when roads are
wet. Ideally, corners should always
be taken under gentle acceleration. If
you follow these suggestions, tire
wear will be held to a minimum.
Driving at night
Because night driving presents more
hazards than driving in the daylight,
here are some important tips to
remember:
• Slow down and keep more dis-
tance between you and other vehi-
cles, as it may be more difficult to
see at night, especially in areas
where there may not be any street
lights.
OKH053210N OKH053211N
Spinning tires
Do not spin the wheels, espe-
cially at speeds more than 35
mph (56 km/h). Spinning the
wheels at high speeds when the
vehicle is stationary could
cause a tire to overheat which
could result in tire damage.
CAUTION
Sudden vehicle movement
Do not attempt to rock the vehi-
cle if people or objects are near-
by. The vehicle may suddenly
move forward or backwards as
it becomes unstuck.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle
5
5-91
• Adjust your mirrors to reduce the
glare from other driver's head-
lights.
• Keep your headlights clean and
properly aimed on vehicles not
equipped with the automatic head-
light aiming feature. Dirty or
improperly aimed headlights will
make it much more difficult to see
at night.
• Avoid staring directly at the head-
lights of oncoming vehicles. You
could be temporarily blinded, and it
will take several seconds for your
eyes to readjust to the darkness.
Driving in the rain
Rain and wet roads can make driving
dangerous, especially if you’re not
prepared for the slick pavement.
Here are a few things to consider
when driving in the rain:
• A heavy rainfall will make it harder
to see and will increase the dis-
tance needed to stop your vehicle,
so slow down.
• Keep your windshield wiping
equipment in good shape. Replace
your windshield wiper blades when
they show signs of streaking or
missing areas on the windshield.
• If your tires are not in good condi-
tion, making a quick stop on wet
pavement can cause a skid and
possibly lead to an accident. Be
sure your tires are in good shape.
• Turn on your headlights to make it
easier for others to see you.
• Driving too fast through large pud-
dles can affect your brakes. If you
must go through puddles, try to
drive through them slowly.
• If you believe you may have gotten
your brakes wet, apply them lightly
while driving until normal braking
operation returns.
Driving in flooded areas
Avoid driving through flooded areas
unless you are sure the water is no
higher than the bottom of the wheel
hub. Drive through any water slowly.
Allow adequate stopping distance
because brake performance may be
affected.
After driving through water, dry the
brakes by gently applying them sev-
eral times while the vehicle is moving
slowly.
OKH053093N
5-92
Driving your vehicle
Driving off-road
Drive carefully off-road because your
vehicle may be damaged by rocks or
roots of trees. Become familiar with
the off-road conditions where you
are going to drive before you begin
driving.
Highway driving
Tires
Adjust the tire inflation pressures to
specification. Low tire inflation pres-
sures will result in overheating and
possible failure of the tires.
Avoid using worn or damaged tires
which may result in reduced traction
or tire failure.
Never exceed the maximum tire
inflation pressure shown on the tires.
Fuel, engine coolant and engine
oil
High speed travel consumes more
fuel than urban motoring. Do not for-
get to check both the engine coolant
and engine oil.
Drive belt
A loose or damaged drive belt may
overheat the engine.
Tire tread
Always check the tire tread
before driving your vehicle.
Worn-out tires can result in loss
of vehicle control. Worn-out tires
should be replaced as soon as
possible. For further informa-
tion and tread limits, refer to
"Tires and wheels" in section 7.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle
5
5-93
Severe weather conditions in the
winter result in greater wear and
other problems. To minimize the
problems of winter driving, you
should follow these suggestions:
Snowy or Icy conditions
To drive your vehicle in deep snow, it
may be necessary to use snow tires
or to install tire chains on your tires. If
snow tires are needed, it is neces-
sary to select tires equivalent in size
and type of the original equipment
tires. Failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your
car. Furthermore, speeding, rapid
acceleration, sudden brake applica-
tions, and sharp turns are potentially
very hazardous practices.
During deceleration, use engine
braking to the fullest extent. Sudden
brake applications on snowy or icy
roads may cause skids. You need to
keep sufficient distance between the
vehicle in operation in front and your
vehicle. Also, apply the brake gently.
It should be noted that installing tire
chains on the tire will provide greater
driving force, but will not prevent side
skids.
Tire chains are not legal in all states.
Check state laws before installing tire
chains.
Snow tires
If you mount snow tires on your vehi-
cle, make sure they are radial tires of
the same size and load range as the
original tires. Mount snow tires on all
four wheels to balance your vehicle’s
handling in all weather conditions.
Keep in mind that the traction provid-
ed by snow tires on dry roads may
not be as high as your vehicle's orig-
inal equipment tires. You should drive
cautiously even when the roads are
clear. Check with the tire dealer for
maximum speed recommendations.
Do not install studded tires without
first checking local, state and munic-
ipal regulations for possible restric-
tions against their use.
WINTER DRIVING
Snow tire size
Snow tires should be equivalent
in size and type to the vehicle's
standard tires. Otherwise, the
safety and handling of your vehi-
cle may be adversely affected.
WARNING
5-94
Driving your vehicle
Tire chains
Since the sidewalls of radial tires are
thinner, they can be damaged by
mounting some types of snow chains
on them. Therefore, the use of snow
tires is recommended instead of
snow chains. Do not mount tire
chains on vehicles equipped with
aluminum wheels; snow chains may
cause damage to the wheels. If snow
chains must be used, use the
AutoSock
®
(fabric snow chain).
Damage to your vehicle caused by
improper snow chain use is not cov-
ered by your vehicle manufacturers
warranty.
Install the AutoSock
®
(fabric snow
chain) only on the rear tires.
❈AutoSock
®
is a Registered trade-
mark of AutoSock.
Chain installation
When installing the AutoSock
®
(fab-
ric snow chain), follow the manufac-
turer's instructions and mount them
as tightly as you can. Drive slowly
with the AutoSock
®
(fabric snow
chain) installed. If you hear the
AutoSock
®
(fabric snow chain) con-
tacting the body or chassis, stop and
tighten them. If they still make con-
tact, slow down until it stops.
Remove the AutoSock
®
(fabric snow
chain) as soon as you begin driving
on cleared roads.
OKH053098N
• Make sure the AutoSock
®
(fab-
ric snow chain) are the correct
size and type for your tires.
Incorrect snow chains can
cause damage to the vehicle
body and suspension and may
not be covered by your vehicle
manufacturer warranty.
• Always check the AutoSock
®
(fabric snow chain) installation
for proper mounting after driv-
ing approximately 0.3 to 0.6
miles (0.5 to 1 km) to ensure
safe mounting. Retighten or
remount the AutoSock
®
(fabric
snow chain) if they are loose.
CAUTION
Mounting chains
When mounting the AutoSock
®
(fabric snow chain), park the
vehicle on level ground away
from traffic. Turn on the vehicle
Hazard Warning flashers and
place a triangular emergency
warning device behind the vehi-
cle if available. Always place the
vehicle in P (Park), apply the
parking brake and turn off the
engine before installing the
AutoSock
®
(fabric snow chain).
WARNING
Driving your vehicle
5
5-95
❈AutoSock
®
is a Registered trade-
mark of AutoSock.
Use high quality ethylene gly-
col coolant
Your vehicle is delivered with high
quality ethylene glycol coolant in the
cooling system. It is the only type of
coolant that should be used because
it helps prevent corrosion in the cool-
ing system, lubricates the water
pump and prevents freezing. Be sure
to replace or replenish your coolant
in accordance with the maintenance
schedule in section 7. Before winter,
have your coolant tested to assure
that its freezing point is sufficient for
the temperatures anticipated during
the winter.
Check battery and cables
Winter puts additional burdens on
the battery system. Visually inspect
the battery and cables as described
in section 7. The level of charge in
your battery can be checked by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer or a
service station.
Tire chains
• The use of the AutoSock
®
(fab-
ric snow chain) may adversely
affect vehicle handling.
• Do not exceed 20 mph (30
km/h) or the AutoSock
®
(fabric
snow chain) manufacturer’s
recommended speed limit,
whichever is lower.
• Drive carefully and avoid
bumps, holes, sharp turns, and
other road hazards, which may
cause the vehicle to bounce.
• Avoid sharp turns or locked-
wheel braking.
WARNING
• The AutoSock
®
(fabric snow
chain) that are the wrong size
or improperly installed can
damage your vehicle's brake
lines, suspension, body and
wheels.
• Stop driving and retighten the
AutoSock
®
(fabric snow chain)
any time you hear them hitting
the vehicle.
CAUTION
5-96
Driving your vehicle
Change to "winter weight" oil
if necessary
In some climates it is recommended
that a lower viscosity "winter weight"
oil be used during cold weather. See
section 8 for recommendations. If
you aren't sure what weight oil you
should use, consult an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
Check spark plugs and igni-
tion system
Inspect your spark plugs as
described in section 7 and replace
them if necessary. Also check all
ignition wiring and components to be
sure they are not cracked, worn or
damaged in any way.
To keep locks from freezing
To keep the locks from freezing,
squirt an approved de-icer fluid or
glycerine into the key opening. If a
lock is covered with ice, squirt it with
an approved de-icing fluid to remove
the ice. If the lock is frozen internally,
you may be able to thaw it out by
using a heated key. Handle the heat-
ed key with care to avoid injury.
Use approved window washer
anti-freeze in system
To keep the water in the window
washer system from freezing, add an
approved window washer anti-freeze
solution in accordance with instruc-
tions on the container. Window wash-
er anti-freeze is available from an
authorized K900 Kia dealer and most
auto parts outlets. Do not use engine
coolant or other types of anti-freeze
as these may damage the paint fin-
ish.
Don't let your parking brake
freeze
Under some conditions your parking
brake can freeze in the engaged
position. This is most likely to hap-
pen when there is an accumulation
of snow or ice around or near the
rear brakes or if the brakes are wet. If
there is a risk the parking brake may
freeze, apply it only temporarily while
you put the shift lever in P (Park) and
block the rear wheels so the vehicle
cannot roll. Then release the parking
brake.
Don't let ice and snow accu-
mulate underneath
Under some conditions, snow and
ice can build up under the fenders
and interfere with the steering. When
driving in severe winter conditions
where this may happen, you should
periodically check underneath the
car to be sure the movement of the
front wheels and the steering com-
ponents is not obstructed.
Driving your vehicle
5
5-97
Carry emergency equipment
Depending on the severity of the
weather you should carry appropri-
ate emergency equipment. Some of
the items you may want to carry
include tire chains, tow straps or
chains, flashlight, emergency flares,
sand, a shovel, jumper cables, a win-
dow scraper, gloves, ground cloth,
coveralls, a blanket, etc.
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
TRAILER TOWING
5-98
Driving your vehicle
Tire and loading information
label
The label located on the driver's door
sill gives the original tire size, cold
tire pressures recommended for your
vehicle, the number of people that
can be in your vehicle and vehicle
capacity weight.
Vehicle capacity weight:
904 lbs. (410 kg)
Vehicle capacity weight is the maxi-
mum combined weight of occupants
and cargo. If your vehicle is equipped
with a trailer, the combined weight
includes the tongue load.
Seating capacity:
Total : 5 persons
(Front seat : 2 persons,
Rear seat : 3 persons)
Seating capacity is the maximum
number of occupants including a
driver, your vehicle may carry.
However, the seating capacity may
be reduced based upon the weight of
all of the occupants, and the weight
of the cargo being carried or towed.
Do not overload the vehicle as there
is a limit to the total weight, or load
limit including occupants and cargo,
the vehicle can carry.
VEHICLE LOAD LIMIT
OKH053120N/OKH053121N
Driving your vehicle
5
5-99
Towing capacity:
We do not recommend using this
vehicle for trailer towing.
Cargo capacity:
The cargo capacity of your vehicle
will increase or decrease depending
on the weight and the number of
occupants and the tongue load, if
your vehicle is equipped with a trailer.
Steps For Determining Correct
Load Limit -
1.Locate the statement "The com-
bined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg
or XXX lbs.'' on your vehicle's plac-
ard.
2.Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3.Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from
XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4.The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and lug-
gage load capacity. For example, if
the "XXX" amount equals 1400 lbs.
and there will be five 150 lbs. pas-
sengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)
5.Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded
on the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calcu-
lated in Step 4.
6.If your vehicle will be towing a trail-
er, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your vehi-
cle.
5-100
Driving your vehicle
C190F03JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 849 lbs
Weight (385 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
805 lbs
161 lbs (73 kg) × 5
(365 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
44 lbs
Luggage weight (20 kg)
A B C
Example 3
C190F02JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 849 lbs
Weight (385 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
750 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5
(340 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
99 lbs
Luggage weight (45 kg)
A B C
Example 2
C190F01JM
Item Description Total
A
Vehicle Capacity 849 lbs
Weight (385 kg)
Subtract Occupant
B Weight
300 lbs
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2
(136 kg)
C
Available Cargo and
549 lbs
Luggage weight (249 kg)
Example 1
A B C
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight
and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's
capacity weight.
Driving your vehicle
5
5-101
Certification label
The certification label is located on
the driver's door sill at the center pil-
lar.
This label shows the maximum
allowable weight of the fully loaded
vehicle. This is called the GVWR
(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating). The
GVWR includes the weight of the
vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
cargo.
This label also tells you the maxi-
mum weight that can be supported
by the front and rear axles, called
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR).
To find out the actual loads on your
front and rear axles, you need to go
to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle. Your dealer can help you with
this. Be sure to spread out your load
equally on both sides of the center-
line.
The label will help you decide how
much cargo and installed equipment
your vehicle can carry.
If you carry items inside your vehicle
- like suitcases, tools, packages, or
anything else - they are moving as
fast as the vehicle. If you have to stop
or turn quickly, or if there is a crash,
the items will keep going and can
cause an injury if they strike the driv-
er or a passenger.
OEN056020
Over loading
Never exceed the GVWR for your
vehicle, the GAWR for either the
front or rear axle and vehicle
capacity weight. Exceeding
these ratings can affect your
vehicle’s handling and braking
ability.
WARNING
5-102
Driving your vehicle
✽ NOTICE
Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be cov-
ered by your warranty. Do not over-
load your vehicle.
Over loading
Do not overload your vehicle.
Overloading your vehicle can
cause heat buildup in your vehi-
cle's tires and possible tire fail-
ure, increased stopping dis-
tances and poor vehicle han-
dling--all of which may result in
a crash.
WARNING
Loose cargo
Do not travel with unsecured
blunt objects in the passenger
compartment of your vehicle
(e.g. suit cases or unsecured
child seats). These items may
strike occupant during a sud-
den stop or crash.
WARNING
Driving your vehicle
5
5-103
This section will guide you in the
proper loading of your vehicle and/or
trailer, to keep your loaded vehicle
weight within its design rating capa-
bility, with or without a trailer.
Properly loading your vehicle will
provide maximum return of the vehi-
cle design performance. Before load-
ing your vehicle, familiarize yourself
with the following terms for determin-
ing your vehicle's weight ratings, with
or without a trailer, from the vehicle's
specifications and the compliance
label:
Base curb weight
This is the weight of the vehicle
including a full tank of fuel and all
standard equipment. It does not
include passengers, cargo, or option-
al equipment.
Vehicle curb weight
This is the weight of your new vehicle
when you picked it up from your deal-
er plus any aftermarket equipment.
Cargo weight
This figure includes all weight added
to the Base Curb Weight, including
cargo and optional equipment.
GAW (Gross axle weight)
This is the total weight placed on
each axle (front and rear) - including
vehicle curb weight and all payload.
GAWR (Gross axle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight that can be carried by a single
axle (front or rear). These numbers
are shown on the compliance label.
The total load on each axle must
never exceed its GAWR.
GVW (Gross vehicle weight)
This is the Base Curb Weight plus
actual Cargo Weight plus passengers.
GVWR (Gross vehicle weight rating)
This is the maximum allowable
weight of the fully loaded vehicle
(including all options, equipment,
passengers and cargo). The GVWR
is shown on the certification label
located on the driver’s door sill.
VEHICLE WEIGHT
What to do in an emergency
Road warning......................................................6-2
• Hazard warning flasher ...........................................6-2
In case of an emergency while driving ...............6-3
• If the engine stalls at a crossroad or crossing ........6-3
• If you have a flat tire while driving...........................6-3
• If engine stalls while driving ....................................6-3
If the engine will not start ...................................6-4
• If engine doesn't turn over or turns over slowly ......6-4
• If engine turns over normally but does not start .....6-4
Emergency starting.............................................6-5
• Jump starting...........................................................6-5
• Push-starting ...........................................................6-8
If the engine overheats .......................................6-9
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)........6-11
• Low tire pressure telltale .......................................6-12
• Low tire pressure position telltale..........................6-12
• TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator ...........................................6-13
• Changing a tire with TPMS ...................................6-14
If you have a flat tire .........................................6-17
• Jack and tools .......................................................6-17
• Removing and storing the spare tire.....................6-18
• Changing tires .......................................................6-18
• Jack label ..............................................................6-26
Towing...............................................................6-27
• Towing service.......................................................6-27
• Removable towing hook ........................................6-29
• Emergency towing.................................................6-30
6
ROAD WARNING
Hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher serves as
a warning to other drivers to exercise
extreme caution when approaching,
overtaking, or passing your vehicle.
It should be used whenever emer-
gency repairs are being made or
when the vehicle is stopped near the
edge of a roadway.
Depress the flasher switch with the
ignition switch in any position. The
flasher switch is located in the center
console switch panel. All turn signal
lights will flash simultaneously.
• The hazard warning flasher oper-
ates whether your vehicle is run-
ning or not.
• The turn signals do not work when
the hazard flasher is on.
• Care must be taken when using
the hazard warning flasher while
the vehicle is being towed.
6-2
What to do in an emergency
OKH043186N
What to do in an emergency
6
6-3
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY WHILE DRIVING
If the engine stalls at a cross-
road or crossing
If the engine stalls at a crossroad or
crossing, set the shift lever in the N
(Neutral) position and then push the
vehicle to a safe place.
If you have a flat tire while
driving
If a tire goes flat while you are driving:
1.Take your foot off the accelerator
pedal and let the car slow down
while driving straight ahead. Do not
apply the brakes immediately or
attempt to pull off the road as this
may cause a loss of control. When
the car has slowed to such a speed
that it is safe to do so, brake care-
fully and pull off the road. Drive off
the road as far as possible and
park on firm, level ground. If you
are on a divided highway, do not
park in the median area between
the two traffic lanes.
2.When the car is stopped, turn on
your emergency hazard flashers,
set the parking brake and put the
shift lever in P.
3.Have all passengers get out of the
car. Be sure they all get out on the
side of the car that is away from
traffic.
4.When changing a flat tire, follow
the instruction provided later in this
section.
If engine stalls while driving
1.Reduce your speed gradually,
keeping a straight line. Move cau-
tiously off the road to a safe place.
2.Turn on your emergency flashers.
3.Try to start the engine again. If your
vehicle will not start, contact an
authorized K900 Kia dealer or Kia
Roadside Assistance.
IF THE ENGINE WILL NOT START
If engine doesn't turn over or
turns over slowly
1.Be sure the shift lever is in N
(Neutral) or P (Park) and the emer-
gency brake is set.
2.Check the battery connections to
be sure they are clean and tight.
3.Turn on the interior light. If the light
dims or goes out when you operate
the starter, the battery is dis-
charged.
4.Check the starter connections to
be sure they are securely tight-
ened.
5.Do not push or pull the vehicle to
start it. See instructions for "Jump
starting".
If engine turns over normally
but does not start
1.Check fuel level.
2.With the Engine Start/Stop Button
in the OFF position, check all con-
nectors at ignition coils and spark
plugs. Reconnect any that may be
disconnected or loose.
3.If the engine still does not start, call
an authorized K900 Kia dealer or
Kia Roadside Assistance.
6-4
What to do in an emergency
If the engine will not start, do
not push or pull the car to start
it. This could result in a collision
or cause other damage.
WARNING
EMERGENCY STARTING
Connect cables in numerical order
and disconnect in reverse order.
✽ NOTICE
Your vehicle has a battery in the
trunk compartment, but when you
jump start your vehicle, use the
jumper terminal in the engine com-
partment.
Jump starting
Jump starting can be dangerous if
done incorrectly. Therefore, to avoid
harm to yourself or damage to your
vehicle or battery, follow the jump
starting procedures. If in doubt, we
strongly recommend that you have a
competent technician or towing serv-
ice jump start your vehicle.
What to do in an emergency
6
6-5
OKH063024N
Use only a 12-volt jumper sys-
tem. You can damage a 12-volt
starting motor, ignition system,
and other electrical parts
beyond repair by use of a 24-volt
power supply (either two 12-volt
batteries in series or a 24-volt
motor generator set).
CAUTION
6-6
What to do in an emergency
Jump starting procedure
✽ NOTICE
Your vehicle has a battery in the
trunk compartment, but when you
jump start your vehicle, use the
jumper terminal in the engine com-
partment.
1.Make sure the booster battery is
12-volt and that its negative termi-
nal is grounded.
2.If the booster battery is in another
vehicle, do not allow the vehicles to
touch.
3.Turn off all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4.Open the engine hood.
(Continued)
Automobile batteries contain
sulfuric acid. This is poison-
ous and highly corrosive.
When jump starting, wear pro-
tective glasses and be careful
not to get acid on yourself,
your clothing or on the car.
• Do not attempt to jump start
the vehicle if the discharged
battery is frozen or if the elec-
trolyte level is low; the battery
may rupture or explode.
• Do not allow the (+) and (-)
jumper cables to touch. It may
cause sparks.
• The battery may rupture or
explode when you jump start
with a low or frozen battery.
Battery
Never attempt to check the elec-
trolyte level of the battery as
this may cause the battery to
rupture or explode causing seri-
ous injury.
WARNING
Battery
• Keep all flames or sparks
away from the battery. The
battery produces hydrogen
gas which may explode if
exposed to flame or sparks.
If these instructions are not
followed exactly, serious per-
sonal injury and damage to
the vehicle may occur! If you
are not sure how to follow this
procedure, seek qualified
assistance.
(Continued)
WARNING
5.Lift the end of strip (5) up.
6.Press the fastener head with screw
driver and then pull the fastener
out.
7.Lift the rear portion of small service
cover (6) up and then remove the
service cover.
(A) : for assemble, (B) : for remove
8.Press the fastener head with screw
driver and then pull the fastener
out from main service cover (7).
9.Pull the main service cover over
0.28 in (7 mm) to toward the front
of the vehicle.
10. Lift the main service cover up
and then remove the main serv-
ice cover. Be careful not to dam-
age the holder under the main
service cover.
11. Connect the jumper cables in the
exact sequence shown in the
illustration. First connect one end
of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the jump start con-
nector (1), then connect the
other end to the positive terminal
on the booster battery (2).
Proceed to connect one end of
the other jumper cable to the
negative terminal of the booster
battery (3), then the other end to
the negative terminal of the jump
start connector (4). Do not con-
nect it to or near any part that
moves when the engine is
cranked.
Do not allow the jumper cables
to contact anything except the
correct battery terminals or the
correct ground. Do not lean over
the battery when making con-
nections.
What to do in an emergency
6
6-7
OKH073083N OKH073084N
A
B
12. Start the engine of the vehicle
with the booster battery and let it
run at 2,000 rpm, then start the
engine of the vehicle with the
discharged battery.
If the cause of your battery discharg-
ing is not apparent, have the system
checked by an authorized K900 Kia
dealer.
Push-starting
Vehicles equipped with automatic
transmission cannot be push-started.
Follow the directions in this section
for jump-starting.
6-8
What to do in an emergency
Battery cables
Do not connect the jumper
cable from the negative terminal
of the booster battery to the
negative terminal of the dis-
charged battery. This can cause
the discharged battery to over-
heat and crack, releasing bat-
tery acid.
CAUTION
Never tow a vehicle to start it
because the sudden surge for-
ward when the engine starts
could cause a collision with the
tow vehicle.
WARNING
IF THE ENGINE OVERHEATS
If your temperature gauge indicates
overheating, you experience a loss
of power, or hear loud pinging or
knocking, the engine is probably too
hot. If this happens, you should:
1.Pull off the road and stop as soon
as it is safe to do so.
2.Place the shift lever in P and set
the parking brake. If the air condi-
tioning is on, turn it off.
3.If engine coolant is running out
under the car or steam is coming
out from the hood, stop the engine.
Do not open the hood until the
coolant has stopped running or the
steaming has stopped. If there is
no visible loss of engine coolant
and no steam, leave the engine
running and check to be sure the
engine cooling fan is operating. If
the fan is not running, turn the
engine off.
4.Check to see if the water pump
drive belt is missing. If it is not
missing, check to see that it is
tight. If the drive belt seems to be
satisfactory, check for coolant leak-
ing from the radiator, hoses or
under the car. (If the air condition-
ing had been in use, it is normal for
cold water to be draining from it
when you stop.)
5.If the water pump drive belt is bro-
ken or engine coolant is leaking
out, stop the engine immediately
and call the nearest authorized
K900 Kia dealer for assistance.
What to do in an emergency
6
6-9
While the engine is running,
keep hair, hands and clothing
away from moving parts such
as the fan and drive belts to pre-
vent injury.
WARNING
Do not remove the
radiator cap when the
engine is hot. This
may result in coolant
being blown out of the
opening and cause
serious burns.
WARNING
6-10
What to do in an emergency
6.If you cannot find the cause of the
overheating, wait until the engine
temperature has returned to nor-
mal. Then, if coolant has been lost,
carefully add coolant to the reser-
voir to bring the fluid level in the
reservoir up to the halfway mark.
7.Proceed with caution, keeping
alert for further signs of overheat-
ing. If overheating happens again,
call an authorized K900 Kia dealer
for assistance.
• Serious loss of coolant indi-
cates there is a leak in the
cooling system and this
should be checked as soon as
possible by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
• When the engine overheats
from low engine coolant, sud-
denly adding engine coolant
may cause cracks in the
engine. To prevent damage,
add engine coolant slowly in
small quantities.
CAUTION
What to do in an emergency
6
6-11
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
(1) Low Tire Pressure Telltale/TPMS
Malfunction Indicator
(2) Low Tire Pressure Position Telltale
(shown on the LCD display)
Each tire, including the spare (if pro-
vided), should be checked monthly
when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehi-
cle manufacturer on the vehicle plac-
ard or tire inflation pressure label. (If
your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pres-
sure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for
those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your
vehicle has been equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system (TPMS)
that illuminates a low tire pressure
telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pres-
sure telltale illuminates, you should
stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a signifi-
cantly under-inflated tire causes the
tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a
substitute for proper tire maintenance,
and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if
under-inflation has not reached the
level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped
with a TPMS malfunction indicator to
indicate when the system is not oper-
ating properly. The TPMS malfunction
indicator is combined with the low tire
pressure telltale. When the system
detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute
and then remain continuously illumi-
nated. This sequence will continue
upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists.
When the TPMS malfunction indica-
tor remains illuminated after blinking
for approximately 1 minute, the sys-
tem may not be able to detect or sig-
nal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a
variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or alter-
nate tires or wheels on the vehicle
that prevent the TPMS from function-
ing properly.
OKH063025N
OKH043415N
■ Type A ■ Type B
6-12
What to do in an emergency
Always check the TPMS malfunction
telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alter-
nate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
✽ NOTICE
If any of the below happens, have
the system be checked by an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer.
1.The low tire pressure telltale/
TPMS malfunction indicator does
not illuminate for 3 seconds when
the ignition switch is turned to the
ON or engine is running.
2.The TPMS malfunction indicator
remains illuminated after blinking
for approximately 1 minute.
3.The Low tire pressure position
telltale remains illuminated.
Low tire pressure telltale
Low tire pressure position tell-
tale
When the tire pressure monitoring
system warning indicators are illumi-
nated and warning massage dis-
played on the cluster LCD display,
one or more of your tires is signifi-
cantly under-inflated. The low tire
pressure position telltale light will
indicate which tire is significantly
under-inflated by illuminating the cor-
responding position light.
If either telltale illuminates, immedi-
ately reduce your speed, avoid hard
cornering and anticipate increased
stopping distances. You should stop
and check your tires as soon as pos-
sible. Inflate the tires to the proper
pressure as indicated on the vehi-
cle’s placard or tire inflation pressure
label located on the driver’s side cen-
ter pillar outer panel.
If you cannot reach a service station
or if the tire cannot hold the newly
added air, replace the low pressure
tire with the spare tire.
If you drive the vehicle for about 20
minutes at speeds above 15 mph (25
km/h) after replacing the low pres-
sure tire with the spare tire, the
below will happen:
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1 minute
and then remain continuously illumi-
nated because the TPMS sensor is
not mounted on the spare wheel.
✽ NOTICE
The spare tire is not equipped with a
tire pressure sensor.
OKH043415N
■ Type A ■ Type B
What to do in an emergency
6
6-13
TPMS (Tire Pressure
Monitoring System)
malfunction indicator
The TPMS malfunction indicator will
illuminate after it blinks for approxi-
mately one minute when there is a
problem with the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.
Have the system checked by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer as soon
as possible to determine the cause
of the problem.
✽ NOTICE
If there is a malfunction with the
TPMS, the low tire pressure position
telltale will not be displayed even
though the vehicle has an under-
inflated tire.
In winter or cold weather, the
low tire pressure telltale may be
illuminated if the tire pressure
was adjusted to the recom-
mended tire inflation pressure
in warm weather. It does not
mean your TPMS is malfunc-
tioning because the decreased
temperature leads to a propor-
tional lowering of tire pressure.
When you drive your vehicle
from a warm area to a cold area
or from a cold area to a warm
area, or the outside temperature
is greatly higher or lower, you
should check the tire inflation
pressure and adjust the tires to
the recommended tire inflation
pressure.
CAUTION
Low pressure damage
Significantly low tire pressure
makes the vehicle unstable and
can contribute to loss of vehicle
control and increased braking
distances.
Continued driving on low pres-
sure tires can cause the tires to
overheat and fail.
WARNING
6-14
What to do in an emergency
Changing a tire with TPMS
If you have a flat tire, the Low Tire
Pressure and Position telltales will
come on. Have the flat tire repaired
by an authorized K900 Kia dealer as
soon as possible or replace the flat
tire with the spare tire.
Each wheel is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor mounted inside the
tire behind the valve stem. You must
use TPMS specific wheels. It is rec-
ommended that you always have
your tires serviced by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
If you drive the vehicle for about 20
minutes at speeds above 15 mph (25
km/h) after replacing the low pres-
sure tire with the spare tire, the
below will happen:
• The TPMS malfunction indicator
may blink for approximately 1
minute and then remain continu-
ously illuminated because the
TPMS sensor is not mounted on
the spare wheel.
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may blink for approximate-
ly 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated if
the vehicle is moving around
electric power supply cables
or radio transmitter such as at
police stations, government
and public offices, broadcast-
ing stations, military installa-
tions, airports, or transmitting
towers, etc. This can interfere
with normal operation of the
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS).
• The TPMS malfunction indica-
tor may blink for approximate-
ly 1 minute and then remain
continuously illuminated if
the snow chains are used or
some separate electronic
devices such as notebook
computer, mobile charger,
remote starter or navigation
etc., are used in the vehicle.
This can interfere with normal
operation of the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS).
CAUTION
Never use a puncture-repairing
agent not approved by K900 Kia
dealer to repair and/or inflate a
low pressure tire. Tire sealant
not approved by K900 Kia deal-
er may damage the tire pres-
sure sensor.
CAUTION
What to do in an emergency
6
6-15
You may not be able to identify a tire
with low pressure by simply looking
at it. Always use a good quality tire
pressure gauge to measure. Please
note that a tire that is hot (from being
driven) will have a higher pressure
measurement than a tire that is cold.
A cold tire means the vehicle has
been sitting for 3 hours and driven for
less than 1 mile (1.6 km) in that 3 hour
period.
Allow the tire to cool before measur-
ing the inflation pressure. Always be
sure the tire is cold before inflating to
the recommended pressure.
TPMS
• The TPMS cannot alert you to
severe and sudden tire dam-
age caused by external factors
such as nails or road debris.
• If you feel any vehicle instabil-
ity, immediately take your foot
off the accelerator, apply the
brakes gradually with light
force, and slowly move to a
safe position off the road.
WARNING
Protecting TPMS
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) com-
ponents may interfere with the
system's ability to warn the driv-
er of low tire pressure condi-
tions and/or TPMS malfunctions.
Tampering with, modifying, or
disabling the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) com-
ponents may void the warranty
for that portion of the vehicle.
WARNING
6-16
What to do in an emergency
Pursuant to Code of Federal
Regulations, Title 47, Part 15
("FCC Rules").
Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1.This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2.This device must accept any inter-
ference received, including inter-
ference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party
responsible for compliance
could void the user’s authority
to operate the equipment.
CAUTION
What to do in an emergency
6
6-17
IF YOU HAVE A FLAT TIRE
Jack and tools
The jack, jack handle, and wheel lug
nut wrench are stored in the luggage
compartment. Pull up the luggage
box cover to reach this equipment.
(1) Jack handle
(2) Jack
(3) Wheel lug nut wrench
(4) Screw driver
(phillips and flat-head)
(5) Spanner
Jacking instructions
The jack is provided for emergency
tire changing only.
To prevent the jack from “rattling”
while the vehicle is in motion, store it
properly.
Follow jacking instructions to reduce
the possibility of personal injury.
OKH063005N
(Continued)
• Be sure to use the correct
front and rear jacking posi-
tions on the vehicle; never use
the bumpers or any other part
of the vehicle for jack support.
• The vehicle can easily roll off
the jack causing serious injury
or death. No person should
place any portion of their body
under a vehicle that is sup-
ported only by a jack; use vehi-
cle support stands.
• Do not start or run the engine
while the vehicle is on the jack.
• Do not allow anyone to remain
in the vehicle while it is on the
jack.
• Make sure any children pres-
ent are in a secure place away
from the road and from the
vehicle to be raised with the
jack.
Changing tires
• Never attempt vehicle repairs
in the traffic lanes of a public
road or highway.
• Always move the vehicle com-
pletely off the road and onto
the shoulder before trying to
change a tire. The jack should
be used on level firm ground.
If you cannot find a firm, level
place off the road, call a tow-
ing service company for assis-
tance.
(Continued)
WARNING
6-18
What to do in an emergency
Removing and storing the
spare tire
Turn the tire hold-down wing bolt
counterclockwise.
Store the tire in the reverse order of
removal.
To prevent the spare tire and tools
from “rattling” while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Changing tires
1.Park on a level surface and apply
the parking brake firmly.
2.Shift the shift lever into P (Park).
3.Activate the hazard warning flasher.
OKH063006N
OKH063003N
When you remove or store the
spare tire, do not contact or
bump the battery with the spare
tire. Contacting or bumping the
battery may cause failure of
electrical circuits.
CAUTION
What to do in an emergency
6
6-19
4.Remove the wheel lug nut wrench,
jack, jack handle, and spare tire
from the vehicle.
5.Block both the front and rear of the
wheel that is diagonally opposite
the jack position.
6.Insert the screwdriver into the
groove of the wheel cap and pry
gently to remove the wheel cap.
OKH063008N OKH063009N
Changing a tire
• To prevent vehicle movement
while changing a tire, always
set the parking brake fully,
and always block the wheel
diagonally opposite the wheel
being changed.
• We recommend that the
wheels of the vehicle be
blocked, and that no person
remain in a vehicle that is
being jacked.
WARNING
6-20
What to do in an emergency
7.Loosen the wheel lug nuts counter-
clockwise one turn each in
sequence of number, but do not
remove any nut until the tire has
been raised off the ground.
8.Place the jack at the front (1) or
rear (2) jacking position closest to
the tire you are changing. Place the
jack at the designated locations
under the frame. The jacking posi-
tions are plates welded to the
frame with two tabs and a raised
dot to index with the jack.
OKH063010N
OKH063026N
OKH063011N
Place the jack not to damage to
the plastic guard. If you place
the jack at the plastic guard and
jack up the vehicle, the plastic
guard may be damaged.
CAUTION
Jack location
To reduce the possibility of
injury, be sure to use only the
jack provided with the vehicle
and in the correct jack position;
never use any other part of the
vehicle for jack support.
WARNING
What to do in an emergency
6
6-21
9.Insert the jack handle into the jack
and turn it clockwise, raising the
vehicle until the tire just clears the
ground. This measurement is
approximately 1.2 in (30 mm).
Before removing the wheel lug
nuts, make sure the vehicle is sta-
ble and that there is no chance for
movement or slippage.
10. Loosen the wheel nuts and
remove them with your fingers.
Slide the wheel off the studs and
lay it flat so it cannot roll away.
To put the wheel on the hub, pick
up the spare tire, line up the
holes with the studs and slide
the wheel onto them. If this is dif-
ficult, tip the wheel slightly and
get the top hole in the wheel
lined up with the top stud. Then
jiggle the wheel back and forth
until the wheel can be slid over
the other studs.
OKH063012N
Wheels may have sharp edges.
Handle them carefully to avoid
possible severe injury. Before
putting the wheel into place, be
sure that there is nothing on the
hub or wheel (such as mud, tar,
gravel, etc.) that prevents the
wheel from fitting solidly
against the hub.
If there is, remove it. If there is
not good contact on the mount-
ing surface between the wheel
and hub, the wheel nuts could
come loose and cause the loss
of a wheel. Loss of a wheel may
result in loss of control of the
vehicle. This may cause serious
injury or death.
WARNING
6-22
What to do in an emergency
11. To reinstall the wheel, hold it on
the studs, put the wheel nuts on
the studs and tighten them finger
tight. The nuts should be installed
with their tapered small diameter
ends directed inward. Jiggle the
tire to be sure it is completely
seated, then tighten the nuts as
much as possible with your fin-
gers again.
12. Lower the vehicle to the ground
by turning the wheel nut wrench
counterclockwise.
Then position the wrench as shown
in the drawing and tighten the wheel
nuts. Be sure the socket is seated
completely over the nut. Do not stand
on the wrench handle or use an
extension pipe over the wrench han-
dle. Go around the wheel tightening
every other nut until they are all tight.
Then double-check each nut for
tightness. After changing wheels,
have an authorized K900 Kia dealer
tighten the wheel nuts to their proper
torque as soon as possible.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
Steel wheel & aluminum alloy wheel:
65~79 lb·ft (9~11 kg·m)
If you have a tire gauge, remove the
valve cap and check the air pressure.
If the pressure is lower than recom-
mended, drive slowly to the nearest
service station and inflate to the cor-
rect pressure. If it is too high, adjust
it until it is correct. Always reinstall
the valve cap after checking or
adjusting tire pressure. If the cap is
not replaced, air may leak from the
tire. If you lose a valve cap, buy
another and install it as soon as pos-
sible.
After you have changed wheels,
always secure the flat tire in its place
and return the jack and tools to their
proper storage locations.
OKH063013N
What to do in an emergency
6
6-23
To prevent the jack, jack handle,
wheel lug nut wrench and spare tire
from rattling while the vehicle is in
motion, store them properly.
Important - use of compact spare
tire
Your vehicle is equipped with a com-
pact spare tire. This compact spare
tire takes up less space than a regu-
lar-size tire. This tire is smaller than a
conventional tire and is designed for
temporary use only.
Your vehicle has metric threads
on the wheel studs and nuts.
Make certain during wheel
removal that the same nuts that
were removed are reinstalled -
or, if replaced, that nuts with
metric threads and the same
chamfer configuration are used.
Installation of a non-metric
thread nut on a metric stud or
vice-versa will not secure the
wheel to the hub properly and
will damage the stud so that it
must be replaced.
Note that most lug nuts do not
have metric threads. Be sure to
use extreme care in checking
for thread style before installing
aftermarket lug nuts or wheels.
If in doubt, consult an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer.
CAUTION
• You should drive carefully
when the compact spare is in
use. The compact spare should
be replaced by the proper con-
ventional tire and rim at the
first opportunity.
• The operation of this vehicle is
not recommended with more
than one compact spare tire in
use at the same time.
CAUTION
Wheel studs
If the studs are damaged, they
may lose their ability to retain
the wheel. This could lead to the
loss of the wheel and a collision
resulting in serious injuries.
WARNING
Inadequate spare tire
pressure
Check the inflation pressures
as soon as possible after
installing the spare tire. Adjust
it to the specified pressure, if
necessary. Refer to “Tires and
wheels” section 8.
WARNING
6-24
What to do in an emergency
The compact spare should be inflat-
ed to 60 psi (420 kPa).
✽ NOTICE
Check the inflation pressure after
installing the spare tire. Adjust it to
the specified pressure, as necessary.
When using a compact spare tire,
observe the following precautions:
• Under no circumstances should
you exceed 50 mph (80 km/h); a
higher speed could damage the
tire.
• Ensure that you drive slowly
enough for the road conditions to
avoid all hazards. Any road hazard,
such as a pothole or debris, could
seriously damage the compact
spare.
• Any continuous road use of this tire
could result in tire failure, loss of
vehicle control, and possible per-
sonal injury.
• Do not exceed the vehicle’s maxi-
mum load rating or the load-carry-
ing capacity shown on the sidewall
of the compact spare tire.
• Avoid driving over obstacles. The
compact spare tire diameter is
smaller than the diameter of a con-
ventional tire and reduces the
ground clearance approximately 1
inch (25 mm), which could result in
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not take this vehicle through an
automatic car wash while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
• Do not use tire chains on the com-
pact spare tire. Because of the
smaller size, a tire chain will not fit
properly. This could damage the
vehicle and result in loss of the
chain.
• Do not use the compact spare tire
on any other vehicle because this
tire has been designed especially
for your vehicle.
• The compact spare tire’s tread life
is shorter than a regular tire.
Inspect your compact spare tire
regularly and replace worn com-
pact spare tires with the same size
and design, mounted on the same
wheel.
The compact spare tire is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
compact spare at speeds over
50 mph (80 km/h). The original
tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as is possible
to avoid failure of the spare
possibly leading to personal
injury or death.
WARNING
• The compact spare tire should not
be used on any other wheels, nor
should standard tires, snow tires,
wheel covers or trim rings be used
with the compact spare wheel. If
such use is attempted, damage to
these items or other car compo-
nents may occur.
• Do not use more than one compact
spare tire at a time.
• Do not tow a trailer while the com-
pact spare tire is installed.
What to do in an emergency
6
6-25
When the original tire and wheel
are repaired and reinstalled on
the vehicle, the wheel nut torque
must be set correctly to prevent
wheel vibration. The correct
wheel nut tightening torque is
65~79 lb-ft (9~11 kg.m).
CAUTION
Jack label
1.Model Name
2.Maximum allowable load
3.When using the jack, set your park-
ing brake.
4.When using the jack, stop the
engine.
5.Do not get under a vehicle that is
supported by a jack.
6.The designated locations under
the frame
7.When supporting the vehicle, the
base plate of jack must be vertical
under the lifting point.
8.Shift into Reverse gear on vehicles
with manual transmission or move
the shift lever to the P position on
vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion.
9.The jack should be used on firm
level ground.
10. Jack manufacture
11. Production date
6-26
What to do in an emergency
OHYK064001
OHYK064002
■ Type A
■ Example
■ Type B
❈ The actual Jack label in the vehicle may differ from the illustration. For
more detailed specifications, refer to the label attached to the jack.
What to do in an emergency
6
6-27
TOWING
Towing service
If emergency towing is necessary,
we recommend having it done by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer or a
commercial tow-truck service.
Proper lifting and towing procedures
are necessary to prevent damage to
the vehicle. The use of wheel dollies
or flatbed is recommended.
It is acceptable to tow the vehicle
with the front wheels on the ground
(without dollies) and the rear wheels
off the ground.
If any of the loaded wheels or sus-
pension components are damaged
or the vehicle is being towed with the
rear wheels on the ground, use a
towing dolly under the rear wheels.
When being towed by a commercial
tow truck and wheel dollies are not
used, the rear of the vehicle should
always be lifted, not the front.
• Ensure any metal parts on the tie-
down straps do not contact painted
surfaces or the face of the wheels.
• Do not place straps over the body
panels or through the wheels.
OKH064014N
A
B
C
dolly
OKH063027N
Attaching straps to the chasis,
suspension or other parts of
the body can cause damage.
CAUTION
6-28
What to do in an emergency
When towing your vehicle in an
emergency without wheel dollies :
1.Set the Engine Start/Stop Button in
the ACC position.
2.Place the shift lever in N (Neutral).
3.Release the parking brake.
OKH063016N
OKH063015N
• Do not tow the vehicle with
the rear wheels on the ground
as this may cause damage to
the vehicle.
• Do not tow with sling-type
equipment. Use wheel lift or
flatbed equipment.
CAUTION
OKH053104N
Failure to place the shift lever in
N (Neutral) may cause internal
damage to the transaxle.
CAUTION
If the ECS malfunction indicator
illuminates when there is no air
in the suspension, the vehicle
height will be very low, so do not
drive the vehicle to protect it
from projections on the ground.
Take your vehicle to an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer by towing
the vehicle and have the system
checked. You should tow the
vehicle as shown the picture.
CAUTION
What to do in an emergency
6
6-29
When you load the vehicle onto the
tow truck, the loading angle(1) should
be smaller than 6°.
Removable towing hook
(if equipped)
1.Open the trunk, and remove the
towing hook from the tool case.
2.Remove the hole cover by pressing
the lower part of the cover on the
front or rear bumper.
3.Install the towing hook by turning it
clockwise into the hole until it is
fully secured.
4.Remove the towing hook and
install the cover after use.
OKH053105N
OKH063018N
OKH063019N
■ Front
■ Rear
6-30
What to do in an emergency
Emergency towing
If towing is necessary, have it
done by an authorized K900 Kia
dealer or a commercial tow truck
service.
If towing service is not available in an
emergency, your vehicle may be
temporarily towed using a cable or
chain secured to the emergency tow-
ing hook under the front (or rear) of
the vehicle. Use extreme caution
when towing the vehicle. A driver
must be in the vehicle to steer it and
operate the brakes.
Towing in this manner may be done
only on hard-surfaced roads for a
short distance and at low speeds.
Also, the wheels, axles, power train,
steering and brakes must all be in
good condition.
• Do not use the tow hooks to pull a
vehicle out of mud, sand or other
conditions from which the vehicle
cannot be driven out under its own
power.
• Avoid towing a vehicle heavier than
the vehicle doing the towing.
• The drivers of both vehicles should
communicate with each other fre-
quently.
• Before emergency towing, check
that the hook is not broken or dam-
aged.
• Fasten the towing cable or chain
securely to the hook.
• Do not jerk the hook. Apply steady
and even force.
• To avoid damaging the hook, do
not pull from the side or at a verti-
cal angle. Always pull straight
ahead.
OKH063020N
OKH063021N
■ Front
■ Rear
• Attach a towing strap to the
tow hook.
• Using a portion of the vehicle
other than the tow hooks for
towing may damage the body
of your vehicle.
• Use only a cable or chain
specifically intended for use
in towing vehicles. Securely
fasten the cable or chain to
the towing hook provided.
CAUTION
What to do in an emergency
6
6-31
• Use a towing strap less than 16
feet (5 m) long. Attach a white or
red cloth (about 12 inches (30 cm)
wide) in the middle of the strap for
easy visibility.
• Drive carefully so that the towing
strap is not loosened during tow-
ing.
✽ NOTICE
Emergency towing is not legal in all
states. Contact an authorized K900
Kia dealer and tow the vehicle.
Emergency towing precautions
• Place the transaxle shift lever in N
(Neutral).
• Release the parking brake.
• Press the brake pedal with more
force than normal since you will
have reduced brake performance.
• More steering effort will be
required because the power steer-
ing system will be disabled.
• If you are driving down a long hill,
the brakes may overheat and brake
performance will be reduced. Stop
often and let the brakes cool off.
Use extreme caution when tow-
ing the vehicle.
• Avoid sudden starts or erratic
driving maneuvers which
would place excessive stress
on the emergency towing
hook and towing cable or
chain. The hook and towing
cable or chain may break and
cause serious injury or dam-
age.
• If the disabled vehicle cannot
be moved, do not forcibly con-
tinue the towing. Contact an
authorized K900 Kia dealer or
a commercial tow truck serv-
ice for assistance.
• Tow the vehicle as straight
ahead as possible.
• Keep away from the vehicle
during towing.
WARNING
OKH063022N
Automatic transmission
• If the car is being towed with
all four wheels on the ground,
it can be towed only from the
front. Be sure that the trans-
mission is in neutral. Be sure
the steering is unlocked by
placing the Engine Start/Stop
Button in the ACC position. A
driver must be in the towed
vehicle to operate the steering
and brakes.
• To avoid serious damage to
the automatic transmission,
limit the vehicle speed to 10
mph (15 km/h) and drive less
than 1 mile (1.5 km) when tow-
ing.
• Before towing, check the auto-
matic transmission for fluid
leaks under your vehicle. If
the automatic transmission
fluid is leaking, flatbed equip-
ment or a towing dolly must
be used.
CAUTION
What to do in an emergency
6-32
7
Maintenance
Engine compartment ..........................................7-3
Maintenance services.........................................7-5
• Owner’s responsibility .............................................7-5
• Owner maintenance precautions ............................7-6
Owner maintenance............................................7-8
• Owner maintenance schedule ...............................7-8
Scheduled maintenance service.......................7-10
• Normal maintenance schedule .............................7-11
• Maintenance under severe usage conditions........7-27
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ..7-29
Engine oil ..........................................................7-32
• Checking the engine oil level ................................7-32
• Changing the engine oil and filter .........................7-33
Engine coolant ..................................................7-34
• Checking the coolant level ....................................7-34
• Changing the coolant ............................................7-36
Brake fluid .........................................................7-37
• Checking the brake fluid level ...............................7-37
Power steering fluid ..........................................7-38
• Checking the power steering fluid level.................7-38
• Checking the power steering hose........................7-38
Washer fluid ......................................................7-39
• Checking the washer fluid level.............................7-39
Air cleaner.........................................................7-40
• Filter replacement .................................................7-40
Climate control air filter.....................................7-43
• Filter inspection .....................................................7-43
• Filter replacement .................................................7-43
Wiper blades.....................................................7-45
• Blade inspection....................................................7-45
• Blade replacement ................................................7-45
Battery ..............................................................7-48
• For best battery service ........................................7-48
• Battery recharging by battery charger ..................7-50
• Battery recharging by vehicle................................7-50
• Reset items ...........................................................7-52
Tires and wheels...............................................7-53
• Tire care ................................................................7-53
• Recommended cold tire inflation pressures..........7-53
• Checking tire inflation pressure.............................7-54
• Tire rotation ...........................................................7-55
• Wheel alignment and tire balance.........................7-56
• Tire replacement ...................................................7-57
• Wheel replacement ...............................................7-58
• Tire traction ...........................................................7-58
• Tire maintenance...................................................7-58
• Tire sidewall labeling .............................................7-59
• Low aspect ratio tire..............................................7-63
7
7
• Tire terminology and definitions ............................7-64
• All season tires .....................................................7-66
• Summer tires ........................................................7-66
• Snow tires..............................................................7-66
• Tire chains.............................................................7-67
• Radial-ply tires ......................................................7-67
Fuses ................................................................7-68
• Instrument panel fuse replacement.......................7-69
• Engine compartment fuse replacement ................7-71
• Fuse/relay panel description .................................7-73
Light bulbs ........................................................7-87
• Front light bulb.......................................................7-88
• Side repeater light bulb replacement ...................7-90
• Rear combination light bulb replacement..............7-90
• High mounted stop light ........................................7-91
• License plate lamp replacement ...........................7-91
• Interior light bulb replacement...............................7-92
Appearance care ..............................................7-93
• Exterior care..........................................................7-93
• Interior care ...........................................................7-99
Emission control system.................................7-100
• Crankcase emission control system....................7-100
• Evaporative emission control (including orvr:
Onboard refueling vapor recovery) system......7-100
• Exhaust emission control system........................7-101
California perchlorate notice ...........................7-104
Maintenance
7
7-3
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
1. Engine oil dipstick
2. Engine oil filler cap
3. Engine coolant reservoir
4. Radiator cap
5. Brake fluid reservoir
6. Power steering fluid reservoir
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
8. Air cleaner
9. Fuse box
10. Jumper terminal
OKH013007N
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
❈ The battery is in the trunk.
■
3.8L Engine
7-4
Maintenance
OKH013006N
1. Engine coolant reservoir
2. Radiator cap
3. Brake fluid reservoir
4. Air cleaner
5. Engine oil dipstick
6. Engine oil filler cap
7. Windshield washer fluid reservoir
8. Fuse box
9. Power steering fluid reservoir
10. Jumper terminal
❈ The actual engine compartment in the vehicle may differ from the illustration.
❈ The battery is in the trunk.
■ 5.0L Engine
Maintenance
7
7-5
MAINTENANCE SERVICES
You should exercise the utmost care
to prevent damage to your vehicle
and injury to yourself whenever per-
forming any maintenance or inspec-
tion procedures.
Should you have any doubts con-
cerning the inspection or servicing of
your vehicle, we strongly recom-
mend that you have an authorized
K900 Kia dealer perform this work.
An authorized K900 Kia dealer has
factory-trained technicians and gen-
uine Kia parts to service your vehicle
properly. For expert advice and qual-
ity service, see an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
Inadequate, incomplete or insuffi-
cient servicing may result in opera-
tional problems with your vehicle that
could lead to vehicle damage, an
accident, or personal injury.
Owner’s responsibility
✽ NOTICE
Maintenance Service and Record
Retention are the owner's responsi-
bility.
You should retain documents that
show proper maintenance has been
performed on your vehicle in accor-
dance with the scheduled mainte-
nance service charts shown on the
following pages. You need this infor-
mation to establish your compliance
with the servicing and maintenance
requirements of your vehicle war-
ranties.
Detailed warranty information is pro-
vided in your Service Passport.
Repairs and adjustments required as
a result of improper maintenance or
a lack of required maintenance are
not covered.
We recommend you have your vehi-
cle maintained and repaired by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
An authorized K900 Kia dealer
meets Kia’s high service quality stan-
dards and receives technical support
from Kia in order to provide you with
a high level of service satisfaction.
7-6
Maintenance
Owner maintenance precau-
tions
Improper or incomplete service may
result in problems. This section gives
instructions only for the maintenance
items that are easy to perform.
As explained earlier in this section,
several procedures can be done only
by an authorized K900 Kia dealer
with special tools.
✽ NOTICE
Improper owner maintenance dur-
ing the warranty period may affect
warranty coverage. For details, read
the separate Warranty &
Maintenance book provided with
the vehicle. If you're unsure about
any servicing or maintenance proce-
dure, have it done by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
Maintenance work
• Performing maintenance work
on a vehicle can be danger-
ous. You can be seriously
injured while performing
some maintenance proce-
dures. If you lack sufficient
knowledge and experience or
the proper tools and equip-
ment to do the work, have it
done by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
• Working under the hood with
the engine running is danger-
ous. It becomes even more
dangerous when you wear
jewelry or loose clothing.
These can become entangled
in moving parts and result in
injury.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
Therefore, if you must run the
engine while working under
the hood, make certain that
you remove all jewelry (espe-
cially rings, bracelets, watch-
es, and necklaces) and all
neckties, scarves, and similar
loose clothing before getting
near the engine or cooling
fans.
Maintenance
7
7-7
• Do not put heavy objects or
apply excessive force on top
of the engine cover (if
equipped) or fuel related
parts.
• When you inspect the fuel
system (fuel lines and fuel
injection devices), we recom-
mend that you contact an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
• Do not drive long time with
the engine cover (if equipped)
removed.
• When checking the engine
room, do not go near fire.
• Fuel, washer fluid, etc. are
flammable oils that may cause
fire.
• Before touching the battery,
ignition cables and electrical
wiring, you should disconnect
the battery "-" terminal. You
may get an electric shock
from the electric current.
(Continued)
CAUTION
(Continued)
• When you remove the interior
trim cover with a flat head (-)
driver, be careful not to dam-
age the cover.
• Be careful when you replace
and clean bulbs to avoid
burns or electrical shock.
7-8
Maintenance
OWNER MAINTENANCE
The following lists are vehicle checks
and inspections that should be per-
formed by the owner or an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer at the frequen-
cies indicated to help ensure safe,
dependable operation of your vehi-
cle.
Any adverse conditions should be
brought to the attention of your deal-
er as soon as possible.
These Owner Maintenance Checks
are generally not covered by war-
ranties and you may be charged for
labor, parts and lubricants used.
Owner maintenance schedule
When you stop for fuel:
• Check the engine oil level.
• Check coolant level in coolant
reservoir.
• Check the windshield washer fluid
level.
• Look for low or under-inflated tires.
While operating your vehicle:
• Note any changes in the sound of
the exhaust or any smell of
exhaust fumes in the vehicle.
• Check for vibrations in the steering
wheel. Notice any increased steer-
ing effort or looseness in the steer-
ing wheel, or change in its straight-
ahead position.
• Notice if your vehicle constantly
turns slightly or “pulls” to one side
when traveling on smooth, level
road.
• When stopping, listen and check
for unusual sounds, pulling to one
side, increased brake pedal travel
or “hard-to-push” brake pedal.
• If any slipping or changes in the
operation of your transmission
occurs, check the transmission
fluid level.
• Check automatic transmission P
(Park) function.
• Check parking brake.
• Check for fluid leaks under your
vehicle (water dripping from the air
conditioning system during or after
use is normal).
Be careful when checking your
engine coolant level when the
engine is hot. Scalding hot
coolant and steam may blow
out under pressure. This could
cause burns or other serious
injury.
WARNING
Maintenance
7
7-9
At least monthly:
• Check coolant level in the engine
coolant reservoir.
• Check the operation of all exterior
lights, including the stoplights, turn
signals and hazard warning flash-
ers.
• Check the inflation pressures of all
tires including the spare.
At least twice a year
(i.e., every Spring and Fall):
• Check radiator, heater and air con-
ditioning hoses for leaks or dam-
age.
• Check windshield washer spray
and wiper operation. Clean wiper
blades with clean cloth dampened
with washer fluid.
• Check headlight alignment.
• Check muffler, exhaust pipes,
shields and clamps.
• Check the lap/shoulder belts for
wear and function.
• Check for worn tires and loose
wheel lug nuts.
At least once a year:
• Clean body and door drain holes.
• Lubricate door hinges and checks,
and hood hinges.
• Lubricate door and hood locks and
latches.
• Lubricate door rubber weather-
strips.
• Check the air conditioning system.
• Check the power steering fluid
level.
• Inspect and lubricate automatic
transmission linkage and controls.
• Clean battery and terminals.
• Check the brake fluid level.
7-10
Maintenance
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE SERVICE
Follow Normal Maintenance Schedule
if the vehicle is usually operated where
none of the following conditions apply.
If any of the following conditions apply,
follow Maintenance Under Severe
Usage Conditions.
• Repeated short distance driving.
• Driving in dusty conditions or
sandy areas.
• Extensive use of brakes.
• Driving in areas where salt or other
corrosive materials are being used.
• Driving on rough or muddy roads.
• Driving in mountainous areas.
• Extended periods of idling or low
speed operation.
• Driving for a prolonged period in
cold temperatures and/or extreme-
ly humid climates.
• More than 50% driving in heavy city
traffic during hot weather above
90°F (32°C).
If your vehicle is operated under the
above conditions, you should inspect,
replace or refill more frequently than
the following Normal Maintenance
Schedule. After 120 months or
150,000 miles (240,000 km) continue
to follow the prescribed maintenance
intervals.
Maintenance
7
7-11
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The following maintenance services must be performed to ensure good emission control and performance. Keep
receipts for all vehicle emission services to protect your warranty. Where both mileage and time are shown, the fre-
quency of service is determined by whichever occurs first.
*
1
: If TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline is not available, one
bottle of additive is recommended. Additives are avail-
able from your authorized K900 Kia dealer along with
information on how to use them. Do not mix other
additives.
*
2
: Fuel filter & Fuel tank air filter are considered to be
maintenance free but periodic inspection is recom-
mended for this maintenance schedule depends on
fuel quality. If there are some important safety matters
like fuel flow restriction, surging, loss of power, hard
starting problem etc, replace the fuel filter immediate-
ly regardless of maintenance schedule and consult
an authorized K900 Kia dealer for details.
*
3
: Rear differential oil should be changed anytime rear
differential have been submerged in water.
*
4
: The drive belt should be replaced when cracks occur
or tension is reduced excessively.
*
5
: Use only the specified automatic transmission fluid.
(Refer to "Recommended lubricants and capacities"
in section 8 or the label in the engine room.)
*
6
: Inspect for excessive tappet noise and/or engine
vibration and adjust if necessary.
7-12
Maintenance
7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 12 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 12 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pad, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pad
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump and hoses
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
(Continued)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
Maintenance
7
7-13
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)
22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 18 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(22,500 miles (36,000 km) or 36 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
7-14
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
2
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump and hoses
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)
❑ Replace fuel tank air filter *
2
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 48 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
Maintenance
7
7-15
37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 30 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect rear differential oil *
3
(40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(37,500 miles (60,000 km) or 60 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 36 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump and hoses
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
(Continued)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
7-16
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(45,000 miles (72,000 km) or 72 months)
52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 42 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(52,500 miles (84,000 km) or 84 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
Maintenance
7
7-17
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 48 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect valve clearance (3.8L) *
6
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *
4
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump and hoses
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)
❑ Replace fuel tank air filter *
2
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 96 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
7-18
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 54 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(67,500 miles (108,000 km) or 108 months)
75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)*
4
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
(Continued)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
Maintenance
7
7-19
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump and hoses
❑ Inspect rear differential oil*
3
(80,000 miles (128,000 km) or 96 months)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 120 months)
82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 66 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(82,500 miles (132,000 km) or 132 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
7-20
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 72 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)*
4
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump and hoses
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)
❑ Replace fuel tank air filter *
2
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(90,000 miles (144,000 km) or 144 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
Maintenance
7
7-21
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 78 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(97,500 miles (156,000 km) or 156 months)
❑ Replace spark plugs (iridium coated)
105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months) *
4
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump and hoses
(Continued)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
7-22
Maintenance
(Continued)
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 168 months)
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 90 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(112,500 miles (180,000 km) or 180 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
Maintenance
7
7-23
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 96 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect fuel filter *
2
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)*
4
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump and hoses
❑ Inspect rear differential oil *
3
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 144 months)
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace fuel tank air filter *
2
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 192 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
7-24
Maintenance
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 102 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(127,500 miles (204,000 km) or 204 months)
135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 108 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)*
4
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
(Continued)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
Maintenance
7
7-25
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump and hoses
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(135,000 miles (216,000 km) or 216 months)
142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 114 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect air cleaner filter
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap
❑ Inspect fuel tank air filter
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(142,500 miles (228,000 km) or 228 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
7-26
Maintenance
No check, No service required
❑ Automatic transmission fluid *
5
NORMAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE (CONT.)
150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 120 months
❑ Rotate tires
❑ Inspect vacuum hose
❑ Inspect air conditioning refrigerant
❑ Inspect brake hoses and lines
❑ Inspect drive shafts and boots
❑ Inspect exhaust pipe and muffler
❑ Inspect fuel lines, fuel hoses and connections
❑ Inspect front brake disc/pads, calipers
❑ Inspect propeller shaft
❑ Inspect rear brake disc/pads
❑ Inspect steering gear box, linkage & boots/lower arm ball
joint, upper arm ball joint
❑ Inspect suspension mounting bolts
❑ Inspect brake fluid
❑ Inspect parking brake
❑ Inspect vapor hose and fuel filler cap, fuel tank
❑ Inspect power steering fluid
❑ Inspect EHPS (Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering) motor
pump, belt and hoses
❑ Inspect rear differential oil *
3
(160,000 miles (256,000 km) or 192 months)
(Continued)
(Continued)
❑ Inspect drive belts
(First, 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or 72 months
after every 15,000 miles (24,000 km) or 24 months)*
4
❑ Replace air cleaner filter
❑ Replace climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
❑ Replace coolant
(First, 120,000 miles (192,000 km) or 120 months
after every 30,000 miles (48,000 km) or 24 months)
❑ Replace engine oil and filter
(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)
❑ Replace fuel filter *
2
❑ Replace fuel tank air filter *
2
❑ Add fuel additives *
1
(150,000 miles (240,000 km) or 240 months)
❈Inspect : Inspect and if necessary, adjust, correct, clean
or replace.
Maintenance
7
7-27
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE USAGE CONDITIONS
The following items must be serviced more frequently on cars normally used under severe driving conditions.
Refer to the chart below for the appropriate maintenance intervals.
R : Replace I : Inspect and, after inspection, clean, adjust, repair or replace if necessary
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Engine oil and filter R
Every 3,750 miles (6,000 km) or
6 months
A, B, C, D, E,
F, G, H, I, J, K
Air cleaner filter I More frequently C, E
Spark plugs R More frequently A, B, H, I, K
Automatic transmission fluid R Every 60,000 miles (96,000 km)
A, C, D, E, F,
G, H, I
Front brake disc/pads, calipers I More frequently C, D, G, H
Rear brake disc /pads I More frequently C, D, G, H
Parking brake I More frequently C, D, G, H
7-28
Maintenance
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
A - Repeatedly driving short distance of less than 5 miles
(8 km) in normal temperature or less than 10 miles
(16 km) in freezing temperature
B - Extensive engine idling or low speed driving for long
distances
C - Driving on rough, dusty, muddy, unpaved, graveled or
salt- spread roads
D - Driving in areas using salt or other corrosive materi-
als or in very cold weather
E - Driving in sandy areas
F - Driving in heavy traffic area over 90°F (32°C)
G- Driving on uphill, downhill, or mountain road
H - Towing a Trailer, or using a camper, or roof rack
I - Driving as a patrol car, taxi, other commercial use or
vehicle towing
J - Driving over 106 mph (170 km/h)
K - Frequently driving in stop-and-go conditions
MAINTENANCE ITEM
MAINTENANCE
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE INTERVALS
DRIVING
CONDITION
Steering gear box, linkage & boots/
lower arm ball joint, upper arm ball joint
I More frequently C, D, E, F, G, H, I
Drive shafts and boots I
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
6 months
C, D, E, F, G,
H, I, J
Rear differential oil R Every 80,000 miles (128,000 km) C, G, H, I, J
Climate control air filter
(for evaporator and blower unit)
R More frequently C, E
Propeller shaft I
Every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or 6
months
C, E
Maintenance
7
7-29
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Engine oil and filter
The engine oil and filter should be
changed at the intervals specified in
the maintenance schedule. If the car
is being driven in severe conditions,
more frequent oil and filter changes
are required.
Drive belts
Inspect all drive belts for evidence of
cuts, cracks, excessive wear or oil
saturation and replace if necessary.
Fuel filter
A clogged filter can limit the speed at
which the vehicle may be driven,
damage the emission system and
cause multiple issues such as hard
starting. If an excessive amount of
foreign matter accumulates in the
fuel tank, the filter may require
replacement more frequently.
After installing a new filter, run the
engine for several minutes, and
check for leaks at the connections.
Fuel filters should be installed by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Fuel lines, fuel hoses and con-
nections
Check the fuel lines, fuel hoses and
connections for leakage and dam-
age. Have an authorized K900 Kia
dealer replace any damaged or leak-
ing parts immediately.
Vapor hose and fuel filler cap
The vapor hose and fuel filler cap
should be inspected at those inter-
vals specified in the maintenance
schedule. Make sure that a new
vapor hose or fuel filler cap is cor-
rectly replaced.
Air cleaner filter
A Genuine Kia air cleaner filter is
recommended when the filter is
replaced.
Spark plugs
Make sure to install new spark plugs
of the correct heat range.
7-30
Maintenance
Cooling system
Check cooling system components,
such as radiator, coolant reservoir,
hoses and connections for leakage
and damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Coolant
The coolant should be changed at
the intervals specified in the mainte-
nance schedule.
Automatic transaxle fluid
Automatic transaxle fluid should not
be checked under normal usage
conditions.
But in severe conditions, the fluid
should be changed at an authorized
K900 Kia dealer in accordance to the
scheduled maintenance at the begin-
ning of this chapter.
✽ NOTICE
Automatic transaxle fluid color is
basically red.
As the vehicle is driven, the auto-
matic transaxle fluid will begin to
look darker.
This is normal condition and you
should not judge the need to replace
the fluid based upon the changed
color.
The use of a non-specified fluid
could result in transmission
malfunction and failure.
Use only specified automatic
transmission fluid. (Refer to
“Recommended lubricants and
capacities” in section 8.)
CAUTION
Maintenance
7
7-31
Brake hoses and lines
Visually check for proper installation,
chafing, cracks, deterioration and
any leakage. Replace any deteriorat-
ed or damaged parts immediately.
Brake fluid
Check brake fluid level in the brake
fluid reservoir. The level should be
between “MIN” and “MAX” marks on
the side of the reservoir. Use only
hydraulic brake fluid conforming to
DOT 3 or DOT 4 specification.
Brake discs, pads, calipers
and rotors
Check the pads for excessive wear,
discs for run out and wear, and
calipers for fluid leakage.
For more information on checking
the pads or lining wear limit, we rec-
ommend you to refer to the Kia web-
site.
(http://www.kiatechinfo.com
)
Exhaust pipe and muffler
Visually inspect the exhaust pipes,
muffler and hangers for cracks, dete-
rioration, or damage. Start the
engine and listen carefully for any
exhaust gas leakage. Tighten con-
nections or replace parts as neces-
sary.
Suspension mounting bolts
Check the suspension connections
for looseness or damage. Retighten
to the specified torque.
Steering gear box, linkage &
boots/lower arm ball joint
With the vehicle stopped and engine
off, check for excessive free-play in
the steering wheel.
Check the linkage for bends or dam-
age. Check the dust boots and ball
joints for deterioration, cracks, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts.
Power steering pump, belt and
hoses
Check the power steering pump and
hoses for leakage and damage.
Replace any damaged or leaking
parts immediately. Inspect the power
steering belt (or drive belt) for evi-
dence of cuts, cracks, excessive
wear, oiliness and proper tension.
Replace or adjust it if necessary.
Drive shafts and boots
Check the drive shafts, boots and
clamps for cracks, deterioration, or
damage. Replace any damaged
parts and, if necessary, repack the
grease.
Air conditioning refrigerant
Check the air conditioning lines and
connections for leakage and dam-
age.
7-32
Maintenance
ENGINE OIL
Checking the engine oil level
1.Be sure the vehicle is on level
ground.
2.Start the engine and allow it to
reach normal operating tempera-
ture.
3.Turn the engine off and wait for a
few minutes (about 5 minutes) for
the oil to return to the oil pan.
4.Pull the dipstick out, wipe it clean,
and re-insert it fully.
5.Pull the dipstick out again and
check the level. The level should be
between F and L.
If it is near or at L, add enough oil to
bring the level to F. Do not overfill.
Use a funnel to help prevent oil
from being spilled on engine com-
ponents.
Use only the specified engine oil.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
and capacities” in section 8.)
OKH073002N
OKH073003N
• Do not overfill with engine oil.
Engine damage may result.
• Do not spill engine oil, when
adding or changing engine oil.
If you spill engine oil in the
engine room, wipe it off imme-
diately.
CAUTION
Radiator hose
Be very careful not to touch the
radiator hose when checking or
adding the engine oil as it may
be hot enough to burn you.
WARNING
Maintenance
7
7-33
Changing the engine oil and
filter
Have engine oil and filter changed by
an authorized K900 Kia dealer
according to the Maintenance
Schedule at the beginning of this sec-
tion.
Engine oil contains chemicals
known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects
and reproductive harm. Used
engine oil may cause irritation
or cancer of the skin if left in
contact with the skin for pro-
longed periods of time. Always
protect your skin by washing
your hands thoroughly with
soap and warm water as soon
as possible after handling used
oil.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION
65 WARNING
7-34
Maintenance
ENGINE COOLANT
The high-pressure cooling system
has a reservoir filled with year-round
antifreeze coolant. The reservoir is
filled at the factory.
Check the antifreeze protection and
coolant level at least once a year, at
the beginning of the winter season,
and before traveling to a colder cli-
mate.
Checking the coolant level
Removing radia-
tor cap
• Never attempt to remove the
radiator cap while the engine
is operating or hot. Doing so
might lead to cooling system
and engine damage and could
result in serious personal
injury from escaping hot
coolant or steam.
• Turn the engine off and wait
until it cools down. Use
extreme care when removing
the radiator cap. Wrap a thick
towel around it, and turn it
counterclockwise slowly to
the first stop. Step back while
the pressure is released from
the cooling system.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
When you are sure all the
pressure has been released,
press down on the cap, using
a thick towel, and continue
turning counterclockwise to
remove it.
• Even if the engine is not oper-
ating, do not remove the radi-
ator cap or the drain plug
while the engine and radiator
are hot. Hot coolant and
steam may still blow out
under pressure, causing seri-
ous injury.
Maintenance
7
7-35
Check the condition and connections
of all cooling system hoses and
heater hoses. Replace any swollen
or deteriorated hoses.
The coolant level should be filled
between F and L marks on the side
of the coolant reservoir when the
engine is cool.
If the coolant level is low, add enough
distilled (deionized) water. Bring the
level to F, but do not overfill. If fre-
quent additions are required, see an
authorized K900 Kia dealer for a
cooling system inspection.
Recommended engine coolant
• When adding coolant, use only
deionized water, distilled water or
soft water for your vehicle and
never mix hard water in the coolant
filled at the factory. An improper
coolant mixture can result in seri-
ous malfunction or engine dam-
age.
• The engine in your vehicle has alu-
minum engine parts and must be
protected by an ethylene-glycol-
based coolant to prevent corrosion
and freezing.
• DO NOT USE alcohol or methanol
coolant or mix them with the spec-
ified coolant.
• Do not use a solution that contains
more than 60% antifreeze or less
than 35% antifreeze, which would
reduce the effectiveness of the
solution.
• 50% water and 50% antifreeze mix
is the easiest to mix together as it
will be same quantity of each and
can work reasonable for most situ-
ations.
OKH073004N
The electric motor
(cooling fan) is con-
trolled by engine
coolant temperature,
refrigerant pressure
and vehicle speed. It may some-
times operate even when the
engine is not running. Use
extreme caution when working
near the blades of the cooling
fan so that you are not injured
by a rotating fan blades. As the
engine coolant temperature
decreases, the electric motor
will automatically shut off. This
is a normal condition.
If your vehicle is equipped with
GDI, the electric motor (cooling
fan) may operate until you dis-
connect the negative battery
cable.
WARNING
7-36
Maintenance
For mixture percentage, refer to the
following table.
✽ NOTICE
If in doubt about mix ratio 50%
water and 50% antifreeze mix is the
easiest to mix together as it will be
same quantity of each. It can work
reasonable for most temperature
range of -31°F and higher.
Changing the coolant
Have coolant changed by an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer according to
the Maintenance Schedule at the
beginning of this section.
OKH073005N
5°F (-15°C) 35 65
-13°F (-25°C) 40 60
-31°F (-35°C) 50 50
-49°F (-45°C) 60 40
Ambient
Temperature
Mixture Percentage (volume)
Antifreeze
Water
Radiator cap
Do not remove the radiator cap
when the engine and radiator
are hot. Scalding hot coolant
and steam may blow out under
pressure causing serious injury.
WARNING
Put a thick cloth around the
radiator cap before refilling the
coolant in order to prevent the
coolant from overflowing into
engine parts such as the gener-
ator.
CAUTION
Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
WARNING
Maintenance
7
7-37
BRAKE FLUID
Checking the brake fluid level
Check the fluid level in the reservoir
periodically. The fluid level should be
between MAX and MIN marks on the
side of the reservoir.
Before removing the reservoir cap
and adding brake fluid, clean the
area around the reservoir cap thor-
oughly to prevent brake fluid contam-
ination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level. The level will fall with
accumulated mileage. This is a nor-
mal condition associated with the
wear of the brake linings. If the fluid
level is excessively low, have the
brake system checked by an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer.
Use only the specified brake fluid.
(Refer to “Recommended lubricants
or capacities” in section 8.)
Never mix different types of fluid.
OKH073006N
Loss of brake fluid
In the event the brake system
requires frequent additions of
fluid, the vehicle should be
inspected by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
WARNING
Brake fluid
When changing and adding
brake fluid, handle it carefully.
Do not let it come in contact
with your eyes. If brake fluid
should come in contact with
your eyes, immediately flush
them with a large quantity of
fresh tap water. Have your eyes
examined by a doctor as soon
as possible.
WARNING
Do not allow brake fluid to con-
tact the vehicle's body paint, as
paint damage will result. Brake
fluid, which has been exposed
to open air for an extended time
should never be used as its
quality cannot be guaranteed. It
should be disposed of properly.
Don't put in the wrong kind of
fluid. A few drops of mineral-
based oil, such as engine oil, in
your brake system can damage
brake system parts.
CAUTION
7-38
Maintenance
POWER STEERING FLUID
Checking the power steering
fluid level
With the vehicle on level ground,
check the fluid level in the power
steering reservoir periodically. The
fluid should be between MAX and
MIN marks on the side of the gauge
at the normal temperature.
Before adding power steering fluid,
thoroughly clean the area around the
reservoir cap to prevent power steer-
ing fluid contamination.
If the level is low, add fluid to the
MAX level.
In the event the power steering sys-
tem requires frequent addition of
fluid, the vehicle should be inspected
by an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
✽ NOTICE
Check that the fluid level is in the
"HOT" range on the gauge. If the
fluid is cold, check that it is in the
"COLD" range.
Use only the specified power steer-
ing fluid. (Refer to "Recommended
lubricants or capacities" in section
8.)
Checking the power steering
hose
Check the connections for oil leaks,
damage and twists in the power
steering hose before driving.
• To avoid damage to the power
steering pump, do not operate
the vehicle for prolonged peri-
ods with a low power steering
fluid level.
• Never start the engine when
the reservoir tank is empty.
• When adding fluid, be careful
that dirt does not get into the
tank.
• Too little fluid can result in
increased steering effort
and/or noise from the power
steering system.
• The use of the non-specified
fluid could reduce the effec-
tiveness of the power steering
system and cause damage to
it.
CAUTION
OKH073007N
Maintenance
7
7-39
WASHER FLUID
Checking the washer fluid
level
The reservoir is translucent so that
you can check the level with a quick
visual inspection.
Check the fluid level in the washer
fluid reservoir and add fluid if neces-
sary. Plain water may be used if
washer fluid is not available.
However, use washer solvent with
antifreeze characteristics in cold cli-
mates to prevent freezing.
OKH073008N
Coolant
• Do not use radiator coolant or
antifreeze in the washer fluid
reservoir.
• Radiator coolant can severely
obscure visibility when
sprayed on the windshield
and may cause loss of vehicle
control or damage to paint
and body trim.
• Windshield washer fluid
agents contain some amounts
of alcohol and can be flamma-
ble under certain circum-
stances. Do not allow sparks
or flame to contact the washer
fluid or the washer fluid reser-
voir. Damage to the vehicle or
occupants could occur.
• Windshield washer fluid is
poisonous to humans and
animals. Do not drink and
avoid contacting windshield
washer fluid. Serious injury or
death could occur.
WARNING
7-40
Maintenance
AIR CLEANER
Filter replacement
It must be replaced when necessary,
and should not be washed.
You can clean the filter when inspect-
ing the air cleaner element.
Clean the filter by using compressed
air.
Main air cleaner
1.Lift the end of strip (1) up.
2.Press the fastener head with screw
driver and then pull the fastener
out.
3.Lift the rear portion of small service
cover (2) up and then remove the
service cover.
(A) : for assemble
(B) : for remove
4.Press the fastener head with screw
driver and then pull the fastener
out from main service cover (3).
5.Pull the main service cover over
0.28 in (7 mm) to toward the front
of the vehicle.
6.Lift the main service cover up and
then remove the main service
cover. Be careful not to damage
the holder under the main service
cover.
OKH073009N
OKH073010N
■ Main air cleaner
■ Chamber air cleaner
OKH073052N
OKH073051N
A
B
Maintenance
7
7-41
7.Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the cover.
8.Wipe the inside of the air cleaner.
9.Replace the air cleaner filter.
10. Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
Chamber air cleaner
1.Loosen the air cleaner cover
attaching clips and open the cover.
OKH073011N
OKH073053N
OKH073012N
7-42
Maintenance
2.Replace the air cleaner filter after
pulling up the locking tab (1).
3.Lock the cover with the cover
attaching clips.
Replace the filter according to the
Maintenance Schedule.
If the vehicle is operated in extreme-
ly dusty or sandy areas, replace the
element more often than the usual
recommended intervals. (Refer to
“Maintenance under severe usage
conditions” in this section.)
OKH073013N
• Do not drive with the air clean-
er removed; this will result in
excessive engine wear.
• When removing the air clean-
er filter, be careful that dust or
dirt does not enter the air
intake, or damage may result.
• Use a Kia genuine part. Use of
non-genuine parts could dam-
age the air flow sensor.
CAUTION
Maintenance
7
7-43
CLIMATE CONTROL AIR FILTER
Filter inspection
The climate control air filter should
be replaced every 15,000 miles
(24,000 km). If the vehicle is operat-
ed in severely air-polluted cities or on
dusty rough roads for a long period,
it should be inspected more fre-
quently and replaced earlier. When
you replace the climate control air fil-
ter, replace it performing the follow-
ing procedure, and be careful to
avoid damaging other components.
Filter replacement
1.With the glove box open, remove
the stoppers on both sides to allow
the glove box to hang freely on the
hinges.
2.Open the glove box and remove
the support strap.
OKH073015N
OKH073016N
7-44
Maintenance
3.Remove the climate control air fil-
ter cover while pressing the lock on
the left side of the cover.
4.Replace the climate control air fil-
ter.
5.Reassemble in the reverse order of
disassembly.
✽ NOTICE
When replacing the climate control
air filter install it properly.
Otherwise, the system may produce
noise and the effectiveness of the fil-
ter may be reduced.
OKH073017N OBH078017
Maintenance
7
7-45
WIPER BLADES
Blade inspection
✽ NOTICE
Commercial hot waxes applied by
automatic car washes have been
known to make the windshield diffi-
cult to clean.
Contamination of either the wind-
shield or the wiper blades with for-
eign matter can reduce the effective-
ness of the windshield wipers.
Common sources of contamination
are insects, tree sap, and hot wax
treatments used by some commer-
cial car washes. If the blades are not
wiping properly, clean both the win-
dow and the blades with a good
cleaner or mild detergent, and rinse
thoroughly with clean water.
Blade replacement
When the wipers no longer clean
adequately, the blades may be worn
or cracked, and require replacement.
OKH073073N
To prevent damage to the wiper
blades, do not use gasoline,
kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents on or near them.
CAUTION
To prevent damage to the wiper
arms or other components, do
not attempt to move the wipers
manually.
CAUTION
The use of a non-specified
wiper blade could result in
wiper malfunction and failure.
CAUTION
7-46
Maintenance
Front windshield wiper blade
For your convenience, move the
windshield wiper blades to the serv-
ice position as follows;
Turn off the engine.
Move the wiper switch to the single
wiping (MIST) position within 20 sec-
onds and hold the switch until the
wiper blade is in the fully up position.
1.Raise the wiper arm.
2.Turn the wiper blade clip. Then lift
up the blade clip.
3.Push the clip (1) and push up the
wiper arm (2).
OKH073040N
OKH073074N
OKH073075N
OKH073076N
Do not allow the wiper arm to
fall against the windshield,
since it may chip or crack the
windshield.
CAUTION
4.Push down the wiper arm (3) and
install the new blade assembly in
the reverse order of removal.
5.Return the wiper arm on the wind-
shield.
OKH073077N
Maintenance
7
7-47
7-48
Maintenance
BATTERY
For best battery service
The battery is in the trunk.
• Keep the battery securely mount-
ed.
• Keep the battery top clean and dry.
• Keep the terminals and connec-
tions clean, tight, and coated with
petroleum jelly or terminal grease.
• Rinse any spilled electrolyte from
the battery immediately with a
solution of water and baking soda.
• If the vehicle is not going to be
used for an extended time, discon-
nect the battery cables.
✽ NOTICE
Basically equipped battery is main-
tenance free type. If your vehicle is
equipped with the battery marked
with LOWER and UPPER on the
side, you can check the electrolyte
level. The electrolyte level should be
between LOWER and UPPER. If
the electrolyte level is low, it needs to
add distilled (demineralized) water
(Never add sulfuric acid or other
electrolyte). When refill, be careful
not to splash the battery and adja-
cent components. And do not over-
fill the battery cells. It can cause cor-
rosion on other parts. After then
ensure that tighten the cell caps.
Have the vehicle checked by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
OKH073048N
Make sure that the clear tube
vent hose is connected
between the nipple at the back
side of the battery and the vehi-
cle body vent nipple. This
ensures that if battery vapors
occur that they will exit the
vehicle not remain in the trunk.
CAUTION
Maintenance
7
7-49
Battery dangers
Always read the follow-
ing instructions carefully
when handling a battery.
Keep lighted cigarettes
and all other flames or
sparks away from the
battery.
Hydrogen, a highly com-
bustible gas, is always
present in battery cells
and may explode if ignit-
ed.
Keep batteries out of the
reach of children
because batteries con-
tain highly corrosive
SULFURIC ACID. Do not
allow battery acid to
contact your skin, eyes,
clothing or paint finish.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
If any electrolyte gets
into your eyes, flush
your eyes with clean
water for at least 15 min-
utes and get immediate
medical attention. If elec-
trolyte gets on your skin,
thoroughly wash the
contacted area. If you
feel a pain or a burning
sensation, get medical
attention immediately.
Wear eye protection
when charging or work-
ing near a battery.
Always provide ventila-
tion when working in an
enclosed space.
An inappropriately dis-
posed battery can be
harmful to the environ-
ment and human health.
Dispose the battery
according to your local
law(s) or regulation.
(Continued)
(Continued)
• When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure
on the case may cause battery
acid to leak, resulting in per-
sonal injury. Lift with a battery
carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
• Never attempt to recharge the
battery when the battery
cables are connected.
• The electrical ignition system
works with high voltage.
Never touch these compo-
nents with the engine running
or the ignition switched on.
Failure to follow the above
warnings can result in serious
bodily injury or death.
7-50
Maintenance
Battery recharging by battery
charger
Your vehicle has a maintenance-free,
calcium-based battery.
• If the battery becomes discharged
in a short time (because, for exam-
ple, the headlights or interior lights
were left on while the vehicle was
not in use), recharge it by slow
charging (trickle) for 10 hours.
• If the battery gradually discharges
because of high electric load while
the vehicle is being used, recharge
it at 20-30A for two hours.
Battery recharging by vehicle
After a jump start from a good bat-
tery, run the engine for 20-30 min-
utes at idle or driving the vehicle
before it is shutoff. Vehicle may not
restart if you shut it off before the
battery had chance to adequately
recharge.
Battery posts, terminals, and
related accessories contain
lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth
defects and reproductive harm.
Batteries also contain other
chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer.
Wash hands after handling.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION
65 WARNING
• When you don’t use the vehi-
cle for a long time in a low
temperature area, disconnect
the battery and keep it
indoors.
The power trunk is not closed
completely when the battery
is removed. When you remove
the battery from the vehicle,
refer to "Power trunk" in sec-
tion 4.
• Always charge the battery
fully to prevent battery case
from being damaged in a low
temperature area.
• If you connect unauthorized
electronic devices to the bat-
tery, the battery may be dis-
charged. Never use unautho-
rized devices.
CAUTION
Removing the battery from the
vehicle should be done at an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
WARNING
Maintenance
7
7-51
• Before performing mainte-
nance or recharging the bat-
tery, turn off all accessories
and stop the engine.
• The negative battery cable
must be removed first and
installed last when the battery
is disconnected.
• Operation related to the bat-
tery should be done at an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
WARNING
Recharging battery
When recharging the battery,
observe the following precau-
tions:
• The battery must be removed
from the vehicle and placed in
an area with good ventilation.
• Do not allow cigarettes,
sparks, or flame near the bat-
tery.
• Watch the battery during
charging, and stop or reduce
the charging rate if the battery
cells begin gassing (boiling)
violently or if the temperature
of the electrolyte of any cell
exceeds 120°F (49°C).
• Wear eye protection when
checking the battery during
charging.
• Disconnect the battery charg-
er in the following order.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
1. Turn off the battery charger
main switch.
2. Unhook the negative clamp
from the negative battery ter-
minal.
3. Unhook the positive clamp
from the positive battery ter-
minal.
• Keep the battery away from
water or any liquid.
• The battery is in the trunk, so
you should be careful when
you load a container filled
with liquid into the trunk.
• For your safety, use a genuine
Kia approved battery when
you replace the battery.
CAUTION
7-52
Maintenance
Reset items
Items should be reset after the bat-
tery has been discharged or the bat-
tery has been disconnected.
• Auto up/down window
(See section 4)
• Sunroof (See section 4)
• Driver position memory system
(See section 4)
• Trip computer (See section 4)
• Climate control system
(See section 4)
• Clock (See section 4)
• Audio (See section 4)
• Power trunk (See section 4)
Maintenance
7
7-53
TIRES AND WHEELS
Tire care
For proper maintenance, safety, and
maximum fuel economy, you must
always maintain recommended tire
inflation pressures and stay within
the load limits and weight distribution
recommended for your vehicle.
Recommended cold tire infla-
tion pressures
All tire pressures (including the
spare) should be checked when the
tires are cold. “Cold Tires” means the
vehicle has not been driven for at
least three hours or driven less than
one mile (1.6 km).
Recommended pressures must be
maintained for the best ride, vehicle
handling, and minimum tire wear.
For recommended inflation pressure,
refer to “Tire and wheels” in section 8.
All specifications (sizes and pres-
sures) can be found on a label
attached to the driver’s side center
pillar.
OKH083002N
Tire underinflation
Severe underinflation can lead
to severe heat build-up, causing
blowouts, tread separation and
other tire failures that can result
in the loss of vehicle control
leading to severe injury or
death. This risk is much higher
on hot days and when driving
for long periods at high speeds.
WARNING
• Underinflation also results in
excessive wear, poor handling
and reduced fuel economy.
Wheel deformation also is
possible. Keep your tire pres-
sures at the proper levels. If a
tire frequently needs refilling,
have it checked by an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer.
• Overinflation produces a
harsh ride, excessive wear at
the center of the tire tread,
and a greater possibility of
damage from road hazards.
CAUTION
7-54
Maintenance
Checking tire inflation pres-
sure
Check your tires once a month or
more.
Also, check the tire pressure of the
spare tire.
How to check
Use a good quality gage to check tire
pressure. You can not tell if your tires
are properly inflated simply by look-
ing at them. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they're
underinflated.
Check the tire's inflation pressure
when the tires are cold. - "Cold"
means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
• Warm tires normally exceed
recommended cold tire pres-
sures by 4 to 6 psi (28 to 41
kPa). Do not release air from
warm tires to adjust the pres-
sure or the tires will be under-
inflated.
• Be sure to reinstall the tire
inflation valve caps. Without
the valve cap, dirt or moisture
could get into the valve core
and cause air leakage. If a
valve cap is missing, install a
new one as soon as possible.
CAUTION
Tire Inflation
Overinflation or underinflation
can reduce tire life, adversely
affect vehicle handling, and
lead to sudden tire failure. This
could result in loss of vehicle
control and potential injury.
WARNING
Tire pressure
Always observe the following:
• Check tire pressure when the
tires are cold. (After vehicle
has been parked for at least
three hours or hasn't been
driven more than one mile (1.6
km) since startup.)
• Check the pressure of your
spare tire each time you check
the pressure of other tires.
• Never overload your vehicle.
Be careful not to overload a
vehicle luggage rack if your
vehicle is equipped with one.
• Worn, old tires can cause
accidents. If your tread is
badly worn, or if your tires
have been damaged, replace
them.
CAUTION
Maintenance
7
7-55
Remove the valve cap from the tire
valve stem. Press the tire gage firm-
ly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation
pressure matches the recommended
pressure on the tire and loading
information label, no further adjust-
ment is necessary. If the pressure is
low, add air until you reach the rec-
ommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by
pushing on the metal stem in the
center of the tire valve. Recheck the
tire pressure with the tire gage. Be
sure to put the valve caps back on
the valve stems. They help prevent
leaks by keeping out dirt and mois-
ture.
Tire rotation
To equalize tread wear, it is recom-
mended that the tires be rotated
every 7,500 miles (12,000 km) or
sooner if irregular wear develops.
During rotation, check the tires for
correct balance.
When rotating tires, check for uneven
wear and damage. Abnormal wear is
usually caused by incorrect tire pres-
sure, improper wheel alignment, out-
of-balance wheels, severe braking or
severe cornering. Look for bumps or
bulges in the tread or side of tire.
Replace the tire if you find either of
these conditions. Replace the tire if
fabric or cord is visible. After rotation,
be sure to bring the front and rear tire
pressures to specification and check
lug nut tightness.
Refer to “Tire and wheels” in section 8.
• Inspect your tires frequently
for proper inflation as well as
wear and damage. Always use
a tire pressure gauge.
• Tires with too much or too lit-
tle pressure wear unevenly
causing poor handling, loss of
vehicle control, and sudden
tire failure leading to acci-
dents, injuries, and even
death. The recommended cold
tire pressure for your vehicle
can be found in this manual
and on the tire label located
on the driver's side center pil-
lar.
• Worn tires can cause acci-
dents. Replace tires that are
worn, show uneven wear, or
are damaged.
• Remember to check the pres-
sure of your spare tire. Kia
recommends that you check
the spare every time you
check the pressure of the
other tires on your vehicle.
WARNING
7-56
Maintenance
Disc brake pads should be inspected
for wear whenever tires are rotated.
✽ NOTICE
The front tire size is different from
the rear tire size. So when you rotate
tires, check the tire and wheel size.
Wheel alignment and tire bal-
ance
The wheels on your vehicle were
aligned and balanced carefully at the
factory to give you the longest tire life
and best overall performance.
In most cases, you will not need to
have your wheels aligned again.
However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling one way
or the other, the alignment may need
to be reset.
If you notice your vehicle vibrating
when driving on a smooth road, your
wheels may need to be rebalanced.
OBH078040
OBK079038
■ 18 inch tire
■ 19 inch tire
• Do not use the compact spare
tire for tire rotation.
• Do not mix bias ply and radial
ply tires under any circum-
stances. This may cause
unusual handling characteris-
tics that could result in death,
severe injury, or property
damage.
WARNING
Improper wheel weights can
damage your vehicle's aluminum
wheels. Use only approved wheel
weights.
CAUTION
Maintenance
7
7-57
Tire replacement
If the tire is worn evenly, a tread wear
indicator will appear as a solid band
across the tread. This shows there is
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread
left on the tire. Replace the tire when
this happens.
Do not wait for the band to appear
across the entire tread before replac-
ing the tire.
OKH073079N
Tread wear indicator
Replacing tires
To reduce the chance of serious
or fatal injuries from an acci-
dent caused by tire failure or
loss of vehicle control:
• Replace tires that are worn,
show uneven wear, or are
damaged. Worn tires can
cause loss of braking effec-
tiveness, steering control, and
traction.
• Do not drive your vehicle with
too little or too much pressure
in your tires. This can lead to
uneven wear and tire failure.
• When replacing tires, never
mix radial and bias-ply tires
on the same car. You must
replace all tires (including the
spare) if moving from radial to
bias-ply tires.
(Continued)
WARNING
(Continued)
• Using tires and wheels other
than the recommended sizes
could cause unusual handling
characteristics and poor vehi-
cle control, resulting in a seri-
ous accident.
• Wheels that do not meet Kia’s
specifications may fit poorly
and result in damage to the
vehicle or unusual handling
and poor vehicle control.
• The ABS works by comparing
the speed of the wheels. Tire
size can affect wheel speed.
When replacing tires, all 4
tires must use the same size
originally supplied with the
vehicle. Using tires of a differ-
ent size can cause the ABS
(Anti-lock Brake System) and
ESC (Electronic Stability
Control) to work irregularly.
7-58
Maintenance
Compact spare tire replacement
A compact spare tire has a shorter
tread life than a regular size tire.
Replace it when you can see the
tread wear indicator bars on the tire.
The replacement compact spare tire
should be the same size and design
tire as the one provided with your
new vehicle and should be mounted
on the same compact spare tire
wheel. The compact spare tire is not
designed to be mounted on a regular
size wheel, and the compact spare
tire wheel is not designed for mount-
ing a regular size tire.
Wheel replacement
When replacing the metal wheels for
any reason, make sure the new
wheels are equivalent to the original
factory units in diameter, rim width
and offset.
✽ NOTICE
The front tire size is different from
the rear tire size. So when you rotate
tires, check the tire and wheel size.
Tire traction
Tire traction can be reduced if you
drive on worn tires, tires that are
improperly inflated or on slippery
road surfaces. Tires should be
replaced when tread wear indicators
appear. To reduce the possibility of
losing control, slow down whenever
there is rain, snow or ice on the road.
Tire maintenance
In addition to proper inflation, correct
wheel alignment helps to decrease
tire wear. If you find a tire is worn
unevenly, have your dealer check the
wheel alignment.
When you have new tires installed,
make sure they are balanced. This
will increase vehicle ride comfort and
tire life. Additionally, a tire should
always be rebalanced if it is removed
from the wheel.
A wheel that is not the correct
size may adversely affect wheel
and bearing life, braking and
stopping abilities, handling
characteristics, ground clear-
ance, body-to-tire clearance,
snow chain clearance,
speedometer and odometer cal-
ibration, headlight aim and
bumper height.
WARNING
The compact spare tire is for
emergency use only. Do not
operate your vehicle on this
compact spare at speeds over
50 mph (80 km/h). The original
tire should be repaired or
replaced as soon as possible to
avoid failure of the spare possi-
bly leading to personal injury or
death.
WARNING
Maintenance
7
7-59
Tire sidewall labeling
This information identifies and
describes the fundamental charac-
teristics of the tire and also provides
the tire identification number (TIN)
for safety standard certification. The
TIN can be used to identify the tire in
case of a recall.
1. Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or Brand name is
shown.
2. Tire size designation
A tire’s sidewall is marked with a tire
size designation. You will need this
information when selecting replace-
ment tires for your car. The following
explains what the letters and num-
bers in the tire size designation
mean.
Example tire size designation:
(These numbers are provided as an
example only; your tire size designa-
tor could vary depending on your
vehicle.)
P245/45R19 98V
P- Applicable vehicle type (tires
marked with the prefix “P’’ are
intended for use on passenger
cars or light trucks; however,
not all tires have this marking).
245 - Tire width in millimeters.
45 - Aspect ratio. The tire’s section
height as a percentage of its
width.
R - Tire construction code (Radial).
19 - Rim diameter in inches.
98 - Load Index, a numerical code
associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry.
V - Speed Rating Symbol. See the
speed rating chart in this sec-
tion for additional information.
I030B04JM
1
1
2
3
4
5,6
7
7-60
Maintenance
Wheel size designation
Wheels are also marked with impor-
tant information that you need if you
ever have to replace one. The follow-
ing explains what the letters and
numbers in the wheel size designa-
tion mean.
Example wheel size designation:
8.0JX19
8.0 - Rim width in inches.
J - Rim contour designation.
19 - Rim diameter in inches.
Tire speed ratings
The chart below lists many of the dif-
ferent speed ratings currently being
used for passenger car tires. The
speed rating is part of the tire size
designation on the sidewall of the
tire. This symbol corresponds to that
tire's designed maximum safe oper-
ating speed.
3. Checking tire life (TIN : Tire
Identification Number)
Any tires that are over 6 years old,
based on the manufacturing date,
(including the spare tire) should be
replaced by new ones. You can find
the manufacturing date on the tire
sidewall (possibly on the inside of the
wheel), displaying the DOT Code.
The DOT Code is a series of num-
bers on a tire consisting of numbers
and English letters. The manufactur-
ing date is designated by the last four
digits (characters) of the DOT code.
DOT : XXXX XXXX OOOO
The front part of the DOT means a
plant code number, tire size and
tread pattern and the last four num-
bers indicate week and year manu-
factured.
For example:
DOT XXXX XXXX 1614 represents
that the tire was produced in the 16th
week of 2014.
S 112 mph (180 km/h)
T 118 mph (190 km/h)
H 130 mph (210 km/h)
V 149 mph (240 km/h)
Z Above 149 mph (240 km/h)
Maximum Speed
Speed
Rating
Symbol
Maintenance
7
7-61
4. Tire ply composition and mate-
rial
The number of layers or plies of rub-
ber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the
materials in the tire, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
The letter "R" means radial ply con-
struction; the letter "D" means diago-
nal or bias ply construction; and the
letter "B" means belted-bias ply con-
struction.
5. Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount
of air pressure that should be put in
the tire. Do not exceed the maximum
permissible inflation pressure. Refer
to the Tire and Loading Information
label for recommended inflation
pressure.
6. Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum
load in kilograms and pounds that
can be carried by the tire. When
replacing the tires on the vehicle,
always use a tire that has the same
load rating as the factory installed
tire.
7. Uniform tire quality grading
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall
between tread shoulder and maxi-
mum section width.
For example: TREAD wear 200
TRACTION AA
TEMPERATURE A
Tire age
Tires degrade over time, even
when they are not being used.
Regardless of the remaining
tread, it is recommended that
tires generally be replaced after
six (6) years of normal service.
Heat caused by hot climates or
frequent high loading condi-
tions can accelerate the aging
process. Failure to follow this
warning can result in sudden
tire failure, which could lead to
a loss of control and an acci-
dent involving serious injury or
death.
WARNING
7-62
Maintenance
Tread wear
The tread wear grade is a compara-
tive rating based on the wear rate of
the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified govern-
ment test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one-and-a-
half times (1½) as well on the gov-
ernment course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions
of their use, however, and may
depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in
road characteristics and climate.
These grades are molded on the
side-walls of passenger vehicle tires.
The tires available as standard or
optional equipment on your vehicle
may vary with respect to grade.
Traction - AA, A, B & C
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B and C. Those
grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured
under controlled conditions on spec-
ified government test surfaces of
asphalt and concrete. A tire marked
C may have poor traction perform-
ance.
Temperature -A, B & C
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C representing the
tire’s resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can
cause the material of the tire to
degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-
responds to a level of performance
which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the labora-
tory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
The traction grade assigned to
this tire is based on straight-
ahead braking traction tests,
and does not include accelera-
tion, cornering, hydroplaning,
or peak traction characteristics.
WARNING
Low aspect ratio tire
(if equipped)
Low aspect ratio tires, whose aspect
ratio is lower than 50, are provided
for sporty looks.
Because the low aspect ratio tires
are optimized for handling and brak-
ing, it may be more uncomfortable to
ride in and there is more noise com-
pare with normal tires.
Maintenance
7
7-63
Tire temperature
The temperature grade for this
tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed,
underinflation, or excessive
loading, either separately or in
combination, can cause heat
build-up and possible sudden
tire failure. This can cause loss
of vehicle control and serious
injury or death.
WARNING
Because the sidewall of the low
aspect ratio tire is shorter than
the normal, the wheel and tire of
the low aspect ratio tire is easi-
er to be damaged. So, follow the
instructions below.
• When driving on a rough road
or off road, drive cautiously
because tires and wheels may
be damaged. And after driv-
ing, inspect tires and wheels.
• When passing over a pothole,
speed bump, manhole, or
curb stone, drive slowly so
that the tires and wheels are
not damaged.
• If the tire is impacted, inspect
the tire condition or contact an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
• To prevent damage to the tire,
inspect the tire condition and
pressure every 1,800 miles
(3,000 km).
CAUTION
7-64
Maintenance
Tire terminology and defini-
tions
Air Pressure: The amount of air
inside the tire pressing outward on
the tire. Air pressure is expressed in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascal (kPa).
Accessory Weight: This means the
combined weight of optional acces-
sories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmis-
sion, power seats, and air condition-
ing.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a
tire's height to its width.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords
that is located between the plies and
the tread. Cords may be made from
steel or other reinforcing materials.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel
wires wrapped by steel cords that
hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the plies are laid at alternate
angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of
air pressure in a tire, measured in
pounds per square inch (psi) or kilo-
pascals (kPa) before a tire has built
up heat from driving.
Curb Weight: This means the weight
of a motor vehicle with standard and
optional equipment including the
maximum capacity of fuel, oil and
coolant, but without passengers and
cargo.
DOT Markings: A code molded into
the sidewall of a tire signifying that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S.
Department of Transportation motor
vehicle safety standards. The DOT
code includes the Tire Identification
Number (TIN), an alphanumeric des-
ignator which can also identify the
tire manufacturer, production plant,
brand and date of production.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Front Axle.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight
Rating for the Rear axle.
• It is not easy to recognize the
tire damage with your own
eyes. But if there is the slight-
est hint of tire damage, even
though you cannot see the
tire damage with your own
eyes, have the tire checked or
replaced because the tire
damage may cause air leak-
age from the tire.
• If the tire is damaged by driv-
ing on a rough road, off road,
pothole, manhole, or curb
stone, it will not be covered by
the warranty.
• You can find out the tire infor-
mation on the tire sidewall.
CAUTION
Maintenance
7
7-65
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The
side of an asymmetrical tire, that
must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for
air pressure.
Load Index: An assigned number
ranging from 1 to 279 that corre-
sponds to the load carrying capacity
of a tire.
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The
maximum air pressure to which a
cold tire may be inflated. The maxi-
mum air pressure is molded onto the
sidewall.
Maximum Load Rating: The load
rating for a tire at the maximum per-
missible inflation pressure for that
tire.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight:
The sum of curb weight; accessory
weight; vehicle capacity weight; and
production options weight.
Normal Occupant Weight: The
number of occupants a vehicle is
designed to seat multiplied by 150
pounds (68 kg).
Occupant Distribution: Designated
seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side
of a asymmetrical tire that has a par-
ticular side that faces outward when
mounted on a vehicle. The outward
facing sidewall bears white lettering
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or
model name molding that is higher or
deeper than the same moldings on
the inner facing sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire
used on passenger cars and some
light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure:
Vehicle manufacturer's recommend-
ed tire inflation pressure and shown
on the tire placard.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in
which the ply cords that extend to the
beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and
upon which the tire beads are seat-
ed.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire
between the tread and the bead.
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric
code assigned to a tire indicating the
maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the
tire and the road surface. The
amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that
comes into contact with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow
bands, sometimes called "wear
bars," that show across the tread of a
tire when only 2/32 inch of tread
remains.
UTQGS: Uniform Tire Quality
Grading Standards, a tire information
system that provides consumers with
ratings for a tire's traction, tempera-
ture and treadwear. Ratings are
determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing proce-
dures. The ratings are molded into
the sidewall of the tire.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The num-
ber of designated seating positions
multiplied by 150 lbs. (68 kg) plus the
rated cargo and luggage load.
7-66
Maintenance
Vehicle Maximum Load on the
Tire: Load on an individual tire due
to curb and accessory weight plus
maximum occupant and cargo
weight.
Vehicle Normal Load on the Tire:
Load on an individual tire that is
determined by distributing to each
axle its share of the curb weight,
accessory weight, and normal occu-
pant weight and dividing by 2.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanent-
ly attached to a vehicle showing the
original equipment tire size and rec-
ommended inflation pressure.
All season tires
Kia specifies all season tires on
some models to provide good per-
formance for use all year round,
including snowy and icy road condi-
tions. All season tires are identified
by ALL SEASON and/or M+S (Mud
and Snow) on the tire sidewall. Snow
tires have better snow traction than
all season tires and may be more
appropriate in some areas.
Summer tires
Kia specifies summer tires on some
models to provide superior perform-
ance on dry roads. Summer tire per-
formance is substantially reduced in
snow and ice. Summer tires do not
have the tire traction rating M+S
(Mud and Snow) on the tire side wall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in
snowy or icy conditions, Kia recom-
mends the use of snow tires or all
season tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If you equip your car with snow tires,
they should be the same size and
have the same load capacity as the
original tires. Snow tires should be
installed on all four wheels; other-
wise, poor handling may result.
Snow tires should carry 4 psi (28
kPa) more air pressure than the
pressure recommended for the stan-
dard tires on the tire label on the dri-
ver's side of the center pillar, or up to
the maximum pressure shown on the
tire sidewall, whichever is less.
Do not drive faster than 75 mph (120
km/h) when your car is equipped with
snow tires.
Maintenance
7
7-67
* Auto Sock
®
is a trade mark of Auto
sock.
Tire chains
Tire chains, if necessary, should be
installed on the drive wheels (rear
wheels).
Be sure that the chains are installed in
accordance with the manufacturer's
instructions.
To minimize tire and chain wear, do
not continue to use tire chains when
they are no longer needed.
Radial-ply tires
Radial-ply tires provide improved
tread life, road hazard resistance and
smoother high speed ride. The radi-
al-ply tires used on this vehicle are of
belted construction, and are selected
to complement the ride and handling
characteristics of your vehicle.
Radial-ply tires have the same load
carrying capacity, as bias-ply or bias
belted tires of the same size, and use
the same recommended inflation
pressure. Mixing of radial-ply tires
with bias-ply or bias belted tires is
not recommended.
Any combinations of radial-ply and
bias-ply or bias belted tires when
used on the same vehicle will seri-
ously deteriorate vehicle handling.
The best rule to follow is: Identical
radial-ply tires should always be
used as a set of four.
Longer wearing tires can be more
susceptible to irregular tread wear. It
is very important to follow the tire
rotation interval shown in this section
to achieve the tread life potential of
these tires. Cuts and punctures in
radial-ply tires are repairable only in
the tread area, because of sidewall
flexing. Consult your tire dealer for
radial-ply tire repairs.
Snow or ice
• When driving on roads cov-
ered with snow or ice, drive at
less than 20 mph (30 km/h).
• Do not use tire chains on
vehicles equipped with alu-
minum wheels.
• If snow chains must be used,
use the Auto Sock
®
(fabric
snow chain).
• If you hear noise caused by
chains contacting the body,
retighten the chain to avoid
contact with the vehicle body.
• To prevent body damage,
retighten the chains after driv-
ing 0.3~0.6 miles (0.5~1.0 km).
WARNING
7-68
Maintenance
FUSES
A vehicle’s electrical system is pro-
tected from electrical overload dam-
age by fuses.
This vehicle has 2 fuse panels, one
located in the driver’s side panel bol-
ster, another is in the engine com-
partment.
If any of your vehicle’s lights, acces-
sories, or controls do not work, check
the appropriate circuit fuse. If a fuse
has blown, the element inside the
fuse will be melted.
If the electrical system does not
work, first check the driver’s side
fuse panel.
Before replacing a blown fuse, dis-
connect the negative battery cable.
Always replace a blown fuse with
one of the same rating.
If the replacement fuse blows, this
indicates an electrical problem. Avoid
using the system involved and imme-
diately consult an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
Three kinds of fuses are used: blade
type for lower amperage rating, car-
tridge type, and fusible link for higher
amperage ratings.
✽ NOTICE
The actual fuse/relay panel label
may differ from equipped items.
OKH073054N
Normal
Normal
■ Blade type
■ Cartridge type
■ Multi fuse type
Blown
Blown
Normal Blown
Normal Blown
Fuse replacement
• Never replace a fuse with any-
thing but another fuse of the
same rating.
• A higher capacity fuse could
cause damage and possibly a
fire.
• Never install a wire or alu-
minum foil instead of the
proper fuse - even as a tem-
porary repair. It may cause
extensive wiring damage and
a possible fire.
WARNING
Do not use a screwdriver or any
other metal object to remove
fuses because it may cause a
short circuit and damage the
system.
CAUTION
Instrument panel fuse replace-
ment
1.Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2.Lift the end of strip (1) up.
3.Press the fastener head with screw
driver and then pull the fastener
out.
4.Lift the rear portion of small service
cover (2) up and then remove the
service cover.
Maintenance
7
7-69
OKH073019N
■ Drive side panel
OKH073051N
• When replacing a blown fuse
or relay with a new one, make
sure the new fuse or relay fits
tightly into the clips The
incomplete fastening fuse or
relay may cause the vehicle
wiring and electric systems
damage and a possible fire.
• Do not remove fuses, relays
and terminals fastened with
bolts or nuts. The fuses,
relays and terminals may be
fastened incompletely, and it
may cause a possible fire. If
fuses, relays and terminals
fastened with bolts or nuts are
blown, consult an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
• Do not input any other objects
except fuses or relays into
fuse/relay terminals such as a
driver or wiring. It may cause
contact failure and system
malfunction.
CAUTION
7-70
Maintenance
(A) : for assemble
(B) : for remove
5.Press the fastener head with screw
driver and then pull the fastener
out from main service cover (3).
6.Pull the main service cover over
7mm (0.28 in) to toward the front of
the vehicle.
7.Lift the main service cover up and
then remove the main service
cover. Be careful not to damage
the holder under the main service
cover.
8.Open the fuse panel cover.
9.Pull the suspected fuse straight
out. Use the fuse puller provided in
the engine compartment fuse
panel.
10. Check the removed fuse; replace
it if it is blown.
11. Push in a new fuse of the same
rating, and make sure it fits tight-
ly in the clips.
If it fits loosely, consult an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
If you do not have a spare, use a
fuse of the same rating from a circuit
you may not need for operating the
vehicle, such as the cigarette lighter
fuse.
If the headlights or other electrical
components do not work and the
fuses are OK, check the fuse panel
in the engine compartment. If a fuse
is blown, it must be replaced.
Fuse switch
Always put the transportation fuse
switch at the ON position.
If you move the switch to the OFF
position, some items such as the
audio and digital clock must be reset
and the smart key may not work
properly.
OKH073052N
A
B
OKH073021N
Maintenance
7
7-71
✽ NOTICE
If you need to park your vehicle for
prolonged periods more than 1
month, move the transportation fuse
switch to the OFF position to pre-
vent the battery being discharged.
Engine compartment fuse
replacement
1.Turn the ignition switch and all
other switches off.
2.Remove the fuse panel cover by
pressing the tab and pulling up.
3.Check the removed fuse; replace it
if it is blown. To remove or insert
the fuse, use the fuse puller in the
engine compartment fuse panel.
4.Push in a new fuse of the same rat-
ing, and make sure it fits tightly in
the clips. If it fits loosely, consult an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
OKH073022N
OKH073023N
• Always place the transporta-
tion fuse switch in the ON
position while driving the vehi-
cle.
• Do not move the transportation
fuse switch repeatedly. The
fuse switch may be worn out.
CAUTION
After checking the fuse panel in
the engine compartment,
securely install the fuse panel
cover. If not, electrical failures
may occur from water contact.
CAUTION
7-72
Maintenance
Main fuse
If the main fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1.Remove the fuse panel cover on
the right side in the engine com-
partment.
2.Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
3.Replace the fuse with a new one of
the same rating.
4.Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽ NOTICE
If the main fuse is blown, consult an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
Multi fuse
If the multi fuse is blown, it must be
removed as follows:
1.Disassemble the negative cable of
battery.
2.Remove the nuts shown in the pic-
ture above.
3.Replace the fuse with a new one of
the same rating.
4.Reinstall in the reverse order of
removal.
✽ NOTICE
If the multi fuse is blown, consult an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
OKH073080N
OKH073024N
Fuse/relay panel description
Instrument panel fuse panel
Inside the fuse/relay panel covers,
you can find the fuse/relay label
describing fuse/relay name and
capacity.
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
Maintenance
7
7-73
OKH073049N
OKH073029N
7-74
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
AUDIO 2 10A A/V & Navigation Head Unit, TMU
MODULE 3 10A
A/C Control Module, Electro Chromic Mirror, Rear Seat Console Switch, Driver Haptic Control Module, Rear
CCS Control Module LH/RH, Driver/Passenger IMS Control Module, Driver Power Seat Module, Rear Seat
Warmer Control Module LH/RH, Rear Smart Junction Box (IPS Control Module)
MODULE 2 10A
Steering Tilt & Telescopic Module, LDWS Camera Module, Crash Pad Switch, Stop Lamp Switch, A/T Console
Switch, Electric Parking Brake Switch, Console Switch, Smart Cruse Control Radar, Air Sus, TPMS, PAS
SPARE 10A Spare
WIPER 10A Auto Light & Rain Sensor
MODULE 1 10A BCM, Trunk Lid Main Switch, Low Panel Switch
MEMORY 2 10A External Buzzer, Driver Smart Connector, Passenger Smart Connector
DRV HEAT 15A Driver Haptic Control Module, Driver CCS Module
PASS HEAT 15A Passenger CCS Module
WINDOW LH 30A Rear Power Window Module LH, Rear Power Window Module LH
HEADREST 15A Active Headrest Sensor
BCM 10A BCM, Multifunction Switch, Driver/Passenger Power Seat Switch, Rear Door Module LH/RH
EPB 2 15A Electric Parking Brake Module
P/HANDLE 15A Steering Tilt & Telescopic Module
Maintenance
7
7-75
Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
B/ALARM 10A BCM
INHIBITOR 1 10A
W/O Electric ATM Shift Lever : Sport Mode Switch
With Electric ATM Shift Lever : Electric ATM Shift Lever
P/DOOR DRV 15A Driver Door Latch
PASS P/SEAT 20A
W/O IMS : Passenger Seat Relay Box
With IMS : Passenger IMS Control Module
P/DOOR RR
LH
15A Rear Door Latch LH
DRV P/SEAT 30A Driver Lumbar Support Valve, Driver Lumbar Support Switch, Driver Power Seat Module
S/ROOF 2 10A Sunroof Motor
SMART KEY 2 10A Metal Core Block (PCB #2) (P/N Relay), Smart Key Control Module
S/ROOF 1 20A Sunroof Motor
START 10A Start/Stop Button Switch
MODULE 5 10A
Surround View Unit, Parking Guide Unit, Head-UP, Instrument Cluster, Driver Lumbar Support Valve, Rear Seat
Console Switch, Rear Seat Warmer Control Module LH/RH, Rear Massage Control Module LH/RH, Rear Smart
Junction Box (IPS Control Module)
CLUSTER 10A Instrument Cluster, Head-Up Display
SMART KEY 1 25A Smart Key Control Module
DOOR LAMP 10A Driver Door Module, Passenger Door Module
STR'G HTD 15A Clock Spring
7-76
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
MODULE 6 10A Smart Key Control Module, BCM
A/BAG 15A Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner, Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner, SRS Control Module
A/BAG IND 10A Instrument Cluster
IGN 1 20A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (FUSE : F20, F21, F23, F25, F26, F27)
MEMORY 1 10A
Passenger IMS Control Module, Driver/Passenger Door Module, Driver/Passenger Power Seat Switch, Rear
Door Module LH/RH, Power Trunk Module, Instrument Cluster, BCM, Security Sensor, Analogue Clock, A/C
Control Module, Head-Up Display
MULTI MEDIA 10A Keyboard, A/V Navigation Head Unit, Front Monitor, TMU
ROOM LAMP 10A
Rear Seat Foot Lamp LH/RH, Trunk Room Lamp LH/RH, Driver/Passenger Foot Lamp, Room Lamp, Overhead
Console Lamp, Front Vanity Lamp Switch LH/RH, Rear Vanity Lamp Switch LH/RH, Garnish Lamp LH/RH,
Garnish Center Lamp, Glove Box Lamp
MEMORY 3 10A RF Receiver
EPB 1 15A Electric Parking Brake Module
SPARE 15A Spare
IGN 2 20A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (Fuse : F29, F30)
A/CON 1 10A A/C Control Module, Ionizer, Metal Core Block (PCB #2) (Blower Relay)
AFLS 15A Adaptive Front Lighting Module, HEAD LAMP LH/RH
SPARE 10A Spare
P/OUTLET FR 20A Front Cigarette Lighter
Maintenance
7
7-77
Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
MODULE 4 10A
Electric ATM Shift Lever, Analogue Clock, BCM, Surround View Unit,
Overhead Console Lamp, Parking Guide Unit
AUDIO 1 10A
A/V & Navigation Head Unit, Front/Rear Monitor Module, Keyboard, Smart Key Control Module, Rear Seat
Audio Switch, AMP, TMU
SPARE 10A Spare
P/OUTLET RR 20A P/OUTLET RR, Front Power Outlet
Engine compartment fuse panel
(Driver’s side)
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
7-78
Maintenance
OKH073025N
OKH073026N
Maintenance
7
7-79
Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
Stop Lamp 15A Stop Signal Electronic Module
Brake SW 10A Stop Lamp Switch, Smart Key Control Module
AAF 10A Not Used
Injector 1 15A Injector Drive Box
SMK (IGN1) 40A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.5)
ESC 1 40A ESC Control Module
ALT 200A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (Fuse : F9, F15, F16, F18, F19), Alternator
Cooling 70A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.6)
SMK (IGN2) 30A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.3)
ESC 2 40A ESC Control Module
Diagnosis 25A Multipurpose Check Connector
H/Lamp Washer 25A Not Used
Battery 3 40A Smart Junction Box (Fuse : F5, F6, F8, F9, F10)
SMK (ACC) 40A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.9)
TCU 1 10A ECM, Transmission Range Switch, Transmission Park Postilion Sensor & Switch
ESC 3 10A Steering Angle Sensor, ESC Control Module
B/UP Lamp 1 10A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.4)
7-80
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
Vaccum Pump 1 10A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.10), Vaccum Pump Switch
ECU 1 10A ECU
EHPS 1 10A EHPS Module
Inhibitor 2 10A A/T Console Switch, Electric ATM Shift Lever
Washer 15A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.8)
Wiper 2 10A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.1)
B/UP Lamp 2 10A
Back View Camera & Back-Up Lamp, A/T Console Switch, Electro Chromic Mirror, A/V & Navigation Head
Unit
Vaccum Pump 2 20A E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.10)
Engine compartment fuse panel
(Passenger’s side)
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in
this manual may be applicable to
your vehicle. It is accurate at the
time of printing. When you inspect
the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer
to the fuse panel label.
Maintenance
7
7-81
OKH073027N
OKH073028N
7-82
Maintenance
Fuse Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
METAL
CORE
BLOCK
(PCB #1)
Sensor 3 10A Rear Smart Junction Box (Fuel Pump Relay)
P/Door PASS 15A Passenger Door Latch
SPARE 15A Spare
Deicer 15A Metal Core Block (PCB #1) (Front Deicer Relay), Ignition Coil #1~8
Ignition Coil 20A Ignition Coil #1~6, Condenser #1, #2
Horn 15A Metal Core Block (PCB #1) (Horn Relay)
Sensor 2 10A Mass Air Flow Sensor, Oxygen Sensor #1~4, E/R Fuse & Relay Box LH (RLY.6)
Sensor 4 15A CMP Sensor #1~4
Wiper 3 30A Wiper Motor
ECU 3 30A Metal Core Block (PCB #1) (ECU Main Relay)
ECS 2 40A Metal Core Block (PCB #1) (Air ECS Relay)
METAL
CORE
BLOCK
(PCB #2)
Sensor 1 15A
Purge Control Solenoid Valve, ECM, Variable Intake Solenoid Valve,
Oil Control Valve #1~4
Injector 2 15A Injector #1~6, Injector #1~8
SPARE 10A Spare
SPARE 20A Spare
SPARE 10A Spare
Maintenance
7
7-83
Fuse Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
METAL
CORE
BLOCK
(PCB #2)
A/CON 2 10A A/C Control Module
Cruise 10A Smart Cruise Control Radar
TCU 2 15A TCM
ECU 2 10A ECM
Blower 40A Metal Core Block(PCB) (Blower Relay)
Start 1 30A E/R Fuse Relay Box LH (RLY.2)
MULTI
FUSE
Presafety Seat
Belt DRV
40A Driver Seat Belt Pretensioner
Presafety Seat
Belt PASS
40A Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioner
Battery 2 60A Smart Junction Box (Fuse : F13~20, F23, F24, F27, F28, IPS5~8, Arisu-LT2)
Battery 1 60A Smart Junction Box (Fuse : F38, IPS1, 3, Arisu-LT1, Leak Current Autocut Device)
EHPS 2 80A EHPS Module
FUSE
Battery 4 60A Metal Core Block (PCB #1) (Fuse : F2, F4, F6, F10, F11, F12)
Battery 5 60A Metal Core Block (PCB #2) (Fuse : F7, F11)
7-84
Maintenance
Trunk fuse panel
✽ NOTICE
Not all fuse panel descriptions in this manual may be applicable to your vehicle. It is accurate at the time of print-
ing. When you inspect the fuse panel in your vehicle, refer to the fuse panel label.
OKH073043N
• Battery box fuse panel
OKH073042N
OKH073041N
Maintenance
7
7-85
Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
Rear HTD 40A Rear Defogger Relay
P/WDW RH 30A Passenger Power Window Module, Rear Power Window Module RH
P/Trunk 30A Power Trunk Module
F/Pump 20A Fuel Pump Relay
P/Seat RR 1 20A Rear Seat Relay Box
ECS 1 20A ECS Unit
P/Seat PASS 15A Passenger IMS Control Module
P/Door RR RH 15A Rear Door Latch RH
Spare 15A Spare
Trunk 10A Trunk Lid Relay, Power Trunk Module Buzzer
Fog Lamp RR 10A Rear Fog Lamp Relay
Spare 40A Spare
AMP 30A AMP
Spare 20A Spare
P/Seat RR 2 10A
Rear Seat Relay Box LH, Rear Seat Relay RH, Rear Seat Massage Control Module LH, Rear Seat Massage
Control Module RH
Spare 10A Spare
Trunk fuse panel
7-86
Maintenance
Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
DR Lock RH 10A Passenger Door Module, Rear Door Module RH
DR Lock LH 10A Driver Door Module, Rear Door Latch LH
S/Heater RR
RH
15A Rear Seat Warmer Control Module RH, Rear CCS Control Module RH
S/Heater RR
LH
15A Rear Seat Warmer Control Module LH, Rear CCS Control Module LH
Spare 15A Spare
Fuse Name Fuse rasting Circuit Protected
Start 2 40A Metal Core Block (PCB #2) (Fuse : F8, F9, F12)
AMS 10A Battery Sensor
Battery 6 100A Rear Smart Junction Box (Fuse : F1, F2, F3, F4, F5, F6, F7, F8, F10, F11, F13, F15, F17, F18, F19, F20)
Battery box fuse panel
Maintenance
7
7-87
LIGHT BULBS
Use only the bulbs of the specified
wattage.
✽ NOTICE
After heavy, driving rain or wash-
ing, headlight and taillight lenses
could appear frosty. This condition
is caused by the temperature differ-
ence between the lamp inside and
outside. This is similar to the con-
densation on your windows inside
your vehicle during the rain and
doesn’t indicate a problem with
your vehicle. If the water leaks into
the lamp bulb circuitry, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
Working on the lights
Prior to working on the light,
firmly apply the parking brake,
ensure that the ignition switch
is turned to the LOCK position
and turn off the lights to avoid
sudden movement of the vehi-
cle and burning your fingers or
receiving an electric shock.
WARNING
Be sure to replace the burned-
out bulb with one of the same
wattage rating. Otherwise, it
may cause damage to the fuse
or electric wiring system.
CAUTION
• If you don’t have necessary
tools, the correct bulbs and
the expertise, consult an
authorized K900 Kia dealer. In
many cases, it is difficult to
replace vehicle light bulbs
because other parts of the
vehicle must be removed
before you can get to the bulb.
This is especially true if you
have to remove the headlight
assembly to get to the bulb(s).
Removing/installing the head-
light assembly can result in
damage to the vehicle.
• Do not install additional bulb
or LED. If you install that, the
lamp may not be operated
properly and fuse box or elec-
tric wiring system may have
problem.
CAUTION
7-88
Maintenance
Headlight, front position light,
front turn signal light, front fog
light bulb replacement
(1) Headlight (High)
(2) Headlight (Low)
(3) Front turn signal light
(4) Front position light
(5) Front side marker light
(6) Daytime running light
(7) Front fog light
Headlight bulb
OKH073044N
■ Type A (LED)
OKH073044N
■ Type B (HID)
OKH073081N
Halogen bulbs
• Halogen bulbs contain pres-
surized gas that will produce
fragment of glass if broken.
• Always handle them carefully,
and avoid scratches and abra-
sions. If the bulbs are lit, avoid
contact with liquids.
(Continued)
WARNING
Maintenance
7
7-89
Headlamp (HID/ LED type), front
position lamp, front turn signal
lamp, front fog lamp
If the light bulb is not operating, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
(Continued)
• Never touch the glass with
bare hands. Residual oil may
cause the bulb to overheat
and burst when lit.
• If a bulb becomes damaged or
cracked, replace it immediate-
ly and carefully dispose of it.
• Wear eye protection when
changing a bulb. Allow the
bulb to cool down before han-
dling it.
HID Headlight low beam
(if equipped)
Do not attempt to replace or
inspect the low beam (XENON
bulb) due to electric shock dan-
ger. If the low beam (XENON
bulb) is not working, have your
vehicle checked by an author-
ized K900 Kia dealer.
WARNING
If your vehicle is equipped with
High Intensity Discharge (HID)
headlights, these headlights
contain mercury. So if you need
to have your vehicle disposed,
you should remove the HID
Headlights before disposal. The
removed HID headlights should
be recycled, re-used or dis-
posed as hazardous waste.
CAUTION
7-90
Maintenance
✽ NOTICE
HID lamps have superior perform-
ance vs. halogen bulbs. HID lamps
are estimated by the manufacturer
to last twice as long or longer than
halogen bulbs depending on their
frequency of use. They will probably
require replacement at some point
in the life of the vehicle. Cycling the
headlamps on and off more than
typical use will shorten HID lamps
life. HID lamps do not fail in the
same manner as halogen incandes-
cent lamps. If a headlamp goes out
after a period of operation but will
immediately relight when the head-
lamp switch is cycled it is likely the
HID lamp needs to be replaced. HID
lighting components are more com-
plex than conventional halogen
bulbs thus have higher replacement
cost.
Side repeater light bulb
replacement
If the light bulb is not operating, have
the vehicle checked by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
Rear combination light bulb
replacement
(1) Stop and tail light
(2) Rear turn signal light
(3) Back-up light
(4) Tail light
(5) Stop light
(6) Rear side marker light
OKH073031N
OKH073032N
Stop and tail light, Turn signal
light, Back-up light, Rear side
marker light
If the light does not operate, have the
vehicle checked by an authorized
K900 Kia dealer.
High mounted stop light
If the light bulb does not operate, we
recommend the vehicle be checked
by an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
A skilled technician should check or
repair the high mounted stop light,
for it may affect the performance of
the curtain airbags or damage relat-
ed interior parts of the vehicle.
License plate lamp replace-
ment
If the light bulb does not operate, we
recommend the vehicle be checked
by an authorized K900 Kia dealer.
A skilled technician should check or
repair the license plate light, for it
may affect damage related interior
and exterior parts of the vehicle.
Maintenance
7
7-91
OKH073033N
OKH073082N
7-92
Maintenance
Interior light bulb replacement
1.Using a flat-blade screwdriver,
gently pry the lens from the interior
light housing.
2.Remove the bulb by pulling it
straight out.
3.Install a new bulb in the socket.
4.Align the lens tabs with the interior
light housing notches and snap the
lens into place.
5.If the map lamp and room lamp are
not operating, have the vehicle
checked by an authorized K900
Kia dealer.
OKH073036N
OKH073035N
■ Glove box lamp
■ Trunk lamp
Prior to working on the Interior
Lights, ensure that the “OFF”
button is depressed to avoid
burning your fingers or receiv-
ing an electric shock.
WARNING
Use care not to dirty or damage
lens, lens tab, and plastic hous-
ings.
CAUTION
APPEARANCE CARE
Exterior care
Exterior general caution
It is very important to follow the label
directions when using any chemical
cleaner or polish. Read all warning
and caution statements that appear
on the label.
Finish maintenance
Washing
To help protect your vehicle’s finish
from rust and deterioration, wash it
thoroughly and frequently at least
once a month with lukewarm or cold
water.
If you use your vehicle for off-road
driving, you should wash it after each
off-road trip. Pay special attention to
the removal of any accumulation of
salt, dirt, mud, and other foreign
materials. Make sure the drain holes
in the lower edges of the doors and
rocker panels are kept clear and
clean.
Insects, tar, tree sap, bird droppings,
industrial pollution and similar
deposits can damage your vehicle’s
finish if not removed immediately.
Even prompt washing with plain
water may not completely remove all
these deposits. A mild soap, safe for
use on painted surfaces, may be
used.
After washing, rinse the vehicle thor-
oughly with lukewarm or cold water.
Do not allow soap to dry on the fin-
ish.
Maintenance
7
7-93
• Do not use strong soap,
chemical detergents or hot
water, and do not wash the
vehicle in direct sunlight or
when the body of the vehicle
is warm.
• Be careful when washing the
side windows of your vehicle.
Especially, with high-pressure
water, water may leak through
the windows and wet the inte-
rior.
• To prevent damage to the
plastic parts and lamps, do
not clean with chemical sol-
vents or strong detergents.
CAUTION
7-94
Maintenance
Waxing
A good coat of wax is a barrier
between your paint and contaminate.
Keeping a good coat of wax on your
vehicle will help protect it.
Wax the vehicle when water will no
longer bead on the paint.
Always wash and dry the vehicle
before waxing. Use a good quality
liquid or paste wax, and follow the
manufacturer’s instructions. Wax all
metal trim to protect it and to main-
tain its luster.
Removing oil, tar, and similar materi-
als with a spot remover will usually
strip the wax from the finish. Be sure
to re-wax these areas even if the rest
of the vehicle does not yet need wax-
ing.
OKH073050N
Wet brakes
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
WARNING
• Water washing in the engine
compartment including high
pressure water washing is not
recommended. It may cause
the failure of electrical circuits
or engine and related part
located in the engine com-
partment.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents and the air duct inside
the vehicle as this may dam-
age them.
CAUTION
Maintenance
7
7-95
Finish damage repair
Deep scratches or stone chips in the
painted surface must be repaired
promptly. Exposed metal will quickly
rust and may develop into a major
repair expense.
✽ NOTICE
If your vehicle is damaged and
requires any metal repair or
replacement, be sure the body shop
applies anti-corrosion materials to
the parts repaired or replaced.
Bright-metal maintenance
• To remove road tar and insects,
use a tar remover, not a scraper or
other sharp object.
• To protect the surfaces of bright-
metal parts from corrosion, apply a
coating of wax or chrome preser-
vative and rub to a high luster.
• During winter weather or in coastal
areas, cover the bright metal parts
with a heavier coating of wax or
preservative. If necessary, coat the
parts with non-corrosive petroleum
jelly or other protective compound.
• Wiping dust or dirt off the
body with a dry cloth will
scratch the finish.
• Do not use steel wool, abra-
sive cleaners, or strong deter-
gents containing highly alka-
line or caustic agents on
chrome-plated or anodized
aluminum parts. This may
result in damage to the pro-
tective coating and cause dis-
coloration or paint deteriora-
tion.
CAUTION
7-96
Maintenance
Underbody maintenance
Corrosive materials used for ice and
snow removal and dust control may
collect on the underbody. If these
materials are not removed, acceler-
ated rusting can occur on underbody
parts such as the fuel lines, frame,
floor pan and exhaust system, even
though they have been treated with
rust protection.
Thoroughly flush the vehicle under-
body and wheel openings with luke-
warm or cold water once a month,
after off-road driving and at the end
of each winter. Pay special attention
to these areas because it is difficult
to see all the mud and dirt. It will do
more harm than good to wet down
the road grime without removing it.
The lower edges of doors, rocker
panels, and frame members have
drain holes that should not be
allowed to clog with dirt; trapped
water in these areas can cause rust-
ing.
Aluminum or chrome wheel main-
tenance
The aluminum or chrome wheels are
coated with a clear protective finish.
• Do not use any abrasive cleaner,
polishing compound, solvent, or
wire brushes on aluminum or
chrome wheels. They may scratch
or damage the finish.
• Clean the wheel when it has
cooled.
• Use only a mild soap or neutral
detergent, and rinse thoroughly
with water. Also, be sure to clean
the wheels after driving on salted
roads. This helps prevent corro-
sion.
• Avoid washing the wheels with
high-speed car wash brushes.
• Do not use any alkaline or acid
detergent. It may damage and cor-
rode the aluminum or chrome
wheels coated with a clear protec-
tive finish.
After washing the vehicle, test
the brakes while driving slowly
to see if they have been affected
by water. If braking performance
is impaired, dry the brakes by
applying them lightly while
maintaining a slow forward
speed.
WARNING
Maintenance
7
7-97
Corrosion protection
Protecting your vehicle from corro-
sion
By using the most advanced design
and construction practices to combat
corrosion, we produces cars of the
highest quality. However, this is only
part of the job. To achieve the long-
term corrosion resistance your vehi-
cle can deliver, the owner's coopera-
tion and assistance is also required.
Common causes of corrosion
The most common causes of corro-
sion on your car are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture that is
allowed to accumulate underneath
the car.
• Removal of paint or protective
coatings by stones, gravel, abra-
sion or minor scrapes and dents
which leave unprotected metal
exposed to corrosion.
High-corrosion areas
If you live in an area where your car
is regularly exposed to corrosive
materials, corrosion protection is
particularly important. Some of the
common causes of accelerated cor-
rosion are road salts, dust control
chemicals, ocean air and industrial
pollution.
Moisture breeds corrosion
Moisture creates the conditions in
which corrosion is most likely to
occur. For example, corrosion is
accelerated by high humidity, partic-
ularly when temperatures are just
above freezing. In such conditions,
the corrosive material is kept in con-
tact with the car surfaces by moisture
that is slow to evaporate.
Mud is particularly corrosive
because it is slow to dry and holds
moisture in contact with the vehicle.
Although the mud appears to be dry,
it can still retain the moisture and
promote corrosion.
High temperatures can also acceler-
ate corrosion of parts that are not
properly ventilated so the moisture
can be dispersed. For all these rea-
sons, it is particularly important to
keep your car clean and free of mud
or accumulations of other materials.
This applies not only to the visible
surfaces but particularly to the
underside of the car.
To help prevent corrosion
You can help prevent corrosion from
getting started by observing the fol-
lowing:
7-98
Maintenance
Keep your car clean
The best way to prevent corrosion is
to keep your car clean and free of
corrosive materials. Attention to the
underside of the car is particularly
important.
• If you live in a high-corrosion area
— where road salts are used, near
the ocean, areas with industrial
pollution, acid rain, etc.—, you
should take extra care to prevent
corrosion. In winter, hose off the
underside of your car at least once
a month and be sure to clean the
underside thoroughly when winter
is over.
• When cleaning underneath the car,
give particular attention to the
components under the fenders and
other areas that are hidden from
view. Do a thorough job; just damp-
ening the accumulated mud rather
than washing it away will acceler-
ate corrosion rather than prevent it.
Water under high pressure and
steam are particularly effective in
removing accumulated mud and
corrosive materials.
• When cleaning lower door panels,
rocker panels and frame members,
be sure that drain holes are kept
open so that moisture can escape
and not be trapped inside to accel-
erate corrosion.
Keep your garage dry
Don't park your car in a damp, poor-
ly ventilated garage. This creates a
favorable environment for corrosion.
This is particularly true if you wash
your car in the garage or drive it into
the garage when it is still wet or cov-
ered with snow, ice or mud. Even a
heated garage can contribute to cor-
rosion unless it is well ventilated so
moisture is dispersed.
Keep paint and trim in good con-
dition
Scratches or chips in the finish
should be covered with "touch-up"
paint as soon as possible to reduce
the possibility of corrosion. If bare
metal is showing through, the atten-
tion of a qualified body and paint
shop is recommended.
Bird droppings : Bird droppings are
highly corrosive and may damage
painted surfaces in just a few hours.
Always remove bird droppings as
soon as possible.
Don't neglect the interior
Moisture can collect under the floor
mats and carpeting to cause corro-
sion. Check under the mats periodi-
cally to be sure the carpeting is dry.
Use particular care if you carry fertil-
izers, cleaning materials or chemi-
cals in the car.
These should be carried only in
proper containers and any spills or
leaks should be cleaned up, flushed
with clean water and thoroughly
dried.
Maintenance
7
7-99
Interior care
Interior general precautions
Prevent chemicals such as perfume,
cosmetic oil, sun cream, hand clean-
er, and air freshener from contacting
the interior parts because they may
cause damage or discoloration. If
they do contact the interior parts,
wipe them off immediately. See the
instructions for the proper way to
clean vinyl.
Cleaning the upholstery and inte-
rior trim
Vinyl
Remove dust and loose dirt from
vinyl with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean vinyl surfaces with a
vinyl cleaner.
Fabric
Remove dust and loose dirt from fab-
ric with a whisk broom or vacuum
cleaner. Clean with a mild soap solu-
tion recommended for upholstery or
carpets. Remove fresh spots imme-
diately with a fabric spot cleaner. If
fresh spots do not receive immediate
attention, the fabric can be stained
and its color can be affected. Also, its
fire-resistant properties can be
reduced if the material is not proper-
ly maintained.
Cleaning the lap/shoulder belt
webbing
Clean the belt webbing with any mild
soap solution recommended for
cleaning upholstery or carpet. Follow
the instructions provided with the
soap. Do not bleach or re-dye the
webbing because this may weaken it.
Cleaning the interior window
glass
If the interior glass surfaces of the
vehicle become fogged (that is, cov-
ered with an oily, greasy or waxy
film), they should be cleaned with
glass cleaner. Follow the directions
on the glass cleaner container.
• Never allow water or other liq-
uids to come in contact with
electrical/electronic compo-
nents inside the vehicle as
this may damage them.
• When cleaning leather prod-
ucts (steering wheel, seats
etc.), use neutral detergents
or low alcohol content solu-
tions. If you use high alcohol
content solutions or
acid/alkaline detergents, the
color of the leather may fade
or the surface may get
stripped off.
CAUTION
Using anything but recom-
mended cleaners and proce-
dures may affect the fabric’s
appearance and fire-resistant
properties.
CAUTION
Do not scrape or scratch the
inside of the rear window. This
may result in damage to the rear
window defroster grid.
CAUTION
7-100
Maintenance
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The emission control system of your
vehicle is covered by a written limited
warranty. Please see the warranty
information contained in the
Warranty & Maintenance booklet in
your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with an
emission control system to meet all
applicable emission regulations.
There are three emission control
systems, as follows.
(1) Crankcase emission control sys-
tem
(2) Evaporative emission control sys-
tem
(3) Exhaust emission control system
In order to assure the proper function
of the emission control systems, it is
recommended that you have your
car inspected and maintained by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer in accor-
dance with the maintenance sched-
ule in this manual.
Caution for the Inspection and
Maintenance Test (With Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) system)
• To prevent the vehicle from mis-
firing during dynamometer test-
ing, turn the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) system off by
pressing the ESC switch.
• After dynamometer testing is
completed, turn the ESC system
back on by pressing the ESC
switch again.
1. Crankcase emission control
system
The positive crankcase ventilation
system is employed to prevent air
pollution caused by blow-by gases
being emitted from the crankcase.
This system supplies fresh filtered air
to the crankcase through the air
intake hose. Inside the crankcase,
the fresh air mixes with blow-by
gases, which then pass through the
PCV valve into the induction system.
2. Evaporative emission con-
trol (including ORVR:
Onboard Refueling Vapor
Recovery)
system
The Evaporative Emission Control
System is designed to prevent fuel
vapors from escaping into the atmos-
phere.
(The ORVR system is designed to
allow the vapors from the fuel tank to
be loaded into a canister while refu-
eling at the gas station, preventing
the escape of fuel vapors into the
atmosphere.)
Maintenance
7
7-101
Canister
Fuel vapors generated inside the fuel
tank are absorbed and stored in the
onboard canister. When the engine is
running, the fuel vapors absorbed in
the canister are drawn into the
engine intake manifold through the
purge control solenoid valve.
Purge Control Solenoid Valve
(PCSV)
The purge control solenoid valve is
controlled by the Engine Control
Module (ECM); when the engine
coolant temperature is low during
idling, the PCSV closes so that evap-
orated fuel is not taken into the
engine. After the engine warms-up
during ordinary driving, the PCSV
opens to introduce evaporated fuel to
the engine.
3. Exhaust emission control
system
The Exhaust Emission Control
System is a highly effective system
which controls exhaust emissions
while maintaining good vehicle per-
formance.
Vehicle modifications
• This vehicle should not be modi-
fied. Modification of your vehicle
could affect its performance, safety
or durability and may even violate
governmental safety and emis-
sions regulations.
In addition, damage or perform-
ance problems resulting from any
modification may not be covered
under warranty.
• Use of unauthorized electric
devices may cause: Abnormal
vehicle operation, Wire damage,
Battery discharge, Fire.
Be careful not to damage your
vehicle by use of unauthorized
electric devices.
Engine exhaust gas precautions
(carbon monoxide)
• Carbon monoxide can be present
with other exhaust fumes.
Therefore, if you smell exhaust
fumes of any kind inside your vehi-
cle, have it inspected and repaired
immediately. If you ever suspect
exhaust fumes are coming into
your vehicle, drive it only with all
the windows fully open. Have your
vehicle checked and repaired
immediately.
7-102
Maintenance
• Do not operate the engine in con-
fined or closed areas (such as
garages) any more than what is
necessary to move the vehicle in or
out of the area.
• When the vehicle is stopped in an
open area for more than a short
time with the engine running,
adjust the ventilation system (as
needed) to draw outside air into the
vehicle.
• Never sit in a parked or stopped
vehicle for any extended time with
the engine running.
• When the engine stalls or fails to
start, excessive attempts to restart
the engine may cause damage to
the emission control system.
Exhaust
Engine exhaust gases contain
carbon monoxide (CO). Though
colorless and odorless, it is
dangerous and could be lethal if
inhaled. Follow the instructions
on this page to avoid CO poi-
soning.
WARNING
Engine exhaust and a wide vari-
ety of automobile components
and parts, including compo-
nents found in the interior fur-
nishings in a vehicle, contain or
emit chemicals known to the
State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects and repro-
ductive harm. In addition, cer-
tain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of compo-
nent wear contain or emit chem-
icals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproduc-
tive harm.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION
65 WARNING
Maintenance
7
7-103
Operating precautions for catalyt-
ic converters (if equipped)
Your vehicle is equipped with a cat-
alytic converter emission control
device.
Therefore, the following precautions
must be observed:
• Use only UNLEADED FUEL for
gasoline engines.
• Do not operate the vehicle when
there are signs of engine malfunc-
tion, such as misfire or a noticeable
loss of performance.
• Do not misuse or abuse the
engine. Examples of misuse are
coasting with the ignition off and
descending steep grades in gear
with the ignition off.
• Do not operate the engine at high
idle speed for extended periods (5
minutes or more).
• Do not modify or tamper with any
part of the engine or emission con-
trol system. All inspections and
adjustments must be made by an
authorized K900 Kia dealer.
• Avoid driving with a very low fuel
level. If you run out of gasoline, it
could cause the engine to misfire
and result in excessive loading of
the catalytic converter.
Failure to observe these precautions
could result in damage to the catalyt-
ic converter and to your vehicle.
Additionally, such actions could void
your warranties.
Fire
• A hot exhaust system can
ignite flammable items under
your vehicle. Do not park, idle,
or drive the vehicle over or
near flammable objects, such
as grass, vegetation, paper,
leaves, etc.
• The exhaust system and cat-
alytic system are very hot
while the engine is running or
immediately after the engine
is turned off. Keep away from
the exhaust system and cat-
alytic; you may get burned.
Also, do not remove the heat
sink around the exhaust sys-
tem, do not seal the bottom of
the vehicle or do not coat the
vehicle for corrosion control.
It may present a fire risk under
certain conditions.
WARNING
7-104
Maintenance
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE NOTICE
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply, See
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
Notice to California Vehicle Dismantlers:
Perchlorate containing materials, such as air bag infla-
tors, seatbelt pretensioners and keyless remote entry
batteries, must be disposed of according to Title 22
California Code of Regulations Section 67384.10 (a).
Specifications, C
onsumer information and Reporting safety defects
Dimensions .........................................................8-2
Engine.................................................................8-2
Bulb wattage .......................................................8-3
Weight/volume ....................................................8-4
Tires and wheels.................................................8-5
Recommended lubricants and capacities...........8-6
• Recommended SAE viscosity number....................8-8
Vehicle identification number (VIN).....................8-9
Vehicle certification label ....................................8-9
Tire specification and pressure label ................8-10
Engine number .................................................8-10
Refrigerant label ...............................................8-10
Consumer assistance (U.S only) ......................8-11
Electrical equipment (U.S only) ........................8-14
Reporting safety defects...................................8-15
Online factory authorized manuals (U.S only)......8-15
DIMENSIONS
Item in (mm)
Overall length 200.59 (5,095)
Overall width 74.80 (1,900)
Overall height 58.46 (1,485) *
1
Front tread
245/50 R18 63.62 (1,616)
245/45 R19 63.78 (1,620)
Rear tread
245/50 R18 64.33 (1,634)
275/40 R19 64.06 (1,627)
Wheelbase 119.88 (3,044)
Item Gasoline Lambda II 3.8 Gasoline Tau 5.0
Displacement
cu. in (cc)
230.54 (3,778)
307.3 (5,038)
Bore x Stroke
in. (mm)
3.78x3.42 (96x87)
3.78x3.42 (96x87)
Firing order 1-2-3-4-5-6
1-2-7-8-4-5-6-3
No. of cylinders 6, V - type
8, V - type
ENGINE
*
1
with air suspension
BULB WATTAGE
Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Front
LED Type
Headlamps (Low) LED LED
Headlamps (High) LED LED
HID Type
Headlamps (Low) 35 D3S
Headlamps (High) 60 9005HL+
Side marker lamps LED LED
Front turn signal lamps LED LED
Front position lamps LED LED
Front fog lamps LED LED
Side Repeater lamps (Outside Mirror) LED LED
Puddle lamps LED LED
Daytime running lamps LED LED
Rear
Rear Stop/tail lamps (Inside/outside) LED LED
Rear tail lamps (Inside/outside) LED LED
Rear Stop lamps (Inside/outside) LED LED
Rear turn signal lamps
(Inside/outside)
LED LED
Back-up lamps 16 W16W
High mounted stop lamp LED LED
License plate lamps LED LED
Light Bulb Wattage Bulb type
Interior
Map lamps LED LED
Room lamps LED LED
Vanity mirror lamps LED LED
Glove box lamp 5 FESTOON
Door courtesy lamps LED LED
Foot lamps LED LED
Mood lamps LED LED
Luggage lamp 5 FESTOON
Item Gasoline 3.8 Gasoline 5.0
Gross vehicle weight
lbs. (kg)
5,357 (2,430) 5,620 (2,550)
Luggage volume
cu ft (l)
15.9 (450) 15.9 (450)
WEIGHT/VOLUME
TIRES AND WHEELS
✽ NOTICE
It is permissible to add 3psi to the standard tire pressure specification if colder temperatures are expected soon.
Tires typically loose 1psi for every 12°F temperature drop. If extreme temperature variations are expected, re-check
your tire pressure as necessary to keep them properly inflated.
* Normal load : Up to 3 persons
Item Tire size Wheel size
Inflation pressure kPa (psi)
Wheel lug nut
torque
lb•ft (kg•m, N•m)
Normal load * Maximum load
Front Rear Front Rear
Full size tire
P245/50R18 7.5JX18 230 (33) 230 (33) 230 (33) 230 (33)
65~79
(9~11, 88~107)
P245/45R19 8.0JX19 210 (31) - 210 (31) -
P275/40R19 9.0JX19 - 210 (31) - 210 (31)
Compact spare tire
T155/80R18 4.0TX18 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)
T155/70R19 4.0TX19 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60) 420 (60)
When replacing tires, use the same size originally supplied with the vehicle.
Using tires of a different size can damage the related parts or make it work irregularly.
CAUTION
RECOMMENDED LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
To help achieve proper engine and powertrain performance and durability, use only lubricants of the proper quality.
The correct lubricants also help promote engine efficiency that results in improved fuel economy.
These lubricants and fluids are recommended for use in your vehicle.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Engine oil *
1
*
2
(drain and refill)
Recommends (or equivalent)
3.8L
6.02 US qt. (5.7 l)
ACEA A5
5.0L
7.61 US qt. (7.2 l)
API Service SM*
3
, ILSAC GF-4 or above
Automatic transmission fluid
10.14 US qt. (9.6 l)
GS ATF SP-IV-RR, Kia genuine
ATF SP-IV-RR or other brands meeting the above
specification approved by Kia Motor Co.,
Power steering fluid
0.95 US qt. (0.9 l)
Pentosin CHF 202
*
1
Refer to the recommended SAE viscosity numbers on the next page.
*
2
Engine oils labeled Energy Conserving Oil are now available. Along with other additional benefits, they contribute
to fuel economy by reducing the amount of fuel necessary to overcome engine friction. Often, these improvements
are difficult to measure in everyday driving, but in a year’s time, they can offer significant cost and energy savings.
*
3
If the API service SM engine oil is not available in your country, you are able to use API service SL.
Lubricant Volume Classification
Coolant
3.8L
9.1 US qt. (8.6 l)
Mixture of antifreeze and water
(Ethylene glycol base coolant for aluminum radiator)
5.0L
11.4 US qt. (10.8 l)
Brake fluid
0.7~0.8 US qt. (0.7~0.8 l)
FMVSS116 DOT-3 or DOT-4
Rear differential oil
1.48 US qt. (1.4 l)
Hypoid gear oil API GL-5, SAE 75W/90
(SHELL HD AXLE OIL 75W/90 Equivalent)
Fuel
19.81 US gal. (75 l)
Refer to “Fuel requirements” in section 1
Recommended SAE viscosity
number
Always be sure to clean the area
around any filler plug, drain plug, or
dipstick before checking or draining
any lubricant. This is especially
important in dusty or sandy areas
and when the vehicle is used on
unpaved roads. Cleaning the plug
and dipstick areas will prevent dirt
and grit from entering the engine and
other mechanisms that could be
damaged.
Engine oil viscosity (thickness) has
an effect on fuel economy and cold
weather operating (engine start and
engine oil flowability). Lower viscosi-
ty engine oils can provide better fuel
economy and cold weather perform-
ance, however, higher viscosity
engine oils are required for satisfac-
tory lubrication in hot weather. Using
oils of any viscosity other than those
recommended could result in engine
damage.
When choosing an oil, consider the
range of temperature your vehicle
will be operated in before the next oil
change.
Proceed to select the recommended
oil viscosity from the chart.
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Engine Oil *
1
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of
a viscosity grade SAE 5W-30 (API Service SM / ILSAC GF-4).
However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the
proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
10W-30
5W-30
Temperature Range for SAE Viscosity Numbers
Temperature
Engine Oil *
1
°C
(°F)
-30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50
-10 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
1. For better fuel economy, it is recommended to use the engine oil of
a viscosity grade SAE 5W-20 (API Service SM / ILSAC GF-4).
However, if the engine oil is not available in your country, select the
proper engine oil using the engine oil viscosity chart.
10W-30
5W-20, 5W-30
■ 3.8L
■ 5.0L
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN)
The vehicle identification number
(VIN) is the number used in register-
ing your car and in all legal matters
pertaining to its ownership, etc.
The number is punched on the floor
under the front passenger’s seat. To
check the number, open the cover.
The VIN is also on a plate attached
to the top of the dashboard. The
number on the plate can easily be
seen through the windshield from
outside.
The vehicle certification label
attached on the driver’s side center
pillar gives the vehicle identification
number (VIN).
OKH083004N
VIN label
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION
LABEL
OKH083001N
Frame number
OKH083002N
The tires supplied on your new vehi-
cle are chosen to provide the best
performance for normal driving.
The tire label located on the driver's
side center pillar gives the tire pres-
sures recommended for your car.
The engine number is stamped on
the engine block as shown in the
drawing.
The refrigerant label is located on
the underside of the hood.
The label contains the following infor-
mation:
• Type of refrigerant
• Amount of refrigerant
OKH083005N
TIRE SPECIFICATION AND
PRESSURE LABEL
ENGINE NUMBER REFRIGERANT LABEL
OKH073055N
OKH073078N
Roadside Assistance is provided on all new current
model year Kia Vehicles from the date the vehicle is deliv-
ered to the first retail buyer or otherwise put into use (in-
service date), whichever is earlier, for a period of 60
months or 60,000 miles, whichever is earlier, subject to
the terms, conditions and exclusions set forth in the Kia
Warranty and Consumer Information Manual applicable
to your model year vehicle.
KMA reserves the right to limit or deny services or other
benefits to any owner or driver when, in KMA's judgment,
the claims and/or service requests are excessive in fre-
quency or type of occurrence.
Toll free consumer assistance
Kia's toll-free Consumer Assistance hot line is staffed
from 5:00 AM to 6:00 PM PST, Monday through Friday
and is accessible by dialing 1-855-4KIAVIP (855-454-
2847) or 1-800-333-4KIA (800-333-4542).
For more information regarding assistance available,
please refer to your Kia Warranty & Consumer
Information Manual.
Emergency roadside assistance
Kia's toll free Roadside Assistance hot line is staffed 24
hours a day, 365 days a year and is accessible by dialing
1-855-4KIAVIP (855-454-2847) or 1-800-333-4KIA (800-
333-4542).
Please note that you must provide your Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN) to verify coverage at the time
of your call. The VIN can be found on the dash of your
vehicle on the driver’s side, on the door jamb of the dri-
ver’s door, your vehicle’s registration or proof of insur-
ance card.
Kia utilizes a network of over 17,000 roadside assistance
providers. Should you accidentally run out of fuel, require
a battery jump, or need help changing a tire, a Kia
Roadside Assistance Representative will dispatch some-
one to deliver a small quantity of gas, change a flat tire
with your inflated spare, or arrange a battery jump to
allow you to proceed to your destination. We have access
to a network of over 10,000 locksmiths to help you should
you become locked out of your Kia.
In the event that mechanical difficulty renders your vehi-
cle undriveable due to a warranty-related concern, Kia’s
Roadside Assistance Representative will arrange to
transport your vehicle to the nearest Kia dealer or to an
alternative service location.
CONSUMER ASSISTANCE (U.S. ONLY)
Your vehicle must be accessible to our dispatch transport
vehicle, as determined by our driver, to receive this serv-
ice. In the event that Kia does not have a dealer or an
alternative service location available in a particular loca-
tion, Kia will work with a reputable local service facility to
ensure that you receive prompt service. Warranty repairs
are performed at no cost.
24-hour Roadside Assistance is a service plan provided
by Kia Motors America, Inc. Certain limitations apply.
Coverage details are available in the Kia Warranty and
Consumer Information Manual.
✽ NOTICE
Roadside Assistance benefits are not available for any
Kia vehicle that has ever been or should be issued a “sal-
vage” title or similar “branded” title under any state’s
law or has been declared a “total loss” or equivalent by
a financial institution or insurance company.
Trip interruption
Trip interruption expense benefits are provided in the
event that a warranty-related disablement occurs more
than 150 miles from your home, and the repairs require
more than 24 hours to complete. Reasonable reimburse-
ment is included for meals, lodging, or rental vehicle
expenses. Trip interruption coverage is limited to $100
per day subject to a three day maximum limit per incident.
You must contact the Kia Roadside Assistance Center to
obtain pre-authorization of expenses. Once the Kia
Roadside Assistance Center gives authorization for trip
interruption benefits, they will assist you in making the
necessary arrangements. Insurance deductibles,
expenses, and claims paid by your insurance company or
other providers are not eligible for reimbursement.
Fleet vehicles are excluded from reimbursement under
Kia’s Trip Interruption Policy.
Registering your vehicle in a foreign country
If you plan to register your vehicle in a foreign country,
you should confirm that it conforms to the regulations in
that country. Even if you successfully register the vehicle
in a foreign country, you may experience the following
problems and should therefore consider the possibility of
having to deal with them:
1.The fuel specified for your vehicle may be unavailable.
If other than the specified fuel is used, it could cause
damage to the engine, the fuel injection system, and
other fuel-related parts which may not be covered
under your New Vehicle Emissions Limited Warranty.
2.We must, therefore, clearly state that when you leave
the country in which you purchased your Kia new and
register it in another country, problems arising from the
use of fuel other than the specified fuel are not subject
to manufacturer’s warranty. Because vehicles like yours
may not be marketed in the new country of registration,
parts, servicing techniques and tools necessary to
maintain and repair your vehicle may be unavailable.
Even if vehicles like yours are sold there, mechanical
specifications required by the government may vary
enough from the country of purchase to cause addi-
tional problems.
3.There may not be an Authorized K900 Kia Dealer in the
area in which you plan to register your vehicle. You may
additionally experience difficulty in obtaining services in
a foreign country for any number of reasons.
Further, we cannot assume any responsibility for prob-
lems that result from unsatisfactory service, certain incor-
rect or misleading information or lack of service received
or provided outside the United.
The electrical system of your vehicle is designed to per-
orm under all reasonably expected operating conditions.
However, before any additional electrical equipment is
installed in your vehicle, consult an Authorized K900 Kia
Dealer, in order to ensure that you do not void your war-
ranty.
Certain electrical equipment, or the way in which it is
installed, may adversely affect the operation of your vehi-
cle, including such systems as the engine control system,
the audio system and the electrical charging system and
thus potentially void all or part of your warranty.
We assume no responsibility for any expense you may
incur or for any malfunction of your vehicle or any of its
components or systems that may result from the installa-
tion of additional electrical equipment that is not supplied,
or recommended for installation by, Kia.
Installation of a mobile two-way radio system
If a mobile two-way radio system is installed improperly,
or if an excessively powerful type of system is used, other
electronic systems may be adversely affected. To avoid
damage to your vehicle, consult an Authorized K900 Kia
Dealer concerning the proper equipment and installation.
Kia motor vehicles are designed and manufactured to
meet or exceed all applicable safety standards.
For your safety, however, we strongly urge you to read
and follow all directions in this Owner's Manual, particu-
larly the information under the headings "NOTICE",
"CAUTION" and "WARNING".
If, after reading this manual, you have any questions
regarding the operation of your vehicle, safety issues and
defects please contact your Kia's toll-free Consumer
Assistance hot line as below:
National Consumer Affairs Manager
Kia Motors America, Inc.
P.O. Box 52410
Irvine, CA 92619-2410
1-855-4KIAVIP (855-454-2847) or
1-800-333-4KIA (800-333-4542).
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT (U.S. ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could
cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Kia
Motors America, Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy cam-
paign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-
vidual problems between you, your dealer, or Kia Motors
America, Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-
9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Ave., SE., West
Building, Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
other information about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
The following publications are available on
www.KiaTechinfo.com at no charge.
Service manual:
This manual covers maintenance and recommended pro-
cedures for repair to engine and chassis components. It
is written for the Journeyman mechanic, but is simple
enough for most mechanically inclined owners to under-
stand.
Electrical troubleshooting manual:
This manual complements the Service Manual by provid-
ing indepth troubleshooting information for each electrical
circuit in your vehicle.
Owner's manual:
This manual describes the overall features and operating
procedures for the vehicle.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS (U.S. ONLY) ONLINE FACTORY AUTHORIZED MANUALS
(U.S. ONLY)
Index
I
Index
I
A/V mode.......................................................................4-65
Advanced Smart Cruise Control System (ASCC).........5-60
Speed setting (ASCC) ...............................................5-61
To convert to cruise control mode.............................5-69
Vehicle to vehicle distance setting (ASCC) .............5-65
Advanced Vehicle Safety a (AVSM) .............................5-48
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System)....................4-116
Air bag warning label ....................................................3-62
Air bag warning light.....................................................3-42
Air bags..........................................................................3-39
Air bag warning label................................................3-62
Air bag warning light ................................................3-42
Curtain air bag...........................................................3-55
Driver's and passenger's front air bag .......................3-51
Inflation and non-inflation conditions .....................3-56
Occupant detection system........................................3-45
Side air bag................................................................3-53
SRS Care ...................................................................3-61
SRS components and functions ................................3-43
Air cleaner .....................................................................7-40
Air ventilation seat ......................................................4-154
Airconditioning system
Automatic climate control system ..........................4-128
Alarm system .................................................................4-14
Antenna........................................................................4-163
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) ......................................5-40
Appearance care.............................................................7-93
Exterior care ..............................................................7-93
Interior care ...............................................................7-99
Armrest (rear) ................................................................3-18
ASCC/LDWS mode.......................................................4-64
Audio / Video / Navigation system (AVN)..................4-162
Auto door lock/unlock feature.......................................4-20
Auto Hold ......................................................................5-36
Auto light/AFLS position ............................................4-115
Automatic climate control system ...............................4-128
Air conditioning ......................................................4-137
Automatic heating and air conditioning..................4-129
Manual heating and air conditioning ......................4-130
Automatic transmission (Shift by cable) .......................5-11
Manual mode.............................................................5-13
Shift-lock override.....................................................5-15
Automatic transmission (Shift by wire) ........................5-16
Manual mode.............................................................5-20
When the battery is discharged .................................5-22
Automatic turn off function ........................................4-123
Aux, USB and iPod® port...........................................4-161
Bag hanger ...................................................................4-158
Battery............................................................................7-48
Battery replacement (for smart key)................................4-9
I-2
Index
A
B
Battery saver function..................................................4-113
Before driving..................................................................5-4
Blind Spot Detection System(BSD) ..............................5-79
BSD (Blind Spot Detection) /
LCA (Lane Change Assist) .....................................5-80
RCTA (Rear cross traffic alert) .................................5-83
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology hands-free...............4-163
Brake system..................................................................5-27
Advanced Vehicle Safety Management (AVSM)......5-48
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)..................................5-40
Auto Hold..................................................................5-36
Electric parking brake (EPB) ....................................5-30
Electronic stability control (ESC) .............................5-42
Hill-start assist control (HAC) ..................................5-46
Power brakes .............................................................5-27
Brakes fluid....................................................................7-37
Bulb replacement ...........................................................7-87
Bulb wattage ....................................................................8-3
Button start/stop, see engine start/stop button.................5-6
Camera see the Rear-Camera Display .........................4-107
Capacities (Lubricants)....................................................8-6
Care
Exterior care ..............................................................7-93
Interior care ...............................................................7-99
Tire care.....................................................................7-53
Center console storage.................................................4-146
Central door lock switch................................................4-19
Certification label ........................................................5-101
Chains - Tire ..................................................................5-94
Checking tire inflation pressure.....................................7-54
Child restraint system ....................................................3-32
Lower anchor system ................................................3-37
Seat belt.....................................................................3-33
Tether anchorage system ...........................................3-36
Child-protector rear door lock .......................................4-20
Climate control air filter ................................................7-43
Clock............................................................................4-156
Clothes hanger .............................................................4-157
Combined instrument, see instrument cluster ...............4-57
Compact spare tire .........................................................6-23
Compact spare tire replacement ....................................7-58
Consumer assistance(U.S. only)....................................8-11
Coolant...........................................................................7-34
Cooling fluid, see engine coolant ..................................7-34
Crankcase emission control system.............................7-100
Cruise control system ....................................................5-55
To set cruise control speed........................................5-56
Cup holder ...................................................................4-150
Curtain air bag ...............................................................3-55
Index
I-3
I
C
Dashboard illumination, see instrument panel
illumination ...............................................................4-58
Dashboard, see instrument cluster.................................4-57
Daytime running light .................................................4-114
Defogging (Windshield) ..............................................4-142
Defogging logic ...........................................................4-143
Defroster ......................................................................4-127
Outside rearview mirror defroster ..........................4-127
Rear window defroster ............................................4-127
Wiper deicer ............................................................4-127
Defrosting (Windshield) ..............................................4-142
Dimensions ......................................................................8-2
Display illumination, see instrument panel illumination ....4-58
Displays, see instrument cluster ....................................4-57
Door courtesy lamp .....................................................4-125
Door locks......................................................................4-17
Auto door lock/unlock feature ..................................4-20
Central door lock switch ...........................................4-19
Child-protector rear door lock ..................................4-20
Impact sensing door unlock system ..........................4-20
Power Door Latch .....................................................4-18
Rear door lock button................................................4-19
DRIVE mode .................................................................5-52
Drive mode integrated control system...........................5-52
DRIVE mode / SNOW mode....................................5-52
Driver Information System (DIS)................................4-162
Driver position memory system.......................................3-7
Driver's and passenger's front air bag............................3-51
Driving at night..............................................................5-90
Driving in flooded areas ................................................5-91
Driving in the rain..........................................................5-91
Driving off-road .............................................................5-92
Economical operation ....................................................5-87
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) .....................................4-45
Electric parking brake (EPB).........................................5-30
Electrical equipment(U.S. only) ....................................8-14
Electronic stability control (ESC) .................................5-42
Emergency starting ..........................................................6-5
Jump starting ...............................................................6-5
Emergency while driving.................................................6-3
Emission control system..............................................7-100
Crankcase emission control system ........................7-100
Evaporative emission control System .....................7-100
Exhaust emission control system ............................7-101
Engine ..............................................................................8-2
Engine compartment........................................................2-7
Engine coolant ...............................................................7-34
Engine Coolant Temperature guage ..............................4-60
Engine number...............................................................8-10
Engine oil.......................................................................7-32
Engine overheats..............................................................6-9
I-4
Index
E
D
Engine start/stop button ...................................................5-6
Engine start/stop button position.................................5-6
Illuminated engine start/stop button............................5-6
Engine start/stop button illumination ..............................5-6
Engine start/stop button position .....................................5-6
Engine will not start.........................................................6-4
Evaporative emission control System..........................7-100
Exhaust emission control system.................................7-101
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ...............7-29
Exterior care...................................................................7-93
Exterior overview.............................................................2-2
Flat tire ..........................................................................6-17
Changing tires ...........................................................6-18
Compact spare tire ....................................................6-23
Jack and tools ............................................................6-17
Jack label...................................................................6-26
Removing and storing the spare tire .........................6-18
Floor mat anchor(s) .....................................................4-157
Fluid
Brakes fluid ...............................................................7-37
Power steering fluid ..................................................7-38
Washer fluid ..............................................................7-39
Front blind spot monitoring system.............................4-110
Front fog light..............................................................4-119
Front lamp switch ........................................................4-123
Front seat adjustment - power .........................................3-4
Fuel Economy................................................................4-80
Fuel filler lid ..................................................................4-34
Emergency fuel filler lid release ...............................4-36
Fuel Gauge.....................................................................4-61
Fuel requirements ............................................................1-3
Fuse switch ....................................................................7-70
Fuses ..............................................................................7-68
Fuse switch................................................................7-70
Fuse/relay panel description......................................7-73
Instrument panel fuse ................................................7-69
Main fuse...................................................................7-72
Multi fuse ..................................................................7-72
Gauges ...........................................................................4-59
Glove box.....................................................................4-147
Glove box lamp............................................................4-126
Gross vehicle weight........................................................8-4
Hazard warning flasher....................................................6-2
Hazardous driving conditions ........................................5-89
Head Up Display (HUD) ...............................................4-99
Head Up Display Information.................................4-100
Head Up Display ON/OFF......................................4-100
Index
I-5
I
F
G
H
I-6
Index
Head Up Display Setting ........................................4-101
Head Up Display Information .....................................4-100
Head Up Display ON/OFF ..........................................4-100
Head Up Display Setting .............................................4-101
Headlight bulb replacement...........................................7-88
Headlight escort function ...........................................4-113
Headlight leveling device ............................................4-119
Headlight position........................................................4-115
Headrest(front).................................................................3-8
Headrest(rear) ................................................................3-16
Heated steering wheel....................................................4-43
Heater
Automatic climate control system ..........................4-128
High - beam operation .................................................4-117
Hight adjustment (front seat belt)..................................3-23
Highway driving ............................................................5-92
Hill-start assist control (HAC).......................................5-46
HomeLink
®
system........................................................4-45
Hood...............................................................................4-32
Horn ...............................................................................4-44
HUD see the Head Up Display .....................................4-99
Immobilizer system .......................................................4-12
Impact sensing door unlock system...............................4-20
Indicator light.................................................................4-93
Information Mode..........................................................4-65
Inside rearview mirror ...................................................4-45
Inside rearview mirror with compass ............................4-45
Instrument cluster ..........................................................4-57
Gauges.......................................................................4-59
Instrument panel illumination ...................................4-58
LCD Display Control ................................................4-58
Transaxle Shift Indicator...........................................4-62
Instrument panel fuse.....................................................7-69
Instrument panel overview...............................................2-5
Interior care....................................................................7-99
Interior features............................................................4-150
Air ventilation seat .................................................4-154
Bag hanger ..............................................................4-158
Clock .......................................................................4-156
Clothes hanger.........................................................4-157
Cup holder...............................................................4-150
Floor mat anchor(s).................................................4-157
Luggage net (holder)...............................................4-159
Power outlet.............................................................4-151
Rear curtain .............................................................4-159
Rear vanity mirror ...................................................4-158
Seat warmer.............................................................4-152
Side curtain..............................................................4-160
Sunvisor...................................................................4-150
Interior light .................................................................4-123
Automatic turn off function ...................................4-123
Door courtesy lamp.................................................4-125
Front lamp switch....................................................4-123
I
Index
I-7
I
Glove box lamp .......................................................4-126
Rear lamp switch.....................................................4-124
Trunk room lamp.....................................................4-125
Vanity mirror lamp ..................................................4-126
Interior overview .............................................................2-4
Jack and tools.................................................................6-17
Jack label .......................................................................6-26
Jump starting....................................................................6-5
Label
Air bag warning label................................................3-62
Certification label....................................................5-101
Refrigerant label........................................................8-10
Tire and loading information label............................5-98
Tire sidewall labeling ................................................7-59
Tire specification and pressure label.........................8-10
Lane change signals.....................................................4-118
Lane departure warning system (LDWS) .....................5-75
Lap/shoulder belt (3-Point system) ...............................3-22
LCD display...................................................................4-63
A/V mode ..................................................................4-65
ASCC/LDWS mode ..................................................4-64
Information Mode .....................................................4-65
LCD modes ...............................................................4-63
Trip computer mode ..................................................4-64
Turn By Turn (TBT) mode........................................4-64
User Settings Mode...................................................4-67
Warning Messages.....................................................4-73
LCD Display Control.....................................................4-58
LCD modes....................................................................4-63
Light bulbs .....................................................................7-87
Lighting........................................................................4-113
Battery saver function .............................................4-113
Daytime running light ............................................4-114
Front fog light .........................................................4-119
Headlight escort function .......................................4-113
Headlight leveling device........................................4-119
High - beam operation ............................................4-117
Lane change signals ................................................4-118
Lighting control.......................................................4-114
Turn signals .............................................................4-118
Lighting control ...........................................................4-114
AFLS (Adaptive Front Lighting System) ...............4-116
Auto light/AFLS position........................................4-115
Headlight position ...................................................4-115
Parking light position ..............................................4-115
Lower anchor system .....................................................3-37
Lubricants and capacities.................................................8-6
Luggage net (holder) ...................................................4-159
Luggage volume ..............................................................8-4
J
L
I-8
Index
Main fuse .......................................................................7-72
Maintenance.....................................................................7-5
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items ...........7-29
Maintenance services ..................................................7-5
Normal maintenance schedule ..................................7-11
Owner maintenance.....................................................7-8
Tire maintenance .......................................................7-58
Maintenance schedule....................................................7-11
Manual mode - Automatic transmission
(Shift by cable)..........................................................5-13
Manual mode - Automatic transmission
(Shift by wire) ...........................................................5-20
Map pocket ..................................................................4-149
Mechanical key operations ............................................4-10
Mirrors ...........................................................................4-45
Electric chromic mirror (ECM) ................................4-45
HomeLink
®
system ...................................................4-45
Inside rearview mirror...............................................4-45
Inside rearview mirror with compass........................4-45
Outside rearview mirror ............................................4-53
Moonroof, see Panoramic sunroof.................................4-37
Multi fuse.......................................................................7-72
Multimedia system.......................................................4-161
Antenna ...................................................................4-163
Audio / Video / Navigation system (AVN) .............4-162
Aux, USB and iPod
®
port .......................................4-161
Bluetooth
®
Wireless Technology hands-free ..........4-163
Driver Information System (DIS) ...........................4-162
Steering wheel audio control .................................4-164
USB charger ...........................................................4-161
Non-Powered Trunk.......................................................4-21
Normal maintenance schedule.......................................7-11
Occupant detection system ............................................3-45
Odometer .......................................................................4-62
ODS see the Occupant detection system.......................3-45
Oil (Engine) ...................................................................7-32
One time driving information mode ..............................4-83
Outside rearview mirror.................................................4-53
Adjusting outside rearview mirror ............................4-54
Folding the outside rearview mirror..........................4-55
Reverse parking aid function ....................................4-55
Outside Temperature Gauge ..........................................4-62
Overheats .........................................................................6-9
M
N
O
Panoramic sunroof .........................................................4-37
Sunroof open warning...............................................4-37
Parking assist system ...................................................4-102
Non-operational conditions.....................................4-104
Operation.................................................................4-102
Parking Guide System .................................................4-108
Parking light position...................................................4-115
Power brakes..................................................................5-27
Power Door Latch..........................................................4-18
Power outlet .................................................................4-151
Power Trunk...................................................................4-22
Power window lock button ............................................4-31
Pre-Safe Seat belt (PSB) ...............................................3-28
Pre-tensioner seat belt....................................................3-25
Rear curtain..................................................................4-159
Rear door lock button ....................................................4-19
Rear lamp switch .........................................................4-124
Rear seat adjustment (Power seat).................................3-13
Rear seat storage..........................................................4-146
Rear vanity mirror........................................................4-158
Rear-Camera Display...................................................4-107
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures ..................7-53
Recommended lubricants and capacities.........................8-6
Recommended SAE viscosity number........................8-8
Record your key number .................................................4-4
Refrigerant label ............................................................8-10
Remote keyless entry system operations.........................4-7
Replacement light bulb..................................................7-87
Reporting safety defects(U.S. only) ..............................8-15
Restrictions in handling keys.........................................4-11
Road warning...................................................................6-2
Rocking the vehicle .......................................................5-89
Rotation (Tire) ...............................................................7-55
Scheduled maintenance service .....................................7-10
Seat belt Precautions......................................................3-29
Seat belt warning ...........................................................3-21
Seat belts........................................................................3-20
Hight adjustment (front seat belt) .............................3-23
Lap/shoulder belt (3-Point system) ...........................3-22
Pre-Safe Seat belt (PSB) ..........................................3-28
Pre-tensioner seat belt ...............................................3-25
Seat belt Precautions .................................................3-29
Seat belt warning.......................................................3-21
Seat warmer .................................................................4-152
Seatback pocket ..........................................................4-148
Seats .................................................................................3-2
Armrest (rear)............................................................3-18
Driver position memory system..................................3-7
Index
I-9
I
P
R
S
Front seat adjustment - power.....................................3-4
Headrest(front) ............................................................3-8
Headrest(rear)............................................................3-16
Rear seat adjustment (Power seat) ............................3-13
Shift-lock override - Automatic transmission
(Shift by cable)..........................................................5-15
Side air bag ....................................................................3-53
Side curtain ..................................................................4-160
Smart Key ........................................................................4-4
Battery replacement ....................................................4-9
Immobilizer system...................................................4-12
Mechanical key operations........................................4-10
Record your key number.............................................4-4
Remote keyless entry system operations ....................4-7
Restrictions in handling keys ....................................4-11
Smart key functions.....................................................4-4
Smart key precautions .................................................4-6
Transmitter precautions...............................................4-8
Smart key functions .........................................................4-4
Smart key precautions......................................................4-6
Smooth cornering...........................................................5-90
SNOW mode..................................................................5-52
Snow tires ......................................................................5-93
Spare tire
Changing tires ...........................................................6-18
Compact spare tire ....................................................6-23
Compact spare tire replacement................................7-58
Special driving conditions .............................................5-89
Driving at night .........................................................5-90
Driving in flooded areas............................................5-91
Driving in the rain .....................................................5-91
Driving off-road ........................................................5-92
Hazardous driving conditions ...................................5-89
Highway driving........................................................5-92
Rocking the vehicle...................................................5-89
Smooth cornering ......................................................5-90
Speedometer...................................................................4-59
SRS Care........................................................................3-61
SRS components and functions .....................................3-43
Starting difficulties, see engine will not start ..................6-4
Starting the engine ...........................................................5-9
Starting the engine with a smart key...........................5-9
Starting the engine - With a smart key ............................5-9
Steering wheel ...............................................................4-42
Electronic Hydraulic Power Steering (EHPS) ..........4-42
Heated steering wheel ...............................................4-43
Horn...........................................................................4-44
Tilt and telescopic steering........................................4-42
Steering wheel audio control ......................................4-164
Storage compartment ...................................................4-146
Center console storage ............................................4-146
Glove box ................................................................4-147
Map pocket..............................................................4-149
Rear seat storage .....................................................4-146
Seatback pocket ......................................................4-148
Sunglass holder .......................................................4-147
I-10
Index
Sunglass holder............................................................4-147
Sunroof open warning ...................................................4-37
Sunvisor .......................................................................4-150
Surround View Monitoring System (SVM).................4-111
Tachometer.....................................................................4-59
Tether anchorage system................................................3-37
Theft-alarm system ........................................................4-14
Tilt and telescopic steering ............................................4-42
Tire and loading information label ................................5-98
Tire chains......................................................................5-94
Tire pressure monitoring system ...................................6-11
Tire rotation ...................................................................7-55
Tire specification and pressure label .............................8-10
Tires and wheels ..............................................................8-5
Checking tire inflation pressure ................................7-54
Compact spare tire replacement................................7-58
Low aspect ratio tire..................................................7-63
Recommended cold tire inflation pressures..............7-53
Tire care.....................................................................7-53
Tire maintenance .......................................................7-58
Tire replacement........................................................7-57
Tire rotation...............................................................7-55
Tire sidewall labeling ................................................7-59
Tire traction ...............................................................7-58
Wheel alignment and tire balance.............................7-56
Wheel replacement....................................................7-58
Towing ...........................................................................6-27
Emergency towing.....................................................6-30
Removable towing hook............................................6-29
Trailer Towing ...............................................................5-97
Transaxle Shift Indicator ...............................................4-62
Transmission - Automatic transmission
(Shift by cable)..........................................................5-11
Transmission - Automatic transmission
(Shift by wire) ...........................................................5-16
Transmitter precautions ...................................................4-8
Trip A/B .........................................................................4-82
Trip computer ................................................................4-80
Fuel Economy ...........................................................4-80
One time driving information mode .........................4-83
Trip A/B.....................................................................4-82
Trip computer mode ......................................................4-64
Trunk..............................................................................4-21
Emergency trunk safety release ................................4-26
Non-Powered Trunk ..................................................4-21
Power Trunk ..............................................................4-22
Trunk Lid Control Button ........................................4-25
Trunk Lid Control Button .............................................4-25
Trunk room lamp .........................................................4-125
Turn By Turn (TBT) mode ............................................4-64
Turn signals..................................................................4-118
Index
I-11
I
T
USB charger ................................................................4-161
User Settings Mode .......................................................4-67
Vanity mirror lamp.......................................................4-126
Vehicle break-in process .................................................1-5
Vehicle data collection and event data recorders.............1-6
Vehicle identification number (VIN)...............................8-9
Vehicle load limit...........................................................5-98
Certification label....................................................5-101
Tire and loading information label............................5-98
Vehicle weight .............................................................5-103
Warning light .................................................................4-84
Warning Messages .........................................................4-73
Washer fluid...................................................................7-39
Welcome system ..........................................................4-112
Headlight .................................................................4-112
Interior light ............................................................4-112
Puddle lamp.............................................................4-112
Wheel alignment and tire balance .................................7-56
Wheel replacement ........................................................7-58
Windows ........................................................................4-28
Power window lock button........................................4-31
Windshield defrosting and defogging..........................4-142
Windshield washers .....................................................4-122
Windshield wipers .......................................................4-120
Winter driving................................................................5-93
Snow tires..................................................................5-93
Tire chains .................................................................5-94
Wiper blades ..................................................................7-45
Wipers and washers .....................................................4-120
Windshield washers.................................................4-122
Windshield wipers...................................................4-120
I-12
Index
U
V
W
